AMTECH

Instruction Manual
Axpert-Eazy Series
200 V System, 11 kW (15 Hp) ~ 90 kW (125 Hp)
400 V System, 22 kW (30 Hp) ~ 1550 kW (2075 Hp)
500 V System, 30 kW (40 Hp) ~ 1550 kW (2075 Hp)
600 V System, 30 kW (40 Hp) ~ 1800 kW (2415 Hp)

NOTICE
1. Read this manual thoroughly before using the Axpert-Eazy, and store in a safe place for reference.
2. Make sure that this manual is delivered to the final user.

AMTECH
IMAE-01, Rev. 1.20 JUL 2017
Amtech

ii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE
Precautions For Safety
CHAPTER-1 DELIVERY, INSPECTION AND STORAGE
1-1 Delivery, inspection and storage
1-2 Details of rating nameplate
CHAPTER-2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
2-1 Installation environment
2-2 Precautions for power supply and motor wiring
2-3 Power terminal layout
2-4 Precautions for control signals wiring
CHAPTER-3 DIGITAL OPERATION PANEL (LCD KEYPAD MODULE)
3-1 Drive status
3-2 Modes & parameters
3-3 Parameter display & setting
CHAPTER-4 TEST OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT
4-1 Preparation before turning power ON
4-2 Initialization of motor constants in Mode-B
4-3 Automatic tuning & adjustment
CHAPTER-5 CONTROL INPUT / OUTPUT TERMINALS
5-1 Input/output terminal functions of PCA-2014A/PCA-2004A
5-2 Programmable sequence input (PSI) wiring
5-3 Programmable analog input (PAI) wiring
5-4 Programmable analog output (PAO) wiring
5-5 Programmable sequence output (PSO) wiring
5-6 Programmable sequence output (Relay) wiring
5-7 Default function assignment to terminals
CHAPTER-6 PARAMETER SETTINGS & FUNCTIONS
Mode-M monitor mode parameters
Mode-A parameters
Mode-B parameters
Mode-C parameters
Mode-D parameters
Mode-E parameters
Mode-G parameters
Mode-H parameters
Mode-P parameters

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

iii
 Function explanations
In-built PLC function explanations
CHAPTER-7 ELECTRONICS CIRCUIT BOARDS
7-1 Main control board
7-2 Display board
7-3 Power supply unit
7-4 IGBT gate driver boards
7-5 MOV, RC snubber, SC & bleeder board
7-6 Bleeder board
7-7 RC snubber board
7-8 MOV board
CHAPTER-8 MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION & PART REPLACEMENT
8-1 Inspection items
8-2 Measuring devices
CHAPTER-9 OPTIONS
CHAPTER-10 ENCODER SPECIFICATIONS
10-1 Applicable encoder specifications
10-2 Wiring example
CHAPTER-11 SERIAL COMMUNICATION SET UP
11-1 Connection method
11-2 Connecting the host computer and Axpert-Eazy (1-to-1)
11-3 Connecting the host computer and Axpert-Eazy (1-to- many)
11-4 Communication specifications
CHAPTER-12 UL INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER-13 CE Marking
13-1 Installation environments
13-2 Input filters and their connections
13-3 Wiring & Earthing
13-4 Considerations to measuring devices
13-5 Installation into a metal cabinet
13-6 Insulation test
Appendix-A Standard Specifications and Outline Dimension
Appendix-B Fault Codes
Appendix-C Trouble Shooting Guidelines
Appendix-D Revision History

Amtech

iv
PREFACE
THANK YOU for purchasing the “Amtech Axpert-Eazy Series AC Variable Frequency Drive”.
Axpert-Eazy Series AC Variable Frequency Drive is a modern Digital Signal Processor based highly
functional AC DRIVE that is easy to use. It employs latest generation IGBT as a switching device and
pwm control technique to apply commanded output to the motor to control the motor speed.
PLEASE READ THIS MANUAL THOROUGHLY before use, and keep the manual at hand for later
reference. Also make sure that this manual is delivered to the final users.
The purpose of this Instruction Manual is to provide basic information on Installation, Start-up,
Operational and Troubleshooting for the Axpert-Eazy Series AC Variable Frequency Drive.

WARNING

ALWAYS READ THIS MANUAL THOROUGHLY BEFORE USING THE AC DRIVE.

THIS AC DRIVE CONTAINS HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUITS THAT MAY BE FATAL TO HUMANS. USE
EXTREME CAUTION DURING INSTALLATION. MAINTENANCE MUST BE PERFORMED BY
QUALIFIED TECHNICIANS, AND ALL POWER SOURCES MUST BE DISCONNECTED BEFORE
ANY MAINTENANCE. SUFFICIENT NOTICE MUST BE GIVEN TO THE GENERAL OPERATORS
AND WORKERS BEFORE STARTING.
• ELECTRIC SHOCK MAY OCCUR IF THE FOLLOWING POINTS ARE NOT OBSERVED.
(1) DO NOT OPEN THE FRONT COVER WHILE THE POWER IS ON.
(2) A CHARGE STILL REMAINS IN THE AC DRIVE WHILE THE INDICATOR IS LIT EVEN IF THE
POWER HAS BEEN TURNED OFF. DO NOT OPEN THE FRONT COVER IN THIS CASE. WAIT AT
LEAST 20 MINUTES AFTER THE INDICATOR GOES OUT.
(3) DO NOT CONTACT THE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT WHILE THE "CHARGE" LED ON THE UNIT IS
LIT. PERFORM SERVICING, ETC., AFTER WAITING AT LEAST 20 MINUTES AFTER THE LAMP
GOES OUT.
(4) ALWAYS GROUND THE AC DRIVE CASE. THE GROUNDING METHOD MUST COMPLY WITH
THE LAWS OF THE COUNTRY WHERE THE AC DRIVE IS BEING INSTALLED.
• THE AC DRIVE MAY BE DESTROYED BEYOND REPAIR IF THE FOLLOWING POINTS ARE
NOT OBSERVED.
(1) OPERATION WITHIN THE AC DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS.
(2) PROPER CABLE CONNECTIONS TO INPUT/OUTPUT TERMINALS.
(3) CLEANING AND ENOUGH VENTILATION TO THE AC DRIVE INTAKE/OUTTAKE PORTS.
(4) OBSERVATION OF CAUTIONS LISTED IN THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
• THERE MAY BE SOURCES OF NOISE AROUND THIS AC DRIVE AND MOTOR DRIVEN BY THIS
AC DRIVE. CONSIDER THE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM, INSTALLATION PLACE AND WIRING
METHOD BEFORE INSTALLATION.
INSTALL THIS AC DRIVE AWAY FROM DEVICES THAT HANDLE MINUTE SIGNALS, SUCH AS
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT IN PARTICULAR. ALSO SEPARATE THE DEVICES ELECTRICALLY, AND
TAKE SUFFICIENT NOISE MEASURES.
• TAKE SUFFICIENT SAFETY MEASURES WHEN USING THIS AC DRIVE FOR PASSENGER
TRANSPORTATION, SUCH AS IN ELEVATORS (LIFTS).

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

v
Precautions For Safety
Items to be observed to prevent physical damage or property damage and to ensure safe use of this
product are noted on the product and in this instruction manual.

Please read this instruction manual and enclosed documents before starting operation to ensure
correct usage. Thoroughly understand the device, safety information and precautions before
starting operation. After reading, always store this manual where it can be accessed easily.

The safety precautions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION" in this instruction manual.

DANGER : When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken, leading to

fatal or major injuries.

: When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken, leading to

CAUTION medium or minor injuries, or physical damage.

CAUTION
Note that some items described as may lead to major problems depending on
the situation. In any case, important information that must be observed is described.
This instruction manual is written on the presumption that the user has an understanding of the AC
Drive. A qualified person must do installation, operation, maintenance and inspection of this product.
Even qualified persons must undergo periodic training.

Qualified refers to satisfying the following conditions.

 The person has thoroughly read and understood this instruction manual.
 The person is well versed in the installation, operation, maintenance and inspection of this
product, and understands the possible dangers.
 The person is informed on matters related to starting, stopping, installation, locks and tag
displays, and has been trained in the operation and remedies.
 The person has been trained on the maintenance, inspection and repairs of this product.
 The person has been trained on protective tools used to ensure safety.

KEEP SAFETY FIRST IN YOUR SYSTEM

AMTECH puts the maximum effort into making products better and more reliable, but there is always
the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with AC Drive may lead to personal injury,
fire or property damage. Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your system,
with appropriate measures such as isolating devices, mechanical brakes, prevention against any
malfunction or mishap.

Amtech

vi
CHAPTER-1: DELIVERY, INSPECTION AND STORAGE
1
CAUTION

Always transport the product with an appropriate method according to the products weight.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries.

Do not place the product near inflammable items.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.

Do not hold the product with front cover while transporting the product.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries from dropping.

Do not let conductive materials such as screws or metal pieces and inflammable materials such
as oil enter the product.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.

Install the product in a place that can withstand the weight of the product, and follow the
instruction manual.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries from dropping.

Do not install and operate an AC Drive that is damaged or that has missing parts.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries.

Always observe the conditions described in the instruction manual for the installation
environment.
Failure to observe this could lead to faults.

1-1 Delivery, inspection and storage

Axpert-Eazy Series AC Variable Frequency Drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at
the factory before shipment. After receiving the AC drive, check for the following.
(1) Check to make sure that the package includes an AC Variable Frequency Drive and User Manual
(2) Remove the unit from packaging, and check the details on the rating nameplate to confirm that the
AC DRIVE is as ordered.
(3) Confirm that the product has not been damaged during shipment.

The Axpert-Eazy Series AC Variable Frequency Drive should be kept in the shipping carton before
installation. In order to retain the warranty coverage, the AC Drive should be stored properly when it is
not to be used for an extended period of time. Some storage suggestions are:
(1) Store in a clean, dry location.
(2) Store within an ambient temperature range of -20°C (-4°F) to +60°C (140°F).
(3) If possible, store in an air-conditioned environment where the relative humidity is less than 95%,
non-condensing.
(4) Do not store the AC Variable Frequency Drive in places where it could be exposed to corrosive
gases.
(5) Do not store the AC Variable Frequency Drive on a shelf or on an unstable surface.
(6) If the AC Variable Frequency Drive is not to be used for a while (more than 2 months) after
purchasing, store it in a place with no humidity or vibration in the packaged state.
(7) Always inspect the AC Variable Frequency Drive before using after storing for a long period.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

1.1
1 1-2 Details of rating nameplate and type display method
The following details are listed on the rating nameplate.

Using the above type as an example, the type is displayed as follows:

AXPERT- EAZY AMT - 055 - 4

Series name
Capacity 55kW

4: 380 ~ 480VAC, 3-phase, 50/60Hz

5: 500 ~ 575VAC, 3-phase, 50/60Hz
6: 600 ~ 690VAC, 3-phase, 50/60Hz
2: 200 ~ 240VAC, 3-phase, 50/60Hz

Amtech

1.2
CHAPTER-2: INSTALLATION AND WIRING

This chapter provides the information needed to properly install and wire the AC Drive. Make sure
that the AC Drive is wired according to the instructions contained in this chapter. The instructions
should be read and understood before the actual installation begins.

2
CAUTION

Install the AC Drive, dynamic braking unit and resistor, and other peripheral devices on
noncombustible material such as metal.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.

Do not mount unit in horizontal position. Always mount unit in Vertical position only.
Failure to observe this could lead to damage the unit.

Do not place the product near inflammable items.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.

Do not let conductive materials such as screws or metal pieces and inflammable materials such
as oil enter the product.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.

Install the product in a place that can withstand the weight of the product.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries from dropping.

Do not install and operate AC Drive that is damaged or that is missing parts.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries.

Always observe the conditions described in the instruction manual for the installation
environment.
Failure to observe this could lead to faults.

Install an overheating protection device on the dynamic braking resistor, and shut off the power
with this fault signal.
Failure to do so could lead to fires in the event of abnormal overheating.

2-1 Installation environment

Observe the following points when installing the AC Drive.
(1) Install the AC Drive vertically to provide proper ventilation.
(2) Make sure that the ambient temperature is 0°C (32°F) to
50°C (122°F) for 400 Volt series Drive and 0°C (32°F) to 40°C
(104°F) for 500 Volt and 600 Volt series Drive.
(3) Avoid installation in the following environment. 200mm (7.87")

• Places subject to direct sunlight.

• Places with oil mist, dust or cotton lint, or subject to salty
winds.
• Places with corrosive gas, explosive gas or high humidity
50mm (1.97")

50mm (1.97")

levels. AXPERT
• Places near vibration sources such as dollies or press EAZY
machines.
• Places made of in-flammable materials such as wood, or
places that are not heat resistant.
(4) Ensure ventilation space around the AC DRIVE as shown in
the below figure.

200mm (7.87")

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

2.1
 2-2 Precautions for power supply and motor wiring

DANGER

2  Always turn the device's input power OFF before starting wiring.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or fires.
 Carry out grounding that complies with the standards of the country where the AC DRIVE is being
installed.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or fires.
 Wiring must always be done by a qualified electrician
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks or fires.
 Always install the device before starting wiring.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or injuries.
 Use circuit breaker or fuses that match with the capacity of AC DRIVE power supply.
Failure to do so could lead to fires.

CAUTION

Do not connect an AC power supply to the output terminals (U, V, W) and DC terminals (L+1,
L+2, and L–).
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries or fires.

Confirm that the product's rated input voltage and frequency match the power supply voltage and
frequency.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or fires.

Install an overheating protection device on the dynamic braking resistor, and shut off the power
with this fault signal.
Failure to do so could lead to fires in the event of abnormal overheating.

Do not directly connect a resistor to the DC terminals (L+1, L+2, and L–).
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.

Tighten the terminal screws with the designated tightening torque.
Failure to do so could lead to fires.

Correctly connect the output (U, V, W) to motor terminals to ensure proper phase sequence.
Failure to do so could cause the motor to rotate in reverse and the machine to be damaged.

When using the encoder, ensure its proper connections. The signal polarity specifications differ
according to the encoder. If the specifications differ from the specified AC DRIVE standard
specifications, correct the signal polarity as specified. Refer Chapter-10 for more information on
encoder specifications.
Failure to observe this could lead to reverse rotation or abnormal acceleration of the motor, and to
injuries or machine damage.

Refer to below figure and wire the main circuits for the power supply and motor, etc.
Always observe the following precautions for wiring.

CAUTION
There is a risk of electric shocks.
The AC DRIVE has a built-in electrolytic capacitor, so a charge will remain even when the AC DRIVE
power is turned off. Always observe the following items before carrying out the wiring work.

Wait at least 20 minutes after turning the power off before starting work. Make sure that the
displays on the Digital Operation Panel have gone out before removing the cover.
Amtech

2.2

After removing the cover, confirm that the “DC BUS CHARGE LED“ in the unit on bleeder board
has gone out. Also check that the voltage between terminals L+1 or L+2 and L- is 15V or less
before starting the inspections.
DCL

(Note 9) DB UNIT
2
(Note 2) (Note 10)
Noise
Filter L+1 L+2 L-
MCCB ACL
Power Supply (Note 6)
(Note 4) L1 U (Note 8)

(Note 2) AXPERT
L2
EAZY
V
M
L3 W

(Note 7)
(Note 3) (Note 4)

E E
(Note 7)
(Note 5) (Note 1) (Note 12)

EXAMPLE OF MAIN CIRCUIT WIRING

(Note 1) AC DRIVE input / output terminals

The AC DRIVE input terminals are L1, L2 & L3. The output terminals to the motor are U, V & W.
Connect the power supply to input terminals L1, L2 & L3 only. Never connect the power supply to
the U, V, and W terminals. Incorrect wiring will lead to AC DRIVE damage or fires.
(Note 2) Wire size
Use wires having the size (or larger) shown in the below table for the main circuit wiring shown in
the above figure. The applicable wire size range, applicable ring terminal and tightening torque for
the main circuit terminals are shown in the Table-1 for 400V Series, Table-2 for 500V Series and
Table-3 for 600V Series.
Listed ZMVV, Lugs shall be used & copper wire with 75°C (167°F) used for external connection.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

2.3
 Table-1: 400V Series Axpert-Eazy drive (Terminal and applicable wire for Input and Output)

Lug Terminal Hole Tightening

Rated Wire Lug ID Terminal
AMT-XXX- Lug size width width diameter torque
Current size mm screw
+ mm (inch)
2 4
(A)
max
(inch)
mm
(inch)
mm
(inch)
size
N*m
(lb-inch)
2
mm AWG I/P O/P
011 23 5.5 10 - - - - - - - 1.58 (14)
015 31 8 8 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
018 37 14 6 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
022 44 14 6 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
030 60 35 2 - - - - - - - 2.26 (20)
037 72 35 2 - - - - - - - 2.26 (20)
045 87 50 1 - - - - - - - 4.3 (38)
055 110 50 1 - - - - - - - 4.3 (38)
075 147 85 3/0 85 x M10 11.0 25.5 19 (0.75) 11.0 (0.43) M10 22.5 (199)
(0.43) (1.00)
090 175 120 4/0 120 x 11.0 28.3 19 (0.75) 11.0 (0.43) M10 22.5 (199)
M10 (0.43) (1.11)
110 215 50 x 1/0 x 50 x M10 11.0 18.5 30 (1.18) 11.0 (0.43) M10 22.5 (199)
2p 2p x 2p (0.43) (0.73)
132 245 70 x 2/0 x 70 x M10 11.0 21.4 30 (1.18) 11.0 (0.43) M10 22.5 (199)
2p 2p x 2p (0.43) (0.84)
160 320 85 x 3/0 x 85 x M10 13.0 25.5 30 (1.18) 11.0 (0.43) M10 22.5 (199)
2p 2p x 2p (0.51) (1.00)
200 360 120 x 4/0 x 120 x 13.0 28.3 40 38 13.0 (0.51) M12 31.2 (276)
2p 2p M12 x 2p (0.51) (1.11) (1.58) (1.50)
250 470 185 x 400 x 185 x 13.0 34.2 40 38 13.0 (0.51) M12 31.2 (276)
2p 2p M12 x 2p (0.51) (1.35) (1.58) (1.50)
315 530 300 x 500 x 300 x 17.0 44.0 40 38 17.0 (0.67) M16 85.0 (752)
2p 2p M12 x 2p (0.67) (1.73) (1.58) (1.50)
355 600 400 x 600 x 400 x 17.0 51.0 40 38 17.0 (0.67) M16 85.0 (752)
2p 2p M12 x 2p (0.67) (2.01) (1.58) (1.50)

+
2p = Two parallel

Amtech

2.4
 Table-2: 500V Series Axpert-Eazy drive (Terminal and applicable wire for Input and Output)

Lug Terminal Hole Tightening

Rated Wire Lug ID Terminal
AMT-XXX- Lug size width width diameter torque
Current size mm screw
5 max
+
mm mm (inch) mm N*m
(A)
mm
2
AWG
(inch)
(inch) I/P O/P (inch)
size
(lb-inch) 2
011 20 6 10 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
015 23 6 10 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
018 30 10 8 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
022 37 10 8 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
030 46 16 6 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
037 54 25 4 - - - - - - - 4.3 (38)
045 73 25 4 - - - - - - - 4.3 (38)
055 87 35 2 - - - - - - - 4.3 (38)
075 110 50 1/0 50 x 11.0 18.5 19 (0.75) 10.5 (0.41) M10 22.5 (199)
M10 (0.43) (0.73)
090 135 70 2/0 70 x 11.0 21.4 19 (0.75) 10.5 (0.41) M10 22.5 (199)
M10 (0.43) (0.84)
110 150 90 3/0 90 x 11.0 25.5 19 (0.75) 10.5 (0.41) M10 22.5 (199)
M10 (0.43) (1.0)
132 175 50 x 1/0 x 50 x 11.0 18.5 30 (1.18) 11.0 (0.43) M10 22.5 (199)
2p 2p M10 x (0.43) (0.73)
2p
160 215 70 x 2/0 x 70 x 11.0 21.4 30 (1.18) 11.0 (0.43) M10 22.5 (199)
2p 2p M10 x (0.43) (0.84)
2p
200 290 90 x 3/0 x 90 x 13.0 25.5 40 38 13.0 (0.51) M12 31.2 (276)
2p 2p M12 x (0.51) (1.0) (1.58) (1.50)
2p
250 345 150 x 250 150 x 13.0 31.0 40 38 13.0 (0.51) M12 31.2 (276)
2p kcmil x M12 x (0.51) (1.22) (1.58) (1.50)
2p 2p
315 390 185 x 300 185 x 13.0 34.2 40 38 13.0 (0.51) M12 31.2 (276)
2p kcmil x M12 x (0.51) (1.35) (1.58) (1.50)
2p 2p

+
2p = Two parallel

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

2.5
 Table-3: 600V Series Axpert-Eazy drive (Terminal and applicable wire for Input and Output)

Terminal
Wire Lug Lug width Hole Tightening
Rated Terminal
AMT-XXX- size Lug size ID width mm diameter torque
Current screw
2 6
(A)
max
+
mm mm (inch) mm
size
N*m
2 (inch) (inch) (inch) (lb - inch)
mm AWG I/P O/P
011 15 4 12 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
015 20 6 10 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
018 22 6 10 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
022 30 10 8 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
030 37 10 8 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
037 46 16 6 - - - - - - - 1.92 (17)
045 54 25 4 - - - - - - - 4.3 (38)
055 72 25 4 - - - - - - - 4.3 (38)
075 87 35 2 - - - - - - - 4.3 (38)
090 110 50 1/0 50 x M10 11.0 18.5 19 (0.75) 10.5 M10 22.5 (199)
(0.43) (0.73) (0.41)
110 135 70 2/0 70 x M10 11.0 21.4 19 (0.75) 10.5 M10 22.5 (199)
(0.43) (0.84) (0.41)
132 150 90 3/0 90 x M10 11.0 25.5 19 (0.75) 10.5 M10 22.5 (199)
(0.43) (1.0) (0.41)
160 175 50 x 1/0 x 50 x M10 11.0 18.5 30 (1.18) 11.0 M10 22.5 (199)
2p 2p x 2p (0.43) (0.73) (0.43)
200 215 70 x 2/0 x 70 x M10 11.0 21.4 30 (1.18) 11.0 M10 22.5 (199)
2p 2p x 2p (0.43) (0.84) (0.43)
250 290 90 x 3/0 x 90 x M12 13.0 25.5 40 38 13.0 M12 31.2 (276)
2p 2p x 2p (0.51) (1.0) (1.58) (1.50) (0.51)
315 345 150 x 250 150 x 13.0 31.0 40 38 13.0 M12 31.2 (276)
2p kcmil M12 x 2p (0.51) (1.22) (1.58) (1.50) (0.51)
x 2p
355 387 185 x 300 185 x 13.0 34.2 40 38 13.0 M12 31.2 (276)
2p kcmil M12 x 2p (0.51) (1.35) (1.58) (1.50) (0.51)
x 2p

+
2p = Two parallel
(Note 3) Breaker for wiring
Install circuit breaker or fuse on the power supply side of the AC DRIVE. Refer to table and select
the Circuit Breaker or Fuses.
(Note 4) Power supply capacity
Make sure that the capacity of the transformer used as the AC DRIVE’s power supply is 10 times
(or less) AC DRIVE capacity (for 4% impedance transformer). If the above value is exceeded,
install an ACL on the AC DRIVE’s input side.
(Note 5) Noise filter
The AC DRIVE will generate high harmonic electromagnetic noise, so using the following noise
measures is recommended.
Insert a noise filter on the input side of the AC DRIVE. Contact Amtech to select the proper noise
filter.
Keep the wiring length between the noise filter and AC DRIVE to 500mm (19.7”) or less.

Amtech

2.6
 Use a shield cable for the AC DRIVE and motor wiring and connect the screen to the AC DRIVE’s

terminal.
When using the control circuit wiring and power circuit wiring in parallel, separate the wiring by
300mm (11.8”) or more or pass each of the wiring through separate metal conduits. If the control
circuit wiring and main circuit wiring intersect, make sure that they intersect at a right angle.
2
(Note 6) AC DRIVE output
Do not insert a power factor improvement capacitor on the output side of the AC DRIVE. When
inserting a magnetic contactor on the output side of the AC DRIVE, prepare a sequence control
circuit so that the magnetic contactor will not open and close when the AC DRIVE is running.
Directly connect only motor to the AC DRIVE load and do not connect through a transformer
etc...without consulting Amtech.
(Note 7) Grounding
Always ground the AC DRIVE unit according to the regulations of the country where the AC
DRIVE is being used to ensure personnel safety in all circumstances, and to reduce
electromagnetic emission and pickup.
Make sure that grounding conductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations.
In a multiple-drive installation, connect each drive separately to protective earth.

In European CE compliant installations and in other installations where EMC emissions must be
minimized, make a 360° high frequency grounding of cable entries in order to suppress
electromagnetic disturbances.
In addition, connect the cable shields to protective earth (PE) in order to meet safety regulations.

As the normal leakage current of the drive is higher than 3.5 mA AC or 10 mA

DC (stated by EN 50178, 5.2.11.1), a fixed protective earth connection is required.
(Note 8) AC DRIVE output surge voltage
As the AC DRIVE output cable is lengthened, the surge voltage applied on the motor also
increases. If the wiring between the AC DRIVE and motor exceeds 20meters (65.6’), connect a
surge absorber dedicated for the AC DRIVE output.
(Note 9) DCL
Always short across L+1 and L+2 when not using the DCL (factory setting state). When
connecting the optional DCL, connect it to L+1 and L+2. Twist the wiring to the DCL, and keep the
wiring length to 5meters (16.4’) or less.
(Note 10) DB Unit
When connecting an optional DB unit, make the connections as shown in the main circuit wiring.
The DB unit and AC DRIVE unit will damage if the connections are incorrect. Twist the wiring to
the DB unit, and keep length to 3meters (9.8’) or less.
When using the external DB unit, use the overload detection relay or thermal relay to protect the
DB resistor and AC DRIVE.
(Note 11) Surge absorber
Install a surge absorber on the magnetic contactor and relay coils installed near the AC DRIVE.
(Note 12) Voltage Selection for the auxiliary equipment Power Supply
Ensure appropriate tapping for the control transformer, which provides the power supply to the
auxiliary equipments like fan/blower, soft charge contactor etc.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

2.7
 • 400V Series

2 480V BLUE
460V YELLOW

440V BROWN
Fuse BLUE 115V
RED RED
415V VIOLET GREEN 0V
To L1
380V ORANGE RED 115V
BLACK
0V BLACK WHITE 0V
To L3
TR1

• 500V / 600V Series

Fuse
RED RED 690V BLUE
To L1
660V YELLOW
600V BROWN

575V VIOLET RED 115V

550V ORANGE WHITE 0V
525V WHITE BLUE 115V
BLACK
0V BLACK GREEN 0V
To L3
TR1

Amtech

2.8
2-3 Power terminal layout
400V Series 400V Series
AMT-011-4, AMT-015-4, AMT-018-4 AMT-030-4, AMT-037-4, AMT-045-4, AMT-055-4
AMT-022-4 500V Series
500V Series AMT-037-5, AMT-045-5, AMT-055-5
AMT-011-5, AMT-015-5, AMT-018-5, 600V Series 2
AMT-022-5, AMT-030-5 AMT-045-6, AMT-055-6, AMT-075-6
600V Series
AMT-011-6, AMT-015-6, AMT-018-6,
AMT-022-6, AMT-030-6, AMT-037-6

400V Series
AMT-075-4, AMT-090-4
500V Series
AMT-132-5, AMT-090-5, AMT-110-5
600V Series
AMT-090-6, AMT-110-6, AMT-132-6

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

2.9
 400V Series
AMT-110-4, AMT-132-4, AMT-160-4
500V Series
AMT-132-5, AMT-160-5
600V Series
AMT-160-6, AMT-200-6
2

Amtech

2.10
400V Series
AMT-200-4, AMT-250-4

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

2.11
 400V Series
AMT-315-4, AMT-355-4
500V Series
2 AMT-200-5, AMT-250-5, AMT-315-5
600V Series
AMT-250-6, AMT-315-6, AMT-355-6

Amtech

2.12
2-4 Precautions for control signals wiring

When wiring (control circuit wiring) to the control terminal block, separate the main circuit wiring
(terminals L1, L2, L3, L+1, L+2, L-, U, V, W) and the other drive wires and power wires.
2
2

Use a 0.13mm (AWG 26) to 0.8mm² (AWG 18) wire for wiring to the control circuit. The
tightening torque must be 0.6N.m (5.3 lb-inches).

Use a twisted pair wire or twisted pair shield wire for wiring to the analog signal circuit such as
the analog references and meters. Connect the shield wire to the 0V terminal of the unit. The
wire length must be 30meters (98.4’) or less.

The length of the sequence input/output contact wire must be 50meters (164’) or less.

The sequence input can be changed between sink logic and source logic by changing the jumper
position JP1 in PCA-2014A/PCA-2004A between “SINK” and “SOURCE” position respectively.
Open cover designated as “Control Unit” to access this jumper.

Observe the precautions listed in “5. Control Input/Output Terminals”.

After wiring, always check the mutual wiring.

At this time do not carry out a megger check or buzzer check on the control circuit.

• Are there any wire scraps or foreign matter left around the terminals?
• Are any screws loose?
• Is the wiring correct?
• Is any terminal contacting any other terminal?
If so, take the necessary corrective measures before proceeding further.

Fiber Optic Cables

CAUTION
Handle the fiber optic cables with care. When unplugging optic cables, always grab the connector, not
the cable itself. Do not touch the ends of the fibers with bare hands, as the fiber is extremely sensitive
to dirt. The minimum allowed bend radius is 35mm (1.4”).

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

2.13
 This Page is intentionally left blank

Amtech

2.14
CHAPTER-3: DIGITAL OPERATION PANEL (LCD KEYPAD MODULE)

The configuration of the Digital Operation Panel is shown in the below figure. The structure of it is as
shown below.

The Digital Operation Panel is equipped with 8-keys as shown in the above figure. The function of
each key is described below.

This key is utilized to reach to the normal screen of digital operator panel from any
parameter, group or mode. The normal screen displays different parameters and status.
This is the screen displayed at power on. Press this key for change over between normal
screen - 4 parameters and normal screen – 8 parameters.

This key when pressed, passes the control to next successive modes i.e. NORM
(Normal), MODE-M (Monitor), MODE-A, MODE-B, MODE-C, MODE-D… & Meter mode.
After the end of all modes, it will carry the control again to first mode. When changing the
mode, the last accessed parameter of last accessed group of successive mode will be
displayed.

This key passes the control to next group in the same mode. The groups can be
accessed only in the incremental direction. At last it will again come to the first group.
If “ENTER” key is pressed, this key is used to move the cursor position for parameter
value change.

These keys are used to change parameter numbers & parameter value. When ENTER
key is pressed, these keys are used to change the parameter value, otherwise it is used
to navigate the parameters in upward / downward direction in the group. These keys are
also used for frequency up and down when normal mode is display. When these keys are
press once frequency change rate is 0.01 Hz. If press continues for 3.5 to 7 sec
frequency change rate is 0.1Hz, 7 to 11.5 sec frequency change rate is 0.3Hz and then
after frequency change rate is 0.5Hz.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

3.1
 This key is used to change and save the parameter value. When pressed first time, it will
allow the user to change the parameter value using up and down keys. Once the desired
value is set, it is pressed again to save the change value. Press NORM key instead of
ENTER, to discard the change.

This key is used to start the AC DRIVE when the start control is through Digital
Operation Panel. The key is equipped with the status indicating LED. It will glow, when
the AC DRIVE is running.
3
This key is used to stop the AC DRIVE in LOCAL mode (keypad) only. When stop key is
pressed for 2.5 seconds or longer during operation, the drive will coast to stop
regardless of Local or Terminal start control. It is also used to reset the fault. The stop
key is equipped with status indicating LED. It will glow when the AC DRIVE is off.

The GROUP + DOWN key passes the control to previous group in the same
mode. The groups can be accessed in the reverse direction. At last it will
again come to the same group.

The Digital Operation Panel is also equipped with the fault indicating LED. It will flash in the fault
condition. It is also equipped with four lines, 20-character LCD display for the user-friendly parameter
navigation, monitoring and setting.

In the normal condition the screen will be as below.

Amtech

3.2
 User Selectable four parameters

N o r m
Norm 1 0 . 0 0 H z 0 . 0 A m p Norm 3

Norm 2 5 0 . 0 0 H z * 0 0 % L Norm 4

F w d , L c l , D r i v e S t o p

Motor Direction Start Select Drive Status 3

F w d L c l * * F a u l t * *
R e v T m l E m r g n c y S t o p
S r l S t a r t D e l a y
J o g g i n g
A u t o R e s t a r t
C u r r e n t L m t
V o l t a g e L m t
S p e e d S e a r c h
P L C T A c t i v e
N o r m a l R u n
A c c e l e r a t i o n
D e c e l e r a t i o n
A u t o T u n i n g
D C B r a k i n g
D r i v e S t o p
S l e e p M o d e
M a i n s O n

The above figure also indicates the selected direction of rotation, start selection and drive status. The
four user selectable parameters can be configured using A601 ~ A604.
3-1 Drive Status
The fourth line of the Digital Operation Panel (LCD Keypad Module) is used to display different status
of the unit as shown above. More than one status can exist at one time. In this case, the status having
higher priority will be displayed. The priority is as shown in the figure. Fault has the highest priority
and mains on have least priority.

NO NAME DESCRIPTION
1 Fault It indicates that some fault has occurred in the unit.
2 Emergency Stop It shows that the unit is stopped due to emergency stop command.
3 Start Delay It shows that the start is delayed by the programmed start delay.
4 Jogging It shows that the jog select input is active and present operation is jogging.
5 Auto Restart It shows that auto restart function is in operation.
6 Current Limit It shows that the current limit function is active.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

3.3
 7 Voltage Limit It shows that the dc bus voltage control function is active.
8 Speed Search It shows that the speed search operation is in progress.
9 PLCT Active It shows that the Power-Loss-Carry-Through function is in progress.
10 Sleep Mode It shows that the AC Drive is in sleep mode.
11 KEB ON It shows that the KEB function is active.
12 Normal Run It shows that ramp up / down action is over and unit is running in normal
condition.
13 Acceleration It shows that the unit is accelerating to the set speed.
3
14 Deceleration It shows that the unit is decelerating.
15 Auto Tuning It shows that the auto tuning function is activated and the process is on.
16 DC Braking It shows that the dc braking is active.
17 Drive Stop It shows that the AC Drive is in stop condition.
18 Torque Mode It shows that the AC Drive is in Torque mode.
19 Mains On It shows that the mains power supply is ON.

When first time MODE key is pressed, lastly accessed parameter of lastly accessed group of Mode-M
will appear with its data. Below figure shows the parameter M101 of Group-1 of Mode-M.

Mode-M Group-1

M o d e - M G r o u p - 1
M 1 0 1 O u t p u t F r e q
0 . 0 0 H z
F w d , L c l , D r i v e S t o p
Parameter Data
Parameter Number and Name

The first line indicates the present mode and group. The second line indicates the parameter number
with its name and the third line shows its value. The fourth line shows the present status and remains
all the time except fault condition, contact information and fault history.

3-2 Modes & parameters

The parameters are grouped into Modes and Groups according to their functions.
The configuration of the parameters is as under.

Amtech

3.4
 MODE GROUP PARAMETER

NORM

MODE-M GROUP-1 M101 Output Freq

3
MODE-A GROUP-2 M102 Motor Speed

MODE-B GROUP-3 M103 Output Current

MODE-C

MODE-D

Meter Mode

3-3 Parameter display & setting

As shown in the above fig, MODE, GROUP, UP & DOWN keys are used to see the parameter value
setting. The parameter value (except MODE-M) can be changed using ENTER, GROUP, UP &
DOWN keys.

For example, the default local set frequency in A101 is 10.00 Hz. To change the local set frequency to
20.00 Hz, first go to the below screen using the MODE, GROUP, UP and DOWN key.

M o d e - A G r o u p - 1
A 1 0 1 L o c a l S e t F r e q
1 0 . 0 0 H z
F w d , L c l , D r i v e S t o p

Now, press key. The least significant digit will start blinking as shown in the below fig.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

3.5
 M o d e - A G r o u p - 1
A 1 0 1 L o c a l S e t F r e q
1 0 . 0 0 H z
F w d , L c l , D r i v e S t o p

The parameter value now can be set to the desired value using , or keys. When
3
or is pressed, the value will increment or decrement. If is pressed, the cursor
position will move to the left side as shown in the below fig.

M o d e - A G r o u p - 1
A 1 0 1 L o c a l S e t F r e q
1 0 . 0 0 H z
F w d , L c l , D r i v e S t o p

By pressing key two times again will move the cursor to the most significant digit.

M o d e - A G r o u p - 1
A 1 0 1 L o c a l S e t F r e q
1 0 . 0 0 H z
F w d , L c l , D r i v e S t o p

Now, press key once. The value will be incremented by one.

M o d e - A G r o u p - 1
A 1 0 1 L o c a l S e t F r e q
2 0 . 0 0 H z
F w d , L c l , D r i v e S t o p

Once the desired value is set, press key to save the value. The cursor will stop blinking and the
parameter value will be saved to the non-volatile memory. If you do not want to save the new value,

do not press key. Press key or key.

CAUTION

Do not remove or insert the display cable between PCA-2014A (Main Control Card) and PCA-
2012 (Display Card) in power-energized condition.
Failure to observe this could lead to component failure and tripping of the unit.

Amtech

3.6
CHAPTER-4: TEST OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT

DANGER

Always install the front cover before turning the input power ON. Never remove the cover while
the power is ON. There are sections in the front PCB that are charged with high voltages.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.

Never touch the switches with wet hands.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.

Never touch the AC DRIVE’s terminals while the AC DRIVE power is ON even if the operation is
stopped.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.

Selection of the restart function could lead to unexpected restarting when a fault occurs. The 4
machine may start suddenly if the power is turned ON, if the run command is present. Do not go
near the machine.
(Design the machine so that physical safety can be ensured even if the machine restarts.)
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.

The machine may not stop according to the set deceleration time when a stop command is issued
if the ramp down to stop function is selected and the voltage / current limit function is activated.
Prepare a separate emergency stop switch in such cases.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.

Resetting of a fault while the run signal is input could lead to restarting. Always confirm that the
run signal is OFF before resetting the fault.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.

CAUTION

 The heat sink, chokes and dynamic braking resistor are heated to high temperatures, so never
touch them.
Failure to observe this could lead to burns.
 Do not block the AC DRIVE’s ventilation holes.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.
 The AC DRIVE operation can easily be set from low speeds to high speeds, so confirm that the
operation is within the tolerable range for the motor or machine before making settings.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.
 Prepare holding brakes when necessary. Holding is not possible with the AC DRIVE’s brake
functions.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.
 Confirm the operation of the motor as a single unit before operating the machine.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or machine damage due to unforeseen movements.
 Always prepare a safety backup device so that the machine is not placed in a hazardous situation
when an error occurs in the AC DRIVE.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or machine damage or fires.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

4.1
 The Axpert Eazy Series AC Drive has various setting items. Some of these include settings that must
be made according to the power supply and motor before actually starting the operation.
The method of the basic operation is explained in this section.
Carry out test operation according to the flow shown below.
The procedures above the dotted line in the below fig are explained in this section.

Start
↓
Installation and wiring
Refer Chapter-2
↓
Preparation before turning
4 power ON
↓
Initialization of motor
constants in Mode-B
↓
Automatic tuning and
adjustment
↓
Test operation with operation
panel
↓
Setting of parameters for
external control
↓
Test operation including
external control
↓
End of test operation

4-1 Preparation before turning power ON

Always confirm the following points before turning ON the power after completing wire.
(1) If problem can occur if the motor runs in reverse direction then remove the coupling and belt
coupling the motor and machine, so that the machine can be run as a single unit.
(2) Confirm that the power supply cables are correctly connected to the input terminals (L1, L2, and
L3).
(3) There are some sections in the inverter, which operate with an AC power supply, such as
fan/blower and magnetic contactor. In this case, select the appropriate tapping of the control
transformer on the control terminal block inside the unit. Remove the front cover to access the
control terminal block.
(4) Make sure that the power voltage and frequency is within the tolerable range.
(5) Refer to Chapter-2: Installation & Wiring and correctly connect the main circuit wiring.
(6) Securely fix the motor with the specified method.
(7) Make sure that none of the terminal section screws are loose.
(8) Make sure that there is no short circuit state in the terminals caused by wire scraps, etc.

Amtech

4.2
(9) Always correctly install the front cover and outer cover before turning the power ON.
(10) When using the IM vector control with speed sensor mode, make sure that the encoder signal
cable is correctly connected to the control card terminal.
(11) Assign an operator, and make sure that the operator operates the switches.
Make sure that there is no abnormal noise, smoke or odors at this time. If any abnormality is found,
turn the power OFF immediately.
4-1-1 Selection of control modes
With the Axpert-Eazy, Eight control modes can be selected. These are set with the parameter ‘A401:
Control mode’.
Sets the motor control mode of operation.
A401: Control mode

Control mode Explanation Control mode

4
1) V/f control The voltage frequency ratio is controlled. A401 = 1, 5
2) Close loop V/f control The voltage frequency ratio is controlled. A401 = 2, 6
3) IM sensor-less vector The IM is vector-controlled without a speed sensor. A401 = 3, 7
control The speed can be controlled.
4) IM close loop vector The IM is vector-controlled with a speed sensor. A401 = 4, 8
control This mode is used when a fast speed response or
torque response is required.

4-1-2 Selection of start control

The Axpert-Eazy AC Drive can be controlled from various places like Digital Operation Panel (Local),
Terminal or from PC. Select appropriate start control in A301. Use Digital Operation Panel (Local)
during the test operation.
A301: Start Control
=1: Local
=2: Terminal
=3: Serial
4-1-3 Selection of frequency reference input
The Axpert-Eazy AC Drive accepts frequency reference from various places like Digital Operation
Panel (Local), Terminal or from PC. Select appropriate frequency reference input in A106. Use Digital
Operation Panel (Local) during the test operation.
A106: Frequency Reference Input
=1: Local (Digital Operation Panel) =2: FSV 0-10V
=3: FSI 4-20mA =4: FSV 0-5V
=5: FSI 0-20mA =6: FSV 10-0V
=7: FSI 20-4mA =8: FSV 5-0V
=9: FSI 20-0mA =10: Static pot
=11: Serial =12: PID Output
=13: VIN 0-10V =14: IIN 4-20mA
=15: PLC Analog output-1 =16: PLC Analog output-2
=17: PLC Analog output-3 =18: PLC Analog output-4

Refer the diagram of selection process of frequency reference diagram for the better understanding of
the flow frequency reference signal priorities.
4-2 Initialization of motor constants in Mode-B
Input the motor rating parameters. Set the following parameters in Mode-B.
B101: Rated Input Voltage (V)
B102: Motor Voltage (V)
B103: Motor Current (A)

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

4.3
 B104: Motor Frequency (Hz)
B105: Motor Speed (rpm)
B106: Motor Output (kW)
B107: Motor Poles
Automatic tuning will automatically change the parameters B202~B211, so it is recommended to write
down the values set in B202~211.
When using the close-loop vector control mode, input the correct PPR for the encoder in B109. Refer
Chapter-10 for the encoder specifications and wiring method.
Motor direction definition:
With the Axpert-Eazy, the counter clockwise rotation (CCW) looking from the motor shaft is defined as
forward run, and clockwise rotation (CW) is defined as reverse run.

Forward run (CCW) Reverse run (CW)

4

Definition of motor rotation direction

Amtech

4.4
 Digital Operation Panel
Selection process of Frequence Reference Signal
A106
(A101) =1: Local

=2: FSV 0-10V Off A106 Off

Ref Select 1 (PSI) Preset i/p-2

A701 A703
=6: FSV 10-0V (PSI)
B404 A704 A705
Analog Voltage Off On Static Pot Off On
Reference (FSV) =4: FSV 0-5V Off Math A702: Math Input2
Ref Select 0 (PSI) Preset i/p-1 B402 Operation
(PSI) Preset i/p-2 Block A706: Variable Bias
=8: FSV 5-0V On Off FSI 4-20mA On (PSI)
B406
Off On
Ref Select 1 (PSI)
=3: FSI 4-20mA Preset i/p-0 Off RUN has higher priority then Jog
B401
Analog Current On Serial (PSI) Preset i/p-2
RUN

Reference (FSI) JOG Jog Select

=7: FSI 20-4mA On (PSI)
B405 A104
Off On

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

=5: FSI 0-20mA Off
Preset i/p-1 B403
Freq Increase Preset i/p-2
(PSI) =9: FSI 20-0mA On (PSI) Ramp Freq Limiter
B407
On
=10: Static pot
Freq
=11: Serial Command
Freq Decrease Serial
(PSI) A102 A103
=12: PID Output Off
Internal signal (PID Output) A201 A202
Ramp Select
Analog Voltage Reference =13: VIN 0-10V RUN Command
A203 A204 On
(VIN) A301
Analog Current Reference =14: IIN 4-20mA Operational Panel =1: Local
Run
(IIN) (Keypad)
RUN =2: Terminal
=15: PLC A-O/P 1
(Terminal)
=3: Serial
=16: PLC A-O/P 2 Host PC
Built in PLC Analog Ref.
=17: PLC A-O/P 3

=18: PLC A-O/P 4

4.5
4
 4-3 Automatic tuning & adjustment
Automatic tuning measures the constants of the connected motor, and automatically adjusts the
parameters so that the system is used to the fullest.
The automatic tuning function performs differ measurements for each of the four control modes. Carry
out automatic tuning each time the motor being used or the applicable control mode is changed.
The automatic tuning mode is set with parameter B201 (automatic tuning selection).

Control mode Automatic tuning mode

V/f control (A401 = 1, 5) B201 = 2
Close loop V/f control (A401 = 2, 6) B201 = 2
Sensor-less vector control (A401 = 3, 7) B201 = 3, 4
4 Close loop vector control (A401 = 4, 8) B201 = 3, 4

Note:
Automatic tuning can be performed with a non-fluctuating load of 10% or less or if a machine is
connected. However, if the applications require an accurate actual output torque in respect to the
torque command, a sufficient performance may not be attained (applicable for B201 = 3, 4).

Autotune selection procedure:

1. Set motor parameter in B102, B103, B104, B105, B106, B107, B109 (if A401 = 2, 4, 6, 8)
2. A201 (Acceleration time) and A202 (deceleration time) should be 10 second or greater than.
3. Set the automatic tuning mode in ‘B201: Automatic tuning selection’.
4. Press “RUN” key.

- The auto tuning progress is displayed in M303 and the “RUN” LED will blink on the Digital Operation
Panel.
- After the Successful completion of the process, M303 will display 10 meaning the auto tuning stage
is 100% (complete). If it is 30% complete, it will display 3.
Normal completion of automatic tuning
- When the automatic tuning ends normally, the “RUN” LED will change from a flicker to a stable OFF
state.
- The estimated parameters of the motor will be displayed in Mode B, Group 2. Note down the
parameters for the future use.
The following parameters shown in below table are automatically adjusted by executing autotune
processes.
1) B201 = 2: Stationary mode (Execution time: approx. 40 seconds)
Applicable mode Parameter No Name
B202 , B203 R1 : Primary (stator) resistance
B201 = 2 B204 , B205 R2’ : Secondary (rotor) resistance
Stationary B206 , B207 Lσ : Leakage inductance
(Belt ON) B208 , B209 M' : Excitation (magnetizing) inductance
A501, D301 Manual torque boost

Amtech

4.6
2) B201 = 3: Rotational mode (Execution time: approx. 1 minute)
Applicable mode Parameter No Name
B202 , B203 R1 : Primary (stator) resistance
B204 , B205 R2’ : Secondary (rotor) resistance
B206 , B207 Lσ : Leakage inductance
B201 = 3 B208 , B209 M' : Excitation (magnetizing) inductance
Rotational
(Belt OFF) A501, D301 Manual torque boost
B702 Excitation Current Reference
B118 No Load Output Current
B108 No Load Output Voltage
The motor is rotated and the basic parameters for vector control are automatically adjusted.
4
3) B201 = 4: Extended Rotational mode (Execution time: approx. 2 minute)
Applicable mode Parameter No Name
B202 , B203 R1 : Primary (stator) resistance
B204 , B205 R2’ : Secondary (rotor) resistance
B206 , B207 Lσ : Leakage inductance
B201 = 4
Extended B208 , B209 M' : Excitation (magnetizing) inductance
Rotational A501, D301 Manual torque boost
(Belt OFF) B702 Excitation Current Reference
B118 No Load Output Current
B809 ~ B816 M variable compensation table
When carrying out constant output operation, the fluctuation compensation for the excitation
inductance is adjusted in this mode, however, the motor will rotate to the maximum speed during
automatic tuning, so special attention must be paid to safety.
Abnormal completion of automatic tuning
- If automatic tuning ends abnormally, the "FLT" LED will turn ON and the display will blink with the
message “Auto Tune Abnormal”.
- Investigate and check according to the error codes.
- In case of error, the error code will be displayed in addition to the progress at the time of error. For
example, if the error comes at 50% progress with an error code 12, then M303 will display 125. The
first two digits display the auto tune error code.
Error code during automatic tuning

Error Code Significance of error code

01 Problem in current sensor circuit, may be loose connection, faulty current sensors,
03 wrong sensors used.

04 Over current condition has occurred during the auto tuning process.
12 Under voltage condition has been detected during the auto tuning process.

The other error codes are for internal diagnosis and debugging purpose.
4-4 Test operations
When finished with automatic tuning, test run the isolated motor, and make sure that there are no
errors.
Use Digital Operation Panel mode to test run the motor. Initially set 10.0Hz and press “RUN” key to
start the motor.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

4.7
 Check
- Did the motor run?
- Is the run direction correct? Check the wiring and operation if abnormal.
- Is the rotation smooth?
Select “REVERSE” direction in ‘A305: Motor Direction’ and Press “RUN” and confirm that the motor
runs normal in reverse direction.
(Note) Do not carry out this step if a load, which cannot be run in reverse, is connected.
Press the “STOP” key and stop the motor. Now, again set the “FORWARD” direction in ‘A305: Motor
Direction’ and increase the frequency to 50Hz.This completes the test operation with the operation
panel.
After this, carry out the parameter settings and adjust the load operation to match the user's
4 application.

Manual adjustment when torque accuracy is required (IM vector control mode)

In applications, which require high actual output torque accuracy in respect to the torque command
(within ±10% of the rated output torque), the manual adjustments of Group-6 and Group-7 parameters
may be required.

The Speed control system of IM vector control is configured of blocks as shown below.

Amtech

4.8
 4

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

4.9
 This page is intentionally left blank.

Amtech

4.10
 CHAPTER-5: CONTROL INPUT / OUTPUT TERMINALS

5-1 Input / output terminal functions of PCA-2014A (Control Unit)

VIEW OF PCA-2014A

JP3

NLD LD
LD

SOURCE
JP1 NLD

SINK
JP5
K1 K2 K3
Fault Relay Prog Relay-1 Prog Relay-2

TB1
TB2 5

FA FC FB R1A R1C R1B R2A R2C R2B

P15 0V VIN IIN VO2 IO1 CANH RUN PSI6 COM PSI2 PSI4 +24V PSO1 PSO3 COM RX PB PA +5V

FSV FSI 0V VO1 0V IO2 CANL STOP +24V PSI1 PSI3 PSI5 COM PSO2 PSO4 TX COM PBN PAN COM

SYMBOL NAME USE

+24V +24V source This source is used for the Programmable Sequence Inputs. The logic for
the Programmable Sequence Inputs can be changed to sink or source with
COM the help of JP1 on the control board.
RUN RUN command This is programmable sequence input and can be configured to different
functions using C114.
STOP STOP command This is programmable sequence input and can be configured to different
functions using C115.
PSI1-6 Programmable These are programmable sequence inputs and can be configured to
Sequence Inputs different functions using C101 ~ C106.
1~6
PSO1-4 Programmable These are programmable sequence outputs and can be configured to
Sequence different functions using C107 ~ C110.
Outputs 1 ~ 4
P15 +15V source This is a 10V source used when a frequency setter is connected to the
FSV input circuit. The frequency setter to be used should be a variable
resistor of 2k and 2W.
0V Common This is a common terminal for analog input signals.
FSV Frequency This is mainly used for setting the frequency (speed) input. A maximum
Setting Voltage frequency setting is available at 10V input. This setting is valid when FSV
input 0-10V, FSV 0-5V, FSV 10-0V or FSV 5-0V is selected as frequency
reference input in A106 or D204 or torque reference input in A108. Also,
this input can be configured as PID Reference input (C603) or PID
Feedback input (C604) or Math Reference Input2 (A702) or Variable bias
(A706) for math operation.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

5.1
 FSI Frequency This is mainly used for setting the frequency (speed) input. A maximum
Setting Current frequency setting is available at 20mA input. This setting is valid when FSI
input 0-20mA, FSI 4-20mA, FSI 20-0mA or FSI 20-4mA is selected as frequency
reference input in A106 or D204 or torque reference input in A108. Also,
this input can be configured as PID Reference input (C603) or PID
Feedback input (C604) or Math Reference Input2 (A702) or Variable bias
(A706) for math operation.
IIN Current Input This is mainly used for setting the frequency (speed) input. A maximum
frequency setting is available at 20mA input. This setting is valid when IIN
4-20mA is selected as frequency reference input in A106. Also, this input
can be configured as PID Reference input (C603) or PID Feedback input
(C604) or Math Reference Input2 (A702) or Variable bias (A706) for math
operation.
VIN Voltage Input This is mainly used for setting the frequency (speed) input. A maximum
frequency setting is available at 10V input. This setting is valid when VIN
0-10V is selected as frequency reference input in A106. Also, this input
can be configured as PID Reference input (C603) or PID Feedback input
(C604) or Math Reference Input2 (A702) or Variable bias (A706) for math
5 operation.
VO1 Vout-1 These are programmable analog voltage outputs 0-10V. In default
VO2 Vout-2 condition, output frequency signal is assigned to VO1 and output current
signal is assigned to VO2. Different seven internal signals can be
assigned to these outputs using C201 & C202.
IO1 Iout-1 These are programmable analog current outputs 4-20mA. In default
condition, motor power signal is assigned to IO1 and output voltage signal
IO2 Iout-2 is assigned to IO2. Different seven internal signals can be assigned to
these outputs using C203 & C204.
TX DATA+ These two signals are for the two-wire RS-485 serial link. The protocol
used is Modbus-RTU.
RX DATA-
PA A-Phase Pulses The A-phase positive pulse of encoder is applied at this terminal.
PAN The A-phase negative pulse of encoder is applied at this terminal.
PB B-Phase Pulses The B-phase positive pulse of encoder is applied at this terminal.
PBN The B-phase negative pulse of encoder is applied at this terminal.
+5V +5V source This is +5V source for the encoder. The encoder is required only in case
of close loop control mode. Refer chapter-10 for detail on encoder
specification.
FA Programmable This is programmable relay and its function is assigned to “Fault”
FC Fault Relay condition in default. When a programmed condition occurs, the section
Contacts FA-FC is closed and the section FB-FC is open. Select from different
FB options using C113.
R1A Programmable This is programmable relay and its function is assigned to “Run” condition
R1C Relay 1 contacts in default. When a programmed condition occurs, the section R1A-R1C is
closed and the section R1B-R1C is open. Select from different options
R1B using C111.
R2A Programmable This is programmable relay and its function is not assigned to any internal
R2C Relay 2 contacts signal in default. When any function is assigned using C112 and the
programmed condition occurs, the section R2A-R2C is closed and the
R2B section R2B-R2C is open. Select from different options using C112.

The control circuit wiring is shown as under. The described precautions must be observed during
wiring. Changing the jumper position JP1 in PCA-2014A/PCA-2004A between “SINK” and “SOURCE”
position can change the sequence input between sink logic and source logic. Open cover designated
as “Control Unit” to access this jumper. The unit is shipped with sink logic.

Amtech

5.2
5-2 Programmable sequence input (PSI) wiring

SINK LOGIC SOURCE LOGIC

+24V +24V
+24V

PSI 5.6k

PSI 5.6k
L<50m
(164')

COM

L<50m
(164')
JP1 JP1

SINK SINK
5
SOURCE SOURCE

Precautions
1. Wiring must not be longer than 50meters (164’).
2. Use minute current contact.
3. Do not connect to the analog input / output.
4. The sink / source logic can be changed with JP1 as shown in the above figure.

5-3 Programmable analog input (PAI) wiring

P15 940R FSI
+15V
20mA
270R
FSV 33k 0V

10k
2k/2W 0V IIN
20mA
270R
VIN 33k 0V

+10V
10k L<30m (98.4')
0V

L<30m (98.4')

Precautions
1. Use 2kΩ / 2W rating potentiometer for the external variable resistor.
2. The maximum input rating of FSV /VIN is 0 to 10.5V.
3. Use a shielded wire shorter than 30meters (98.4’) for the wiring.
4. For the shield connections, open the mate side, and connect to 0V terminal on TB1.
5. The maximum input rating for FSI / IIN is 0 to +21mA or 5.67V.
6. Do not connect to the sequence input.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

5.3
 5-4 Programmable analog output (PAO) wiring

VO1 270R
Output Frequency
(0-10V)

VO2 270R
Output Current
(0-10V)

0V
Ground

IO1 50R
Output Power
(4-20mA)

IO2 50R
Output Voltage
(4-20mA)

L<30m (98.4')

5 Precautions
1. Use 10V full-scale meter (impedance 10k or higher).
2. The maximum output current is 1mA for voltage output.
3. Use a shielded wire shorter than 30meters (98.4’) for the wiring.
4. For the shield connections, open the mate side, and connect to 0V terminal on TB1.

5-5 Programmable sequence output (Open Collector Type) wiring

PSO

Max 30Vdc/ COIL

50mA
COM

L<50m (164')

Precautions
1. To drive an L load, such as a coil, insert the flywheel diode shown in the drawing.
2. Keep the wiring length to 50meters (164’) or less.
3. Use within the 30VDC, 50mA ratings range.

Amtech

5.4
5-6 Programmable sequence output (Relay) wiring

FA R1A R2A

FC R1C R2C

FB R1B R2B

L<50m (164') L<50m (164') L<50m (164')

PROGRAMMABLE FAULT
PROGRAMMABLE RELAY1 PROGRAMMABLE RELAY2
RELAY

Precautions
1. Use within the rated range shown below.
5
Rated capacity (resistance load): 250VAC, 1A or 30VDC, 1A
Maximum Voltage: 250VAC
Max. Current: 1A
Switching capacity: 100VA / 100W

2. The wire must be shorter than 50meters (164’).

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

5.5
 5-7 Default function assignments to terminals

ANALOG INPUT 940R

P15 +15V
33k
0-10V Analog Input FSV
10k
Ground 0V
4-20mA Analog Input FSI
33k 270R
0-10V Analog Input VIN
(PID Feedback) 10k
Ground 0V
4-20mA Analog Input IIN
270R 270R
0-10V Analog Output VO1
(Output Frequency) 270R
0-10V Analog Output VO2
(Output Current)
Ground 0V P
5 4-20mA Analog Output IO1
50R C
(Output Power) 50R A
4-20mA Analog Output IO2
(Output Voltage) -
ANALOG OUTPUT CANH 2
RESERVE
SEQUENCE INPUT CANL 0
Forward Run
RUN 1
Stop 4
STOP
A
Preset Input-2
PSI6 /
+24V 2
COM 0
Jog Select 0
5.6k

PSI1
4
Emergency Stop
PSI2 A
Fault Reset
PSI3
Preset Input-0
PSI4
Preset Input-1
PSI5
COM

TB1
(Sink logic operation is considered for
programmable sequence inputs in this diagram)
Jumper Position

1. The equipment is shipped with sink logic (JP1 is kept on Sink position) for the programmable
sequence inputs. To change the sink logic to source, change the jumper JP1 position to Source.

2. The equipment is shipped with JP3 in NLD position. This means the terminating resistors are not in
picture. To insert the terminating resistors, keep the jumper to LD position.

Amtech

5.6
 Run PSO1
Freq Attain PSO2
Programmable
Not Used PSO3
Sequence Outputs
Not Used PSO4

COM
TX
RS-485
RX PCA-
COM 2014A/
PB 2004A
PBN 5
Encoder
Connections PA
PAN
+5V
COM

TB1

FA
Programmable
Fult Relay FC
FB
R1A PCA-
Programmable 2014A/
Relay 1 R1C
2004A
R1B
R2A
Programmable
Relay 2 R2C
R2B
NC

TB2

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

5.7
 This page is intentionally left blank

Amtech

5.8
 CHAPTER-6: PARAMETER SETTINGS & FUNCTIONS

MODE-M: Monitor Parameters

The monitor parameters display various information like operating parameters, status of various
signals, software version, fault history etc…
No. Parameter Unit Res. Description
GROUP-1
M101 Output Frequency Hz 0.01 It displays the output frequency. If the AC DRIVE is off, it will display
zero.
M102 Motor Speed rpm 1 It displays the motor speed or shaft rpm.
If A401=1, 3, 5, 7: It displays the calculated motor speed or shaft rpm
using line speed setting A105 or D205 and M101.
If A401=2, 4, 6, 8: It displays the actual speed of motor shaft using
encoder.
M103 Output Current Amp 0.1 It will display the output current. If the AC DRIVE is OFF, it will display
zero.
M104 Output Current %L 1 The output current is displayed as % of motor rated current B103.
M105 Set Frequency Hz* 0.01 The currently selected frequency setting value is displayed.
M106 Frequency Reference The currently selected frequency setting input point in A106 or D204 will
Input be displayed.
M107 Set Torque % 0.1 The current value of torque setting is displayed in vector control mode.
M108 Torque Reference Input The currently selected torque setting input point in A108 will be displayed
in vector control mode only.
6
M109 PID Reference 0.1 Displays the value of currently selected PID reference in the unit selected
in C614.
M110 PID Feedback 0.1 Displays the value of currently selected PID feedback in the unit selected
in C614.
M111 FSV Input Voltage V 0.1 Display the analog input voltage at FSV.
M112 FSI Input Current mA 0.1 Display the analog input current at FSI.
M113 VIN Input Voltage V 0.1 Display the analog input voltage at VIN.
M114 IIN Input Current mA 0.1 Display the analog input current at IIN.
M115 Output Current U Amp 0.1 Display the Output current of U phase.
M116 Output Current V Amp 0.1 Display the Output current of V phase.
M117 Output Current W Amp 0.1 Display the Output current of W phase.
GROUP-2
M201 Input Voltage Vry Vac 1 Displays Input Vry Voltage. This may differ from the actual i/p voltage.
M202 Input Voltage Vyb Vac 1 Displays Input Vyb Voltage. This may differ from the actual i/p voltage.
M203 Output Voltage Vac 1 Displays output voltage command. The display may differ from the actual
output voltage. It depends on the power supply voltage. It will display
zero when AC DRIVE is OFF.
M204 DC Bus Voltage Vdc 1 Displays the voltage of the DC bus in the main circuit.
M205 Output Power KW 0.1 Displays the AC DRIVE output power.
M206 Energy Meter KWH 0.1 Displays the energy consumed by the system in kWH.
M207 Energy Meter MWH 1 Displays the energy consumed by the system in MWH.
o
M208 Heat sink Temperature C 1 Actual heat sink temperature is displayed.
M209 Torque Current % 0.1 The torque current value is displayed using the motor rated current as
100% .
M210 Excitation Current % 0.1 The excitation current value is displayed using the motor rated current as
100%.
o
M211 Heat sink Temperature F 1 Actual heat sink temperature is displayed in degree F.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-1
 No. Parameter Unit Res. Description
M212 Energy Saved in kW kWH 1 This parameter displays the saved energy using VFD in kWH.
M213 Energy Saved in MW MWH 1 This parameter displays the saved energy using VFD in MWH.
M214 Hank Count 0.1 Displays the current hank count. The display is limited at a maximum of
6553.5. This is cleared to zero when power is turned off.
M215 Money Saved with VFD 1 This parameter displays the money saved with VFD in energy saving
application. Select appropriate currency (B113) and energy cost (B114).
M216 Money Saved with VFD 1 This parameter displays the money saved x 1000 with VFD in energy
X1k saving application. Select appropriate currency (B113) and energy cost
(B114).
M217 Encoder Count 1 This parameter displays the Encoder count as per below formula.
Encoder Count = (Encoder Pulses (B109)*Motor Speed (M102)*4*
Speed loop time (B601)) / (60*1000)
M218 ASR O/P Monitor % 0.1 The ASR output is displayed.
M219 ACR O/P Monitor % 0.1 The ACR output is displayed.
M220 Drive Overload % 0.1 This parameter displays drive overload in percentage. Drive overload
fault comes when this value reaches to 100%
M221 Motor Overload % 0.1 This parameter displays motor overload in percentage. Motor overload
fault comes when this value reaches to 100%
GROUP-3
6 M301 Total Conductivity Time Hrs 1 The cumulative power on time after product shipment will be counted
and displayed.
M302 Total Run Time Hrs 1 The cumulative AC DRIVE run time after product shipment will be
counted and displayed.
M303 Automatic Tuning display The progression state of automatic tuning is displayed.
M304 Rated Current A 0.1 This indicates the rated current of the AC DRIVE.
M305 Inverter Type KW This indicates the AC DRIVE type.
M306 Control Version Indicates ROM version of DSP Control Board PCA-2014A.
M307 PSI-12345678 Status The ON/OFF state of various programmable sequence input will display.
M308 PSO-1234 R-567 Status The ON/OFF state of various programmable sequence o/p (selected
function status) will display.
M309 Unit Serial Number It displays the serial number of the unit.
M310 Ship Month It displays the month of unit shipment.
M311 Ship Year It displays the year of unit shipment.
M312 Display Version Indicates ROM version of Display Board PCA-2012.
M313 PLC Display 1 1 It displays the signed 16-bit register value from the In-built PLC.
M314 PLC Display 2 1 It displays the signed 16-bit register value from the In-built PLC.
M315 PLC Display 3 1 It displays the signed 16-bit register value from the In-built PLC.
M316 PLC Display 4 1 It displays the signed 16-bit register value from the In-built PLC.
M317 PLC Display 5 1 It displays the signed 16-bit register value from the In-built PLC.
M318 PLC Display 6 1 It displays the signed 16-bit register value from the In-built PLC.
M319 PLC Display 7 1 It displays the signed 16-bit register value from the In-built PLC.
M320 PLC Display 8 1 It displays the signed 16-bit register value from the In-built PLC.
M321 PLC Display 9 1 It displays the signed 16-bit register value from the In-built PLC.
M322 PLC Display 10 1 It displays the signed 16-bit register value from the In-built PLC.
M323 PLC Flag status 0-7 1 It displays the status of the PLC flag.

Amtech

6-2
 No. Parameter Unit Res. Description
GROUP-4: FAULT HISTORY
FLT-1 Fault 1 Most recent ten faults with DC bus voltage, frequency, current
temperature, input voltage, energy meter and conduction time values at
FLT-2 Fault 2
the time of fault will be displayed. Fault 1 indicates latest fault while
FLT-3 Fault 3 successive faults give past faults in descending order.
FLT-4 Fault 4
FLT-5 Fault 5
FLT-6 Fault 6
FLT-7 Fault 7
FLT-8 Fault 8
FLT-9 Fault 9
FLT10 Fault 10
GROUP-5: CONTACT
This provides the manufacturers contact information.
Amtech Electronics (India) Limited. Amtech Drives, Inc.
E-6, Electronics Zone 745 Trabert Ave NW
GIDC, Gandhinagar Atlanta, GA. 30318
Gujarat, INDIA USA.
Pin: 382028
Ph: +9179 23289101
Ph: +1 (770) 469-5240
Fax: +1 (770) 469-5241
6
Fax: +9179 23289111 info@amtechdrives.com
info@amtechelectronics.com www.amtechdrives.com
www.amtechelectronics.com
GROUP-6
M601 Output Current U1 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of U1 phase of Inverter Unit 1.
M602 Output Current V1 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of V1 phase of Inverter Unit 1.
M603 Output Current W1 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of W1 phase of Inverter Unit 1.
M604 Output Current1 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of Inverter Unit 1.
M605 Output Current U2 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of U2 phase of Inverter Unit 2.
M606 Output Current V2 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of V2 phase of Inverter Unit 2.
M607 Output Current W2 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of W2 phase of Inverter Unit 2.
M608 Output Current2 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of Inverter Unit 2.
M609 Output Current U3 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of U3 phase of Inverter Unit 3.
M610 Output Current V3 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of V3 phase of Inverter Unit 3.
M611 Output Current W3 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of W3 phase of Inverter Unit 3.
M612 Output Current3 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of Inverter Unit 3.
M613 Output Current U4 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of U4 phase of Inverter Unit 4.
M614 Output Current V4 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of V4 phase of Inverter Unit 4.
M615 Output Current W4 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of W4 phase of Inverter Unit 4.
M616 Output Current4 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of Inverter Unit 4.
M617 Output Current U5 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of U5 phase of Inverter Unit 5.
M618 Output Current V5 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of V5 phase of Inverter Unit 5.
M619 Output Current W5 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of W5 phase of Inverter Unit 5.
M620 Output Current5 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of Inverter Unit 5.
M621 Output Current U6 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of U6 phase of Inverter Unit 6.
M622 Output Current V6 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of V6 phase of Inverter Unit 6.
M623 Output Current W6 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of W6 phase of Inverter Unit 6.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-3
 No. Parameter Unit Res. Description
M624 Output Current6 Amp 0.1 Display the Output Current of Inverter Unit 6.
GROUP-7
M701 Control Version PI 0.01 Indicate ROM version of DSP Based interface board PCA-2013A/ PCA-
2049A for parallel inverter.
o
M702 Temperature IU-2 C 1 Actual heat sink temperature of Inverter Unit 2 is displayed.
o
M703 Temperature IU-3 C 1 Actual heat sink temperature of Inverter Unit 3 is displayed.
o
M704 Temperature IU-4 C 1 Actual heat sink temperature of Inverter Unit 4 is displayed.
o
M705 Temperature IU-5 C 1 Actual heat sink temperature of Inverter Unit 5 is displayed.
o
M706 Temperature DU-1 C 1 Actual heat sink temperature of Diode Unit 1 is displayed.
o
M707 Temperature DU-2 C 1 Actual heat sink temperature of Diode Unit 2 is displayed.
o
M708 Temperature Panel-1 C 1 Actual Inside temperature of Panel 1 is displayed.
o
M709 Temperature Panel-2 C 1 Actual Inside temperature of Panel 2 is displayed.
M710 Driver Status The ON/OFF state of driver fault status from Inverter Unit (IU) is be
displayed.
o
M711 Temperature IU-6 C 1 Actual heat sink temperature of Inverter Unit 6 is displayed.
M712 Short circuit status IU 1 ~ The status of short circuit or driver fault from Inverter Unit (IU) is
6 displayed.
M713 Over current status IU 1- The status of over current fault from individual phase (current sensor)
6 2-3 from Inverter Unit (IU) 1, 2 or 3 is displayed.
M714 Over current status IU 4- The status of over current fault from individual phase (current sensor)
5-6 from Inverter Unit (IU) 4, 5 or 6 is displayed.
M715 Over temperature Status The status of over temperature fault from thermostat from Inverter Unit
IU 1 ~ 6 DU 1 ~ 2 (IU) 1 to 6 and Diode Unit (DU) 1, 2 is displayed.
GROUP-8 DEFAULT DIFFER (CHANGE PARAMETERS LIST)
This group provides the change parameters list, only the parameters which differ from default value and user also can
change parameters value from this group. Use UP or DOWN key for next changed parameters.

Amtech

6-4
 WP: Indicates that this parameter is Write Protected during RUN condition.
MODE-A Parameter
No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res. Description WP
GROUP-1: FREQUENCY SETTING
A101 Local Set Hz 10.00 0.00 600.00 0.01 This is the frequency set from Digital Operation
Frequency Panel (LCD Keypad Module).
A102 Minimum Hz 0.10 0.00 600.00 0.01 These two parameters are used to configure
Frequency Minimum and Maximum Frequency of the AC
DRIVE.
A103 Maximum Hz 50.00 0.10 600.00 0.01
Frequency
A104 Jog Frequency Hz 5.00 0.00 600.00 0.01 This is frequency setting for jog input.
A105 Line Speed Setting 1500 0 3000 1 RPM line speed display. The entered value will
be displayed as motor speed in M102 at 50Hz in
open loop v/f mode. It will not have any effect in
vector control modes.
A106 Frequency 1 1 18 1 This is used to select the speed reference.
Reference Input =1: Local =2: FSV 0-10V
=3: FSI 4-20mA =4: FSV 0-5V
=5: FSI 0-20mA =6: FSV 10-0V
=7: FSI 20-4mA =8: FSV 5-0V
=9: FSI 20-0mA =10: Static pot
=11: Serial =12: PID Output
=13: VIN 0-10V =14: IIN 4-20mA 6
=15: PLC A-O/P 1 =16: PLC A-O/P 2
=17: PLC A-O/P 3 =18: PLC A-O/P 4
A107 Local Set Torque % 0.0 -200.0 200.0 0.1 This is set torque from the operation panel in
vector control mode.
A108 Torque Reference 1 1 18 1 This is used to select the torque reference in
Input vector control mode.
=1: Local =2: FSV 0-10V
=3: FSI 4-20mA =4: FSV 0-5V
=5: FSI 0-20mA =6: FSV 10-0V
=7: FSI 20-4mA =8: FSV 5-0V
=9: FSI 20-0mA =10: Static pot
=11: Serial =12: PID Output
=13: VIN 0-10V =14: IIN 4-20mA
=15: PLC A-O/P 1 =16: PLC A-O/P 2
=17: PLC A-O/P 3 =18: PLC A-O/P 4
A109 Extended 0 0 1 1 This will enable to display mode D, mode E,
Parameter mode G, mode H and mode P.
=0: Disable
=1: Enable
A110 Frequency 3 1 18 1 This is used to select the speed reference using
Reference Select 1 Ref Select 0 & Ref Select 1 through PSI. Refer
description for selection detail.
A111 Frequency 10 1 18 1 =1:Local =2:FSV 0-10V
Reference Select 2 =3:FSI 4-20mA =4:FSV 0-5V
=5:FSI 0-20mA =6:FSV 10-0V
A112 Frequency 11 1 18 1
=7:FSI 20-4mA =8:FSV 5-0V
Reference Select 3
=9:FSI 20-mA =10:Static Pot
=11:Serial =12:PID Output
=13:Vin 0-10V =14:Iin 4-20mA
=15: PLC A-O/P 1 =16: PLC A-O/P 2
=17: PLC A-O/P 3 =18: PLC A-O/P 4
A113 Stop Frequency 1.00 0.1 600.00 0.01 During deceleration drive act as coast to stop at
this frequency.
GROUP-2: ACCELERATION / DECELERATION TIME
A201 Acceleration Time- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Time needed to change the output frequency
1 from zero to maximum.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-5
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res. Description WP
A202 Deceleration Time- Sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Time needed to change the output frequency
1 from maximum to zero.
A203 Acceleration Time- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 The acceleration time and deceleration time for
2 the second ramp function.
A204 Deceleration Time- Sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1
2
A205 S-Curve Selection 0 0 1 1 This will enable the s-curve shape during
acceleration /deceleration.
=0: Disable
=1: Enable
A206 S-Curve Time-1 Sec 0.1 0.1 3000.0 0.1 The maximum value will depend on the
currently selected ramp time.
A207 S-Curve Time-2 Sec 0.1 0.1 3000.0 0.1 The maximum value will depend on the
currently selected ramp time.
A208 Current Limit Sec 10.0 0.5 6000.0 0.1 This is ramp up time during the stall current
Acceleration Time limit.
A209 Current Limit Sec 5.0 0.5 6000.0 0.1 This is ramp down time during the stall current
Deceleration Time limit.
A210 Acceleration 1 1 3 1 This is multiplier for the acceleration/
Deceleration deceleration time related parameters
Multiplier A201~A207 and D206~D207.
6 =1: x1
=2: x10
=3: x100
GROUP-3: START / STOP SELECTION & DC BRAKING
A301 Start Control 1 1 3 1 Select start location.
=1: Local
=2: Terminal
=3: Serial
A302 Maintained Start / 0 0 1 0 When using terminal start/ stop facility, this
Stop parameter gives the choice of having
maintained or momentary contacts for start or
stop.
=0: The start control maintained type
=1: The start/ stop control momentary type.
A303 Start Delay Time Sec 0.0 0.0 10.0 0.1 The motor will be delayed from the run
command by the set time. This is used for
synchronization with peripheral machines such
as mechanical brakes.
A304 Stop Mode 0 0 1 1 Select the stop method.
=0: Ramp down to stop
=1: Coast to stop
A305 Motor Direction 0 0 1 1 Select direction of motor rotation.
=0: Forward
=1: Reverse
A306 DC Brake Start Hz 1.50 0.00 50.00 0.01 It is a frequency at which DC braking is initiated
Frequency during stop.
A307 DC Brake Current % 50 15 150 1 Configure amount of current available for the
DC braking when DC braking is used during
stop.
A308 DC Brake Time Sec 0.0 0.0 25.0 0.1 It is amount of time that DC braking will be
applied when stop command issued. To disable
DC Braking operation set this parameter to
zero.

Amtech

6-6
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res. Description WP
A309 Stall Current Limit 1 1 2 1 Select stall current limit..
Selection =1: Local
=2: Terminal
When local is selected, B301 will be effective.
When terminal is selected, stall current limit is
set by the 0-10V analog signal at Vin.
A310 Auto Start (Line 1 1 3 1 = 1: OFF
start) = 2: ON Without Speed Search
= 3: ON With Speed Search
GROUP-4: V/F CHARACTERISTICS
A401 Control Mode 5 1 8 1 Sets the motor control mode of operation.
=1: V/F Open loop Heavy duty Control
=2: V/F Close-loop Heavy duty Control
=3: Sensor-less Heavy duty Vector Control
=4: Close-loop Heavy duty Vector Control
=5: V/F Open loop Normal duty Control
=6: V/F Close-loop Normal duty Control
=7: Sensor-less Normal duty Vector Control
=8: Close-loop Normal duty Vector Control
A402 V/F Selection 1 1 3 1 Select the appropriate v/f curve.
=1: Linear Curve
=2: Square Curve
=3: Custom setting
A403 Base Frequency % 100.0 5.0 100.0 0.1 This is output frequency at which the output
6
voltage reaches to Base Voltage A404 and than
after remains constant. This is percentage of
Motor Frequency B104.
A404 Base Voltage % 100.0 0.1 100.0 0.1 This is the maximum output voltage available at
Base Frequency A403. This is percentage of
Motor Voltage B102.
A405 VF1 Frequency % 25.0 1.0 100.0 0.1 These parameters are used to create the
custom V/Hz profile. Three different points for
A406 VF2 Frequency % 50.0 1.0 100.0 0.1 the curve can be defined to get the profile
A407 VF3 Frequency % 75.0 1.0 100.0 0.1 suitable for the application.
A405 <= A406 <= A407
A408 VF1 Voltage % 25.0 0.1 100.0 0.1 A408 <= A409 <= A410.
A409 VF2 Voltage % 50.0 0.1 100.0 0.1 A405~A407 are percentage of A403 and
A408~A410 are percentage of A404.
A410 VF3 Voltage % 75.0 0.1 100.0 0.1
GROUP-5: TORQUE BOOST

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-7
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res. Description WP
A501 Manual Torque % Inv. 0.0 20.0 0.1 When setting manually, set the boost voltage at
Boost setting rating 0Hz as a percentage in respect to the rated
output voltage. When programmed to zero, it
will be disabled. This is automatically adjusted
by the automatic tuning.
A502 Automatic Torque 0 0 1 1 When automatic torque boost is selected, the
Boost Selection R1 drop compensation and slip compensation
functions will be valid.
=0: Disable
=1: Enable
A503 Slip Compensation Hz 0.0 0.0 5.0 0.1 Set the motor’s rated slip.
2.0 This default value is applicable for V/F Closed
loop control mode only.
GROUP-6: PARAMETER SELECTION FOR NORMAL DISPLAY SCREEN
A601 Norm Parameter 1 1 1 25 1 Select from this to display on normal screen.
A602 Norm Parameter 2 5 1 25 1 =1: M101 Hz =2: M102 rpm =3: M103 Amp

A603 Norm Parameter 3 3 1 25 1 =4: M104 %L =5: M105 Hz* =6: M109 PR

A604 Norm Parameter 4 4 1 25 1 =7: M110 Fb =8: M201 Vry =9: M202 Vyb

A605 Norm Parameter 5 8 1 25 1 =10: M203 Vo =11: M204 Vdc =12: M205 kW

A606 Norm Parameter 6 11 1 25 1 =13: M206 kWh =14: M207 MWh =15: M208 ºC
6 A607 Norm Parameter 7 12 1 25 1 =16: M211 ºF =17:M217 Enc =18: M115 Amp
Cnt Uph
A608 Norm Parameter 8 15 1 25 1 =19: M116 Amp =20: M117 Amp =21: M107 Tq*
Vph Wph
=22: M209 %Tq =23: M210 %Ex 24: M218 ASR
O/P
25: M219 ACR
O/P
GROUP-7: FREQ REFERENCE MATH OPERATIONS
A701 Multiplier-A106 1.000 -10.000 10.000 0.001 This is a multiplier to the frequency reference
selected in A106.
A702 Math Reference 1 1 9 1 Select the second reference for the math
Input2 operations.
=1: Not Used =2: FSV 0-10V
=3: FSI 4-20mA =4: VIN 0-10V
=5: IIN 4-20mA =6: PLC A-O/P 1
=7: PLC A-O/P 2 =8: PLC A-O/P 3
=9: PLC A-O/P 4
A703 Multiplier-A702 1.000 -10.000 10.000 0.001 This is a multiplier to the math reference input2
selected in A702.
A704 Math Operator 1 1 3 1 Select the mathematical operation to be carried
out between frequency reference selected in
A106 and math reference input2 selected in
A702.
=1: + Add
=2: x Multiply
=3: / Divide
A705 Fix Bias Hz 0.00 0.00 600.00 0.01 This is fixed bias added into the output after the
math operation.

Amtech

6-8
No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res. Description WP
A706 Variable Bias 1 1 6 1 This parameter can be used to add variable bias
into the output after the math operation. Select
the variable bias from the options given below.
=1: Not Used
=2: FSV 0-10V
=3: FSI 4-20mA
=4: VIN 0-10V
=5: IIN 4-20mA
=6: Static Pot

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-9
 MODE-B Parameters

No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res. Description WP

GROUP-1: MOTOR PARAMETERS
B101 Rated Input Vac 3 1 5 1 Select suitable rated input voltage from the
Voltage below selections for 400V, 500V, 600V & 200V
Series.
=1: 380V =2: 400V =3: 415V
=4: 440V =5: 460V
8 6 8 =6: 500V =7: 550V =8: 575V
11 9 11 =9: 600V =10: 660V =11: 690V
14 12 15 =12: 200V =13: 220V =14: 230V
=15: 240V
B102 Motor Voltage Vac 415 380 480 1 This is the Motor rated Voltage. Set the voltage
mentioned on the motor nameplate. The setting
575 500 575 value depends on the 400V, 500V, 600V or
690 600 690 200V Series model.
230 200 240
B103 Motor Current Amp M304 0.3* M304 0.1 Set the motor rated current from the motor
M304 nameplate. It can be set to 30% of the AC
DRIVE rated current M304
6 B104 Motor Frequency Hz 50.0 10.0 600.0 0.1 Set the motor rated frequency from the motor
nameplate.
B105 Motor Speed rpm 1500 1 36000 1 Set the motor rated RPM from the motor
nameplate.
B106 Motor Output kW M305 0.1 1500.0 0.1 The motor’s rated output at base speed is set.
Rating
B107 Motor Poles 4 2 16 2 Insert the motor poles.
B108 No Load Output Vac 160 20 480 1 The terminal voltage at no load at the base
Voltage speed is set.
B109 Encoder Pulses P/R 1024 60 10000 1 Set as per the encoder specification.
B110 Carrier Frequency kHz 5 2 10 1 This parameter sets the AC DRIVE carrier
frequency.
4 6 For 315kW and higher models in 400V series
and for all models of 500V/600V series.
B111 DTC Gain 70 0 255 1 This is gain for the dead time compensation.
Adjust incase of motor hunting.
B112 kW without VFD kW M305 0 65535 1 Enter previous kW consumption without VFD.
This parameter is used to calculate the energy
saving using VFD.
B113 Currency Selection 1 1 3 1 Select your currency for the energy cost.
=1: INR
=2: USD
=3: EURO
B114 Energy Cost 4.000 0.000 65.535 0.001 Enter here the cost per kW in selected currency.
B115 Local Set Voltage % 100.0 5.0 100.0 0.1 This is the set voltage when the inverter is used
as variable voltage source application and
voltage reference in B116 is selected as Local.
Set as % of motor voltage B103.
B116 Output Voltage 1 1 3 1 Select the set reference for the output voltage,
Reference when inverter is used as variable voltage source
Selection application.
=1: Local
=2: FSV 0-10V
=3: FSI 4-20mA

Amtech

6-10
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res. Description WP
B117 Encoder Polarity 0 0 1 1 This is used to select Encoder polarity.
=0:Forward
=1:Reverse
B118 No Load Output Amp 0.3* 1.0 M304 0.1 Set the motor no load current.
Current M304
B119 Motor Overload 3 1 5 1 =1: 120% for 60 Sec
Selection =2: 150% for 60 Sec
=3: 150% for 120 Sec
=4: 150% for 180 Sec
=5: 150% for 240 Sec
GROUP-2: MOTOR CONSTANTS
B201 Automatic Tuning 1 1 5 1 The Automatic tuning mode is selected.
Selection =1: Disable Auto-tuning
=2: Stationary (Belt ON) (For V/F control)
=3: Rotational (Belt OFF) (For Vector
control)
=4: Extended Rotational (Belt OFF) (For
Vector control)
=5: Reserved
B202 R1: Primary-Stator mΩ Inv 0.100 9.999 0.001 The motor circuit constant is set.
Resistance rating This combination means below.
Mantissa) B202 = 1.000, B203 = 0
B203 R1: Primary-Stator Inv -3 4 1
R1 = 1.000 (B202) x (10)
0 (B203)
[mΩ] 6
= 1.000 [mΩ]
Resistance rating
(Exponent)
B204 R2’: Secondary- mΩ 1.000 0.100 9.999 0.001 This is mantissa section of the entered value for
Rotor Resistance Secondary (Rotor) Resistance of motor.
(Mantissa)
B205 R2’: Secondary- 0 -3 4 1 This is exponent section of the entered value for
Rotor Resistance Secondary (Rotor) Resistance of motor.
(Exponent)
B206 L: Leakage mH 1.000 0.100 9.999 0.001 This is mantissa section of the entered value for
Inductance Leakage Inductance of motor.
(Mantissa)
B207 L: Leakage 0 -3 4 1 This is exponent section of the entered value for
Inductance Leakage Inductance of motor.
(Exponent)
B208 M’: Excitation mH 1.000 0.100 9.999 0.001 This is mantissa section of the entered value for
Inductance Excitation Inductance.
(Mantissa)
B209 M’: Excitation 0 -3 4 1 This is exponent section of the entered value for
Inductance Excitation Inductance.
(Exponent)
B210 Rm: Iron Loss mΩ 1.000 0.100 9.999 0.001 This is mantissa section of the entered value for
Resistance Iron Loss Resistance.
(Mantissa)
B211 Rm: Iron Loss 0 -3 5 1 This is exponent section of the entered value for
Resistance Iron Loss Resistance.
(Exponent)
GROUP-3: PROTECTION PARAMETERS
B301 Stall Current Limit % 125.0 0.0 200.0 0.1 Set the current value as a percentage of motor
rated current for normal running condition. The
default value is 125% for normal duty and 155%
for heavy duty mode.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-11
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res. Description WP
B302 Adjustable Over % 300 50 300 1 Set the upper current level as a percentage of
Current Level motor rated current. When set to 300%, this
feature is disabled.
B303 Acceleration % 150 50 200 1 Set the upper current limit as a percentage of
Current Limit motor rated current for Acceleration.
B304 Under Current % 0 0 90 1 Set the lower current level as a percentage of
Level motor rated current for running condition.
B305 Overload Setting % 105 50 105 1 This is reference for timed overload
characteristic. The inverse time characteristics
will change with change in B305.
This overload setting for Heavy Duty.
100 50 100 This overload setting for Normal Duty.
B306 Earth Fault % 50 0 100 1 This parameter sets the earth fault detection
detection Level level.
B307 DC Bus Voltage 1 1 3 1 When enabled, it will prevent the overvoltage
Control during RUN condition.
=1: Disable
=2: Frequency Increase
=3: Stop Deceleration
B308 Reverse Direction 0 0 1 1 Set this to prevent unintentional reverse
Lock direction operation. When enabled, ensure that
6 forward direction is selected in A305 (or at
terminal). The AC DRIVE will not start
otherwise.
=0: Disable
=1: Enable
B309 Change Password 0 0 9999 1 User can change the 4-digit user password for
parameter lock.
B310 Parameter Lock 0 0 9999 1 User selectable 4-digit password to prevent
unintentional parameter changes from the digital
operation panel.
B311 Default Value Load 0 0 111 1 The current active parameters will be saved to
non-volatile memory.
222 The saved parameters will be fetched from
memory and now the drive will respond to these
parameters.
333 All default values will be loaded excluding C205
to C218 and B202 to B211 as per 60Hz/460V
(US standard).
444 All default values will be loaded excluding C205
to C218 and B202 to B211 as per 50Hz/415V.
555 When set to 555, the fault history buffer is
cleared. No previous fault codes and related
parameters will be available.
666 All the user parameters will be set to default
including C205 to C218 and B202 to B211 as
per 50Hz/415V.
777 All the PLC parameters will be set to default.
Note: The value entered in this parameter will not be memorized. It correct value is entered, appropriate action will be taken
and “00” will be displayed. If incorrect value is entered, no action will be taken and “00” will be displayed.
B312 0Hz Overload % 105 0 B313 1 For the self-cooling type motor, when operating
Setting at low speed, set these parameters to meet the
motor characteristics.
B313 0.7*BF Overload % 105 0 B305 1
Setting

Amtech

6-12
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res. Description WP
B314 Unbalance Level % 30 0 100 1 Set the unbalance current level for the output.
(Output current) When the current unbalance exceeds the set
level, the unit will trip. Set to 0% to disable the
function.
B315 Copy Parameter 0 0 5 1 Copy all parameters from control side to the
Set Display EEPROM. User can copy 5 sets of all
parameters.
=0:Ent Copy Set =4:Copy Set 4
=1:Copy Set 1 =5:Copy Set 5
=2:Copy Set 2
=3:Copy Set 3
B316 Paste Parameter 0 0 5 1 Paste all parameters from Display EEPROM to
Set the control side. User can paste 5 sets of all
parameters.
=0:Ent Paste Set =4: Paste Set 4
=1: Paste Set 1 =5: Paste Set 5
=2: Paste Set 2
=3: Paste Set 3
B317 DC Bus Voltage 2 2 20 1 This is gain setting for DC Bus voltage control
Control Gain (B307 = 2: Frequency Increase).
B318 KEB Selection 0 0 1 1 This parameter will select the KEB function.
0:Disable;1:Enable
B319 KEB Threshold % 80 65 115 1 Threshold level for KEB function.
6
Level
B320 KEB Kp 1.00 0.01 25.00 0.01 This parameter is used to set the proportional
gain of KEB PID controller.
B321 KEB Ti mS 500.0 1.0 5000.0 0.1 This parameter is used to set the integral time
constant of KEB PID controller.
B322 KEB Td mS 0.5 0.0 500.0 0.1 This parameter is used to set the derivative time
constant of KEB PID controller.
B323 Voltage Reduction Sec 10.0 0.1 30.0 0.1 Set the time for the output voltage to drop from
Time the V/f setting value to 0V for high-efficiency
operation function.
B324 Voltage Lower % 100.0 50.0 100.0 0.1 When selecting a high-efficiency operation
Limit Setting Value function, set 50 to 99.
GROUP-4: PRESET SPEED
B401 Preset Speed-1 Hz 10.00 0.00 600.00 0.01 These preset speeds can be selected by
programmable sequence inputs and one can set
B402 Preset Speed-2 Hz 15.00 0.00 600.00 0.01 the frequencies as per requirement.
B403 Preset Speed-3 Hz 20.00 0.00 600.00 0.01
B404 Preset Speed-4 Hz 25.00 0.00 600.00 0.01
B405 Preset Speed-5 Hz 30.00 0.00 600.00 0.01
B406 Preset Speed-6 Hz 40.00 0.00 600.00 0.01
B407 Preset Speed-7 Hz 50.00 0.00 600.00 0.01
GROUP-5: SKIP FREQUENCY
B501 Skip Frequency-1 Hz 0.10 0.00 600.00 0.01 Sets the skip frequencies and the avoidance
band for the each frequency.
B502 Skip Frequency-2 Hz 0.10 0.00 600.00 0.01
B503 Skip Frequency-3 Hz 0.10 0.00 600.00 0.01
B504 Skip Band Hz 0.00 0.00 10.00 0.01

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-13
 V/F VEC VEC
No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res. Description WP
CL OL CL
GROUP-6: VECTOR CONTROL CONSTANTS-1
B601 Speed Loop Time ms 10 1 40 1 Speed control repetition time
B602 ASR P- Action % 50 1 400 1 ASR proportional output control
Control factor
B603 ASR Dead Band % 0.0 0.0 100.0 0.1 The non sensitive rang of ASR
input
B604 Speed LPF Time ms 30.0 4.0 1000.0 0.1 Speed feedback low pass filter
Constant 1 Time constant 1 for higher
frequency (above B621).
B605 ASR Kp 1 20 1 100 1 Proportional gain 1 for speed
regulator for higher frequency
(above B621).
B606 ASR Ti 1 Sec 0.40 0.01 10.00 0.01 Integral time constant 1 for
speed regulator for higher
frequency (above B621).
B607 ASR Drive % 100.0 50.0 200.0 0.1 Drive torque limit
Torque Limit
B608 ASR % 100.0 0.0 200.0 0.1 Regenerative torque limit 1 for
Regenerative higher frequency (above B621).
Torque Limit 1
6
B609 Speed Estimation 0.075 0.001 30.000 0.001 Gain 1 for speed estimation for
Kp 1 higher frequency (above B621).
B610 Speed Estimation Sec 0.40 0.01 10.00 0.01 Time constant 1 for speed
Ti 1 estimation for higher frequency
(above B621).
B611 Over Speed % 105.0 20.0 200.0 0.1 This is the over speed protection
Protection Level level. When the detection speed
is equal to or higher than the set
level for 1000msec, the unit will
trip in over speed fault.
B612 Speed Deviation % 10.0 10.0 100.0 0.1 This is the speed deviation level.
Level A speed deviation error occurs
when the speed command and
speed detection difference is
higher than the set level (B612)
for B626 time.
B613 Machine Time mS 500 0 30000 1 The time to accelerate the motor
Constant and load’s torque inertia to the
base speed at the rated torque is
set.
B614 Acceleration % 0.0 0.0 100.0 0.1 This adds fixed bias in speed
Machine Bias PID output during acceleration.
B615 Deceleration % 0.0 0.0 100.0 0.1 This adds fixed bias in speed
Machine Bias PID output during deceleration.
B616 ASR Kp 2 20 1 100 1 Proportional gain 2 for speed
regulator for lower frequency
(below B620).
B617 ASR Ti 2 Sec 0.80 0.01 10.00 0.01 Integral time constant 2 for
speed regulator for lower
frequency (below B620).
B618 Speed Estimation 0.075 0.001 30.000 0.001 Gain 2 for speed estimation for
Kp 2 lower frequency (below B620).
B619 Speed Estimation Sec 0.40 0.01 10.00 0.01 Time constant 2 for speed
Ti 2 estimation for lower frequency
(below B620).

Amtech

6-14
 V/F VEC VEC
No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res. Description WP
CL OL CL
B620 ASR Gain Hz 4.00 0.00 600.00 0.01 ASR Gain Change (lower)
Change Frequency 1. It should be <
Frequency 1 B621.
B621 ASR Gain Hz 8.00 0.00 600.00 0.01 ASR Gain Change (higher)
Change Frequency 2. It should be >
Frequency 2 B620.
B622 Speed LPF Time ms 50.0 4.0 1000.0 0.1 Speed feedback low pass filter
Constant 2 Time constant 2 for lower
frequency (below B620).
B623 Encoder LPF mS 8 0 100 1 Encoder low pass filter time
Time Constant constant.
B624 ASR % 20.0 0.1 100.0 0.1 Regenerative torque limit 2.
Regenerative
Torque Limit 2
B625 ASR % 10.0 0.1 100.0 0.1 Regenerative torque limit 3.
Regenerative
Torque Limit 3
B626 Speed Deviation Sec 10.0 0.1 20.0 0.1 Set the time for judging speed
Fault Judgment deviation fault.
Time
B627 Field Weakening 1.00 0.10 2.00 0.01 Field Weakening Gain. If hunting 6
Gain occurred in speed in field
weakening region, decrease
gain.
GROUP-7: VECTOR CONTROL CONSTANTS-2
B701 Torque Mode 0 0 1 1 This parameter will select the
Selection torque control mode.
=0: Disable =1: Enable
B702 Excitation % 35 15 100 1 Excitation Current Set value
Current
Reference
B703 Torque LPF Time ms 0.0 0.0 1000.0 0.1 Torque reference low pass filter
constant Time constant
B704 ACR Kp 0.45 0.01 100.00 0.01 Proportional gain for speed
regulator
B705 ACR Ti ms 0.40 0.01 300.00 0.01 Integral time constant for speed
regulator
B706 ACR Q Upper % 100.0 0.0 150.0 0.1 ACR Q-Controller output upper
Lmt limit
B707 ACR Q Lower % 100.0 0.0 150.0 0.1 ACR Q-Controller output lower
Lmt limit
B708 ACR D Upper % 100.0 0.0 150.0 0.1 ACR D-Controller output upper
Lmt limit
B709 ACR D Lower % 100.0 0.0 150.0 0.1 ACR D-controller output lower
Lmt limit
B710 Torque reference % 0 0 1 1 This is used to select Torque
Polarity reference polarity.
=0: Unipolar
=1: Bipolar

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-15
 V/F VEC VEC
No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res. Description WP
CL OL CL
B711 Voltage 0 0 1 1 If the output voltage in control is
Saturation larger than the voltage that can
Compensation be output by the inverter, select
Selection this control to limit the exciting
current to prevent the current or
torque from hunting.
=0: Disable =1: Enable
B712 ACR Feed 1 0 1 1 The voltage fluctuation caused
Forward by the leakage inductance is
Selection feed forward controlled.
=0: Disable =1: Enable
GROUP-8: M FLUCTUATION COMPENSATION TABLE (VECTOR CONTROL)
B801 Table Reference Hz 6.25 0.00 600.00 0.01 This is the reference speed
Speed1 (frequency) for changing the
compensation amount according
B802 Table Reference Hz 12.50 0.00 600.00 0.01
to the operation speed. This
Speed2
table value changes when
B803 Table Reference Hz 18.75 0.00 600.00 0.01 maximum frequency (A103)
Speed3 changes.
B804 Table Reference Hz 25.00 0.00 600.00 0.01
Speed4
6 B805 Table Reference Hz 31.25 0.00 600.00 0.01
Speed5
B806 Table Reference Hz 37.50 0.00 600.00 0.01
Speed6
B807 Table Reference Hz 43.75 0.00 600.00 0.01
Speed7
B808 Table Reference Hz 50.00 0.00 600.00 0.01
Speed8
B809 Lm Fluctuation % 100.0 50.0 150.0 0.1 This compensates the exciting
~ Compensation inductance fluctuation according
B816 Coefficient 1 to the B801 ~ B808 table
~8 reference speed. These values
are automatically sets during
auto tuning (B201 = 4)

Amtech

6-16
 MODE-C Parameters

No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP

GROUP-1: PROGRAMMABLE INPUT/OUTPUT
C101 PSI-1 2 1 42 1 The different options are as under.
C102 PSI-2 10 1 42 1 =1: Not Used =2: Jog Select
=3: Ramp Select =4: Preset i/p-0
C103 PSI-3 11 1 42 1
=5: Preset i/p-1 =6: Preset i/p-2
C104 PSI-4 4 1 42 1 =7: Freq Increase =8: Freq Decrease
C105 PSI-5 5 1 42 1 =9: Aux Drive =10: Emergncy Stop-NO
=11: Fault Reset =12: Ext Fault-NO
C106 PSI-6 6 1 42 1 =13: Reverse =14: Terminal
=15: Ref Select 0 =16: Ref Select 1
=17: PR Step Skip =18: PR Step Hold
=19: PR/RSF Reset =20: PID Bypass
=21: PID Disable =22: Emergncy Stop-NC
=23: Ext Fault-NC =24: Run
=25: Stop =26: Drive Enbl-NO/STO
=27: Drive Enable-NC =28: PLC input 1
=29: PLC input 2 =30: PLC input 3
=31: PLC input 4 =32: PLC input 5
=33: PLC input 6 =34: PLC input 7
=35: PLC input 8 =36: Torque Mode
=37: Ready1 F/B =38: Forward Run
=39: Reverse Run
=41: Reverse Jog
=40: Forward Jog
=42: MBRK Answer
6
C107 PSO-1 2 1 40 1 The different options are as under.
C108 PSO-2 6 1 40 1 =1: Not Used =2: Run
=3: Local =4: Reverse Run
C109 PSO-3 1 1 40 1
=5: I-Detection =6: Freq Attain
C110 PSO-4 1 1 40 1 =7: Speed Detect1 =8: Speed Detect2
C111 Programmable 2 1 40 1 =9: Acceleration =10: Deceleration
Relay1 =11: Aux Drive =12: Timer Output
=13: Zero Speed =14: Fault Alarm
C112 Programmable 1 1 40 1 =15: PID Up Limit =16: PID Lo Limit
Relay2 =17: Temp Alarm =18: Ready
C113 Programmable 25 1 40 1 =19: Pump-1 =20: Pump-2
Fault Relay =21: Pump-3 =22: Pump-4
=23: Doff-End Alarm =24: Sleep Mode
=25: Fault =26: PLC Output 1
=27: PLC Output 2 =28: PLC Output 3
=29: PLC Output 4 =30: PLC Output 5
=31: PLC Output 6 =32: PLC Output 7
=33: PID F/B ULmt =34: PID F/B LLmt
=35: FAN Control =36: Ready1
=37: MBRK =38: KEB ON
=39: STO Feedback =40: Panel Temp Alarm
C114 PSI-RUN 24 1 42 1 The different options are same as PSI option.
C115 PSI-STOP 25 1 42 1
GROUP-2: ANALOG OUTPUT SELECTION
C201 Vout-1 1 1 15 1 This configures the function of analog output.
C202 Vout-2 2 1 15 1 =1: Output Frequency =2: Output Current
=3: Output Power =4: Output Voltage
C203 Iout-1 3 1 15 1
=5: DC Bus Volt =6: PID Output
C204 Iout-2 4 1 15 1 =7: Heat sink Temp =8: PLC A-O/P 1
=9: PLC A-O/P 2 =10: PLC A-O/P 3
=11: PLC A-O/P 4 =12: Uni Trq Cur
=13: Excitation =14: Set Frequency
Current
=15: Bi Trq Cur
C205 Vout-1 Gain 1.000 0.100 2.500 0.001 This is gain setting for the VO1 analog output.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-17
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
C206 Vout-2 Gain 1.000 0.100 2.500 0.001 This is gain setting for the VO2 analog output.
C207 Iout-1 Gain 1.000 0.100 2.500 0.001 This is gain setting for the IO1 analog output.
C208 Iout-1 Bias 1000 100 1500 1 This is bias setting for the IO1 analog output.
C209 Iout-2 Gain 1.000 0.100 2.500 0.001 This is gain setting for the IO2 analog output.
C210 Iout-2 Bias 1000 100 1500 1 This is bias setting for the IO2 analog output.
C211 FSV Gain 1.000 0.100 1.500 0.001 This is gain setting for the FSV analog input.
C212 FSV Bias 100 0 1000 1 This is bias setting for the FSV analog input.
C213 FSI Gain 1.000 0.100 1.500 0.001 This is gain setting for the FSI analog input.
C214 FSI Bias 1000 0 1500 1 This is bias setting for the FSI analog input.
C215 VIN Gain 1.000 0.100 1.500 0.001 This is gain setting for the VIN analog input.
C216 VIN Bias 100 0 1000 1 This is bias setting for the VIN analog input.
C217 IIN Gain 1.000 0.100 1.500 0.001 This is gain setting for the IIN analog input.
C218 IIN Bias 1000 0 1500 1 This is bias setting for the IIN analog input.
C219 FSV/FSI Time mS 100 0 1000 1 This parameter set the filter time constant for
Constant the FSV and FSI analog inputs.
C220 VIN/IIN Time mS 100 0 1000 1 This parameter set the filter time constant for
6 Constant the VIN and IIN analog inputs.
C221 Vout-1 Bias 100 0 1000 1 This is bias setting for analog output voltage
VO1.
C222 Vout-2 Bias 100 0 1000 1 This is bias setting for analog output voltage
VO2.
C223 Input voltage gain 1.000 0.100 2.000 0.001 This parameter sets the gain for VRY (M201)
and VYB (M202) monitor.
GROUP-3: STATUS OUTPUT DETECTION LEVEL
C301 Frequency % 1.0 0.0 20.0 0.1 The attained frequency output (Freq Attain)
Attainment operation width is set.
Detection Width
C302 I-Detection Level % 100.0 5.0 200.0 0.1 The current detection (I-Detection) operation
(current detection) level is set. Set with a percentage of the rated
current (B103). The hysteresis will occur with
set value in parameter C314 for the I-Detection
operation.
C303 Speed Detection % 95.0 1.0 105.0 0.1 The speed detection operation level is set. Set
Level-1 with a percentage to the max frequency A103.
The output frequency or the motor speed will be
C304 Speed Detection % 50.0 1.0 105.0 0.1
the comparison target. A 1% hysteresis will
Level-2
occur with speed detection operation.
C305 Zero Speed % 1.0 0.0 50.0 0.1 The Zero speed detection operation level is set.
Detection Level Set with a percentage to the max frequency
(A103). The output frequency or the motor
speed will be the comparison target. A 1%
hysteresis will occur with zero speed operation.
C306 4-20mA Reference 2 1 7 1 This parameter configures the AC DRIVE’s
Loss response to a failure of 4-20mA Frequency
reference input signal.
=1: No action at fault detection
=2: Minor fault alarm & run at minimum speed
=3: Minor fault alarm & run at maximum speed
=4: Minor fault alarm & run at set speed
=5: Minor fault alarm & run at preset speed-1
=6: Fault, ramp down to stop
=7: Fault, coast to stop

Amtech

6-18
No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
C307 Output Phase 1 0 1 1 Output open-phase is detected if one phase
Loss selection current is <5% and other two phase currents are
>70% of motor rated current for five cycles,
when this protection is enabled.
=0: Disable
=1: Enable
C308 Timer Output 0 0 1 1 Set the ON/OFF control for the timer output.
control Selection =0: ON only when AC DRIVE is ON
=1: ON whenever power is ON
C309 Timer output Off Sec 60 0 3000 1 Set the time in seconds to delay turning OFF
Delay time the timer output after the AC DRIVE OFF
command is received.
C310 Temperature 1 0 1 1 This parameter controls the automatic change
Control selection of the carrier frequency in case of temperature
rise above the predefined level.
o
C311 Temperature C 82 0 95 1 This is temperature alarm level set point.
Alarm Level Whenever the heat sink temperature exceeds
the set value, the Temp Alarm output will be set.
Hysteresis of 2°C hysteresis will occur with
temperature alarm.
C312 In-built PLC 0 0 1 1 By Using this parameter In-built PLC function
Selection can Enable or Disable. 6
C313 Static Pot Options 1 1 5 1 This parameter provides selection of the static
pot speed at power up.
=1: Last speed
=2: Min frequency (A102)
=3: Max frequency (A103)
=4: A101 Set frequency
=5: B401 Preset speed-1
C314 I-Detection % 5 1 20 1 This parameter sets the hysteresis level for I-
Hysteresis Level Detection operation
o
C315 Fan ON C 60 50 65 1 Set the temperature level to activate the PSO
Temperature Level for FAN control.

o
C316 Fan OFF C 10 10 30 1 Set the hysteresis level to de-activate the PSO
Hysteresis Level for FAN control.

C317 External Brake 0 0 1 1 Select external brake function.

Selection =0: Disable =1: Enable
C318 Brake Release Sec 0.00 0.00 2.50 0.01 Set the wait time from the RUN command to the
Wait Time brake release command.
C319 Acceleration Start Sec 0.00 0.00 2.50 0.01 Set the wait time from the point the brakes are
Wait Time released until the motor accelerates. If there is a
brake answer (MBRK Ans), set from answer,
and if none, set time from command.
C320 Brake Engage Sec 0.00 0.00 2.50 0.01 Set the wait time (cumulative) from the point the
Wait Time frequency (speed) command value reaches the
zero speed setting or below until the brake is
engaged.
C321 Run Error Sec 0.0 0.0 25.0 0.1 A fault stoppage occurs if ON for the RUN
Judgment Time At setting time or longer when engaging the brake.
Engaging Brake Error judgment is turned OFF at 0.00.
C322 Brake Answer Sec 0.0 0.0 25.0 0.1 The brake command and brake answer do not
Error Judgment match for the set time or longer, and a fault
Time stoppage occurs.
Error judgment is turned OFF at 0.00.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-19
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
C323 Static Pot Option 1 1 5 1 This parameter provides selection of the static
during stop pot speed at stop.
=1: Last Speed
=2: Min Frequency
=3: Max Frequency
=4: A101 Set Freq
=5: B401 Preset Speed-1
C324 Panel 60 25 70 1 This parameter is set limit for panel temperature
Temperature Limit fault when IU/DU system is in use.
GROUP-4: SERIAL COMMUNICATION
C401 Baud Rate bps 4 1 6 1 Sets the baud rate for the serial communication.
=1: 1200 bps =2: 2400 bps
=3: 4800 bps =4: 9600 bps
=5: 19200 bps =6: 38400 bps
C402 Station Number 1 1 247 1 Sets the station number (address).
C403 Parity 1 1 3 1 Setting the parity requirement for the
communication
=1: No Parity
=2: Odd parity
=3: Even Parity
C404 Response Time Sec 0.01 0.00 2.00 0.01 Set the minimum time from receiving the
6 command to returning an answer.
C405 Operation Panel 0 0 1 1 Enable or disable the operation panel
Communication communication loss fault. If enabled, AC DRIVE
Loss Selection will generate fault if it does not receive any
response from the operation panel within
100msec.
=0: Disable
=1: Enable
GROUP-5: AUTO RESTART & SPEED SEARCH FUNCTION
C501 No. Of Restart 0 0 10 1 Sets the number of restart for ten faults.
C502 Restart Wait Time Sec 5 1 30 1 Sets the wait time before auto restart.
C503 Emergency Stop 1 1 3 1 Set the stopping method for the emergency
Mode stop.
=1: Coast to stop without fault output
=2: Coast to stop with fault output
=3: Ramp down to stop
C504 Speed Search 0 0 1 1 Enable or disable the speed Search operation.
Selection =0: Disable
=1: Enable
C505 Speed Search % 70 30 200 1 Sets the speed search operation current as a
Current Limit percentage, taking the AC DRIVE rated current
as 100%. Not usually necessary to set. When
restarting is not possible with the factory
settings, reduce the value.
C506 Speed Search Sec 2.00 0.01 30.00 0.01 This decides the frequency ramp down time
Frequency from max frequency during speed search
Deceleration Time operation.
C507 Speed Search Sec 2.0 0.1 10.0 0.1 This decides the output voltage ramp up time
Voltage from zero to base voltage during speed search
Acceleration Time operation.
C508 Speed Search Sec 2.0 0.0 20.0 0.1 The wait time after the output is cut off to when
Wait Time the speed search operation is started is set. Set
the time to when the motor residual voltage is
abated for this parameter. The search operation
is delayed by the time set here.

Amtech

6-20
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
C509 PLCT Time Sec 2.0 0 5.0 0.1 Set time interval to perform PLCT. When
programmed to 0, the PLCT function will be
disabled.
C510 Speed Search % 100 30 200 1 Speed search match current limit function limit
Match Current drive current when speed match with actual
Limit motor speed. Not usually necessary to set.
When restarting is not possible with the factory
settings, set the value.
C511 Speed Search 4.0 0.0 20.0 0.1 Set gain to Increase the frequency after speed
Match freq. gain detect for speed search function.
GROUP-6: PID CONTROL SELECTION
C601 PID Control 0 0 1 1 Enable or disable the PID control action.
Selection =0: Disable
=1: Enable
C602 PID Polarity 1 0 1 1 This can be used to invert the PID output.
=0: Negative
=1: Positive
C603 PID Reference 5 1 10 1 Decides the set input point for the PID.
Input
=1: FSV 0-10V =2: FSI 4-20mA
=3: Vin 0-10V =4: Iin 4-20mA
=5: Local =6: Serial
=7: PLC A-O/P 1 =8: PLC A-O/P 2 6
=9: PLC A-O/P 3 =10: PLC A-O/P 4
C604 PID Feedback 3 1 8 1 Decides the feedback input point for the PID.
Input Selection
=1: FSV 0-10V =2: FSI 4-20mA
=3: Vin 0-10V =4: Iin 4-20mA
=5: PLC A-O/P 1 =6: PLC A-O/P 2
=7: PLC A-O/P 3 =8: PLC A-O/P 4
C605 Proportional Gain 1.0 0.1 10.0 0.1 Sets the proportional gain for the PID controller.
C606 Integral Time Sec 1.0 0.1 100.0 0.1 Sets the Integral time for the PID controller.
C607 Derivative Gain 0.00 0.00 1.00 0.01 Sets the Derivative gain for the PID controller.
C608 PID deviation % 100.0 50.0 100.0 0.1 Sets PID Deviation upper limit.
Upper Limit
C609 PID deviation % 0.0 0.0 50.0 0.1 Sets PID Deviation lower limit.
Lower Limit
C610 PID Offset % 0.0 -100.0 100.0 0.1 Sets offset for output after PID control.
Adjustment
C611 PID Reference % 50.0 1.0 6553.5 0.1 Set the reference value, if operational panel
Setting option is selected in parameter C603. The unit
will be as per the selection in C614.
C612 PID Display Scale 100.0 0.0 6553.5 0.1 Use these parameters to scale the PID signal.
– Max This is used only for the display purpose and
will not have any effect on operation. Unit
C613 PID Display Scale 0.0 0.0 6553.5 0.1
display as per C614.
– Min

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-21
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
C614 PID Display Unit 1 0 69 1 Select the unit for the PID signal.
Selection
=0: No Unit =1: % =2: PSI
2
=3: kg/cm =4: ºC =5: ºF
3
=6: CFM =7: m /h =8: LPM
=9: Amp =10: kW =11: V
=12: Hz =13: s =14: h
=15: rpm =16: kh =17: lb ft
=18: mA =19: mV =20: W
=21: kWh =22: hp =23: MWh
3
=24: m/s =25: dm /s =26: bar
=27: kPa =28: GPM =29: ft
=30: MGD =31: inHg =32: FPM
=33: kb/s =34: kHz =35: ohm
=36: ppm =37: pps =38: l/s
3 3
=39: Km /h =40: l/h =41: m /s
3
=42: m /min =43: kg/s =44: kg/m
=45: kg/h =46: mbar =47: Pa
=48: GPS =49: gal/s =50: gal/m
3 3
=51: gal/h =52: ft /s =53: ft /m
3
=54: ft /h =55: lb/s =56: lb/m
=57: lb/h =58: FPS =59: ft/s
=60: inH2O =61: in wg =62: ft wg
=63: lbsi =64: ms =65: Mrev
=66: d =67: inWC =68: m/min
6 =69: Nm
C615 Sleep Mode 0 0 1 1 When the sleep mode is selected, the inverter
Selection output is switched OFF, if the frequency
reference (or PID output) remains below the
sleep mode enter frequency for the set time
period. Sleep mode can be used with or without
PID control.
=0: Disable
=1: Enable
C616 Sleep Mode Enter Hz 0.10 0.00 600.00 0.01 This is the frequency used to activate the sleep
Frequency mode and turn off the inverter.
C617 Sleep Mode Active Sec 0 0 999 1 The inverter output will be turned off if the
Delay frequency reference (or PID output) remains
below sleep mode enter frequency.
C618 Sleep Mode Wake % 5.0 0.0 100.0 0.1 This is set with respect to the max frequency
Up Band and used as hysteresis when leaving the sleep
mode. The inverter will be turned on when the
frequency reference (or PID output) exceeds the
sleep mode enter frequency + wake up band.
C619 Sleep Mode Leave 1 1 2 1 Define the condition to leave the sleep mode.
Condition =1: Freq Ref > C616 Sleep Mode Enter Freq
=2: Freq Ref > A102 Min Freq

Amtech

6-22
No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
GROUP-7: PLC PANEL PARAMETER
C701 PLC Panel 0 0 32767 1 PLC panel parameter 1 & 2 are used in-built
Parameter 1 PLC for Timer 1 application
C702 PLC Panel 0 0 32767 1
Parameter 2
C703 PLC Panel 0 0 32767 1 PLC panel parameter 3 & 4 are used in-built
Parameter 3 PLC for Timer 2 application
C704 PLC Panel 0 0 32767 1
Parameter 4
C705 PLC Panel 0 0 32767 1 PLC panel parameter 5 & 6 are used in-built
Parameter 5 PLC for Timer 3 application
C706 PLC Panel 0 0 32767 1
Parameter 6
C707 PLC Panel 0 0 32767 1 PLC panel parameter 7 & 8 are used in-built
Parameter 7 PLC for Timer 4 application
C708 PLC Panel 0 0 32767 1
Parameter 8
C709 PLC Panel 0 0 32767 1 PLC panel parameter 9 can be used in-built
Parameter 9 PLC application.
C710 PLC Panel 0 0 32767 1 PLC panel parameter 10 can be used in-built
6
Parameter 10 PLC application.
C711 PLC Panel 0 0 32767 1 PLC panel parameter 11 can be used in-built
Parameter 11 PLC application.
C712 PLC Panel 0 0 32767 1 PLC panel parameter 12 can be used in-built
Parameter 12 PLC application.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-23
 MODE-D: Auxiliary Drive Parameters

No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP

GROUP-1: MOTOR PARAMETERS
D101 Motor Voltage Vac 415 380 480 1 This is the Motor rated Voltage. Set the voltage
mentioned on the motor nameplate. The setting
575 500 575 value depends on the 400V, 500V, 600V or
690 600 690 200V Series model.
230 200 240
D102 Motor Current Amp M304 0.3* M304 0.1 Insert the rated motor current from the
M304 nameplate.
D103 Motor Frequency Hz 50.0 10.0 600.0 0.1 Set the rated base frequency from the
nameplate.
D104 Motor Speed rpm 1500 1 36000 1 Set the base speed from the motor nameplate.
D105 Motor Output kW M305 0.1 1500.0 0.1 The motor’s rated output at the base speed is
Rating set from the nameplate.
GROUP-2: FREQUENCY SETTING
D201 Local Set Hz 10.00 0.00 600.00 0.01 This is the frequency set from the operation
Frequency panel for auxiliary motor.
D202 Min Frequency Hz 0.10 0.00 600.00 0.01 These two Parameters are used to configure
Minimum and Maximum Frequency of the AC
6 D203 Max Frequency Hz 50.00 0.10 600.00 0.01
DRIVE for auxiliary motor.
D204 Frequency 1 1 18 1 This is used to select the speed reference for
Reference Input auxiliary drive.
=1: Local =2: FSV 0-10V
=3: FSI 4-20mA =4: FSV 0-5V
=5: FSI 0-20mA =6: FSV 10-0V
=7: FSI 20-4mA =8: FSV 5-0V
=9: FSI 20-0mA =10: Static pot
=11: Serial =12: PID Output
=13: VIN 0-10V =14: IIN 4-20mA
=15: PLC A-O/P 1 =16: PLC A-O/P 2
=17: PLC A-O/P 3 =18: PLC A-O/P 4
D205 Line Speed Setting rpm 1500 0 3000 1 The set value will be displayed as motor speed
in M102 at 50Hz when auxiliary drive is
selected.
D206 Acceleration Time- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Time needed for the speed to change from zero
1 to maximum.
D207 Deceleration Time- Sec 20.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Time needed for the speed to change from
1 maximum to zero.
GROUP-3: TORQUE BOOST
D301 Manual Torque % 0 0.0 20.0 0.1 When setting manually, set the boost voltage at
Boost 0Hz as a percentage in respect to the rated
Setting output voltage. When programmed to zero, it
will be disabled. This is automatically adjusted
by the automatic tuning.
D302 Slip Compensation Hz 0.0 0.0 5.0 0.1 Set the motor’s rated slip. When setting
manually, set the slip frequency for the motor
rated load in respect to the base frequency. The
output frequency changes according to the
motor rated torque.
D303 DC Brake Start Hz 1.50 0.00 50.00 0.01 It is a frequency at which DC braking is initiated
Frequency during stop.
D304 DC Brake Current % 50 15 150 1 Configure amount of current available for the
DC braking when DC braking is used during
stop.

Amtech

6-24
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
D305 DC Brake Time Sec 0.0 0.0 25.0 0.1 It is amount of time that DC braking will be
applied when stop command is issued. To
disable DC Braking operation set this parameter
to zero.
GROUP-4: LIMITING PARAMETER
D401 Stall Current Limit % 125.0 0.0 200.0 0.1 Set the current value as a percentage of motor
rated current for normal running condition.
The default value is 155%, when heavy duty is
set.
D402 Adjustable Over % 300 50 300 1 Set the upper current limit as a percentage of
Current Level motor rated current for running condition. When
set to 300%, this feature is disabled.
D403 Acceleration % 150 50 200 1 Set the upper current limit as a percentage of
Current Limit motor rated current for Acceleration.
D404 Under Current % 0 0 90 1 Set the lower current limit as a percentage of
Level motor rated current for running condition.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-25
 MODE-E: Ring Spinning Frame (RSF) Function Parameters

No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP

GROUP-1: RSF / PATTERN RUN PARAMETER SELECTION
E101 RSF/ Pattern Run 1 1 3 1 =1: Disable
Selection =2: RSF Function
=3: Pattern Run Function
E102 Table-1 Step 15 1 15 1 Select the number of steps for table-1 for RSF.
Selection
E103 Table-2 Step 15 1 15 1 Select the number of steps for table-2 for RSF.
Selection
E104 Table-3 Step 15 1 15 1 Select the number of steps for table-3 for RSF.
Selection
E105 Doff End Alarm Sec 1 0.1 3000 0.1 Outputs an alarm signal for the set time from
Time completion of the final step until directly before
stoppage.
E106 Hank Count Gain 1.000 0.001 30.000 0.001 This is hank count calculation gain used to
display the hank count.
E107 Hank Gain 2 1 3 1 =1: X0.1
Multiplier =2: X1.0
=3: X10

6 E108 Table Selection 1 1 3 1 Select the required table for RSF / Pattern Run
function.
GROUP-2: RSF FREQUENCY FOR TABLE-1
E201 Freq T1-STP1 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-1.
E202 Freq T1-STP2 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-2.
E203 Freq T1-STP3 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-3.
E204 Freq T1-STP4 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-4.
E205 Freq T1-STP5 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-5.
E206 Freq T1-STP6 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-6.
E207 Freq T1-STP7 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-7.
E208 Freq T1-STP8 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-8.
E209 Freq T1-STP9 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-9.
E210 Freq T1-STP10 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-10.
E211 Freq T1-STP11 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-11.
E212 Freq T1-STP12 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-12.
E213 Freq T1-STP13 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-13.
E214 Freq T1-STP14 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-14.
E215 Freq T1-STP15 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-1, Step-15.
GROUP-3: RSF TIME FOR TABLE-1
E301 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-1 for RSF function.
STP1
E302 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-2 for RSF function.
STP2
E303 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-3 for RSF function.
STP3
E304 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-4 for RSF function.
STP4

Amtech

6-26
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
E305 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-5 for RSF function.
STP5
E306 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-6 for RSF function.
STP6
E307 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-7 for RSF function.
STP7
E308 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-8 for RSF function.
STP8
E309 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-9 for RSF function.
STP9
E310 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-10 for RSF function.
STP10
E311 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-11 for RSF function.
STP11
E312 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-12 for RSF function.
STP12
E313 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-13 for RSF function.
STP13
E314 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-14 for RSF function.
STP14 6
E315 RSF Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-15 for RSF function.
STP15
GROUP-4: RSF FREQUENCY FOR TABLE-2
E401 Freq T2-STP1 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-1.
E402 Freq T2-STP2 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-2.
E403 Freq T2-STP3 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-3.
E404 Freq T2-STP4 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-4.
E405 Freq T2-STP5 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-5.
E406 Freq T2-STP6 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-6.
E407 Freq T2-STP7 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-7.
E408 Freq T2-STP8 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-8.
E409 Freq T2-STP9 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-9.
E410 Freq T2-STP10 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-10.
E411 Freq T2-STP11 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-11.
E412 Freq T2-STP12 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-12.
E413 Freq T2-STP13 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-13.
E414 Freq T2-STP14 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-14.
E415 Freq T2-STP15 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-2, Step-15.
GROUP-5: RSF TIME FOR TABLE-2
E501 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-1 for RSF function.
STP1
E502 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-2 for RSF function.
STP2
E503 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-3 for RSF function.
STP3
E504 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-4 for RSF function.
STP4

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-27
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
E505 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-5 for RSF function.
STP5
E506 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-6 for RSF function.
STP6
E507 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-7 for RSF function.
STP7
E508 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-8 for RSF function.
STP8
E509 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-9 for RSF function.
STP9
E510 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-10 for RSF function.
STP10
E511 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-11 for RSF function.
STP11
E512 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-12 for RSF function.
STP12
E513 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-13 for RSF function.
STP13
E514 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-14 for RSF function.
6 STP14
E515 RSF Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-15 for RSF function.
STP15
GROUP-6: RSF FREQUENCY FOR TABLE-3
E601 Freq T3-STP1 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-1.
E602 Freq T3-STP2 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-2.
E603 Freq T3-STP3 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-3.
E604 Freq T3-STP4 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-4.
E605 Freq T3-STP5 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-5.
E606 Freq T3-STP6 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-6.
E607 Freq T3-STP7 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-7.
E608 Freq T3-STP8 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-8.
E609 Freq T3-STP9 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-9.
E610 Freq T3-STP10 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-10.
E611 Freq T3-STP11 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-11.
E612 Freq T3-STP12 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-12.
E613 Freq T3-STP13 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-13.
E614 Freq T3-STP14 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-14.
E615 Freq T3-STP15 Hz 5.00 0.01 600 0.01 Set frequency for Table-3, Step-15.
GROUP-7: RSF TIME FOR TABLE-3
E701 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-1 for RSF function.
STP1
E702 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-2 for RSF function.
STP2
E703 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-3 for RSF function.
STP3
E704 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-4 for RSF function.
STP4

Amtech

6-28
No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
E705 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-5 for RSF function.
STP5
E706 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-6 for RSF function.
STP6
E707 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-7 for RSF function.
STP7
E708 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-8 for RSF function.
STP8
E709 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-9 for RSF function.
STP9
E710 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-10 for RSF function.
STP10
E711 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-11 for RSF function.
STP11
E712 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-12 for RSF function.
STP12
E713 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-13 for RSF function.
STP13
E714 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-14 for RSF function.
STP14 6
E715 RSF Time T3- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-3, Step-15 for RSF function.
STP15

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-29
 MODE-G: Pattern Run Function Parameters

No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP

GROUP-1: MODE SELECTION FOR PATTERN RUN TABLE-1
G101 PR Mode T1-STP1 1 1 3 1 Select the required mode for pattern run
function for each step of Table-1
G102 PR Mode T1-STP2 1 1 3 1
G103 PR Mode T1-STP3 1 1 3 1 =1: STOP
G104 PR Mode T1-STP4 1 1 3 1 =2: FORWARD
G105 PR Mode T1-STP5 1 1 3 1 =3: REVERSE
G106 PR Mode T1-STP6 1 1 3 1
G107 PR Mode T1-STP7 1 1 3 1
G108 PR Mode T1-STP8 1 1 3 1
G109 PR Mode T1-STP9 1 1 3 1
G110 PR Mode T1- 1 1 3 1
STP10
G111 PR Mode T1- 1 1 3 1
STP11
G112 PR Mode T1- 1 1 3 1
STP12
6
G113 PR Mode T1- 1 1 3 1
STP13
G114 PR Mode T1- 1 1 3 1
STP14
G115 PR Mode T1- 1 1 3 1
STP15
GROUP-2: MODE SELECTION FOR PATTERN RUN TABLE-2
G201 PR Mode T2-STP1 1 1 3 1 Select the required mode for pattern run
function for each step of Table-2
G202 PR Mode T2-STP2 1 1 3 1
G203 PR Mode T2-STP3 1 1 3 1 =1: STOP
G204 PR Mode T2-STP4 1 1 3 1 =2: FORWARD
G205 PR Mode T2-STP5 1 1 3 1 =3: REVERSE
G206 PR Mode T2-STP6 1 1 3 1
G207 PR Mode T2-STP7 1 1 3 1
G208 PR Mode T2-STP8 1 1 3 1
G209 PR Mode T2-STP9 1 1 3 1
G210 PR Mode T2- 1 1 3 1
STP10
G211 PR Mode T2- 1 1 3 1
STP11
G212 PR Mode T2- 1 1 3 1
STP12
G213 PR Mode T2- 1 1 3 1
STP13
G214 PR Mode T2- 1 1 3 1
STP14
G215 PR Mode T2- 1 1 3 1
STP15

Amtech

6-30
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
GROUP-3: PATTERN TIME FOR TABLE-1
G301 PR Time T1-STP1 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-1 for Pattern Run.
G302 PR Time T1-STP2 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-2 for Pattern Run.
G303 PR Time T1-STP3 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-3 for Pattern Run.
G304 PR Time T1-STP4 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-4 for Pattern Run.
G305 PR Time T1-STP5 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-5 for Pattern Run.
G306 PR Time T1-STP6 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-6 for Pattern Run.
G307 PR Time T1-STP7 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-7 for Pattern Run.
G308 PR Time T1-STP8 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-8 for Pattern Run.
G309 PR Time T1-STP9 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-9 for Pattern Run.
G310 PR Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-10 for Pattern Run.
STP10
G311 PR Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-11 for Pattern Run.
STP11
G312 PR Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-12 for Pattern Run.
STP12
G313 PR Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-13 for Pattern Run. 6
STP13
G314 PR Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-14 for Pattern Run.
STP14
G315 PR Time T1- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-1, Step-15 for Pattern Run.
STP15
GROUP-4: PATTERN TIME FOR TABLE-2
G401 PR Time T2-STP1 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-1 for Pattern Run.
G402 PR Time T2-STP2 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-2 for Pattern Run.
G403 PR Time T2-STP3 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-3 for Pattern Run.
G404 PR Time T2-STP4 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-4 for Pattern Run.
G405 PR Time T2-STP5 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-5 for Pattern Run.
G406 PR Time T2-STP6 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-6 for Pattern Run.
G407 PR Time T2-STP7 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-7 for Pattern Run.
G408 PR Time T2-STP8 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-8 for Pattern Run.
G409 PR Time T2-STP9 Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-9 for Pattern Run.
G410 PR Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-10 for Pattern Run.
STP10
G411 PR Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-11 for Pattern Run.
STP11
G412 PR Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-12 for Pattern Run.
STP12
G413 PR Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-13 for Pattern Run.
STP13
G414 PR Time T2- PR Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-14 for Pattern Run.
STP14
G415 PR Time T2- Sec 10.0 0.1 6000.0 0.1 Set time for Table-2, Step-15 for Pattern Run.
STP15

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-31
 No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
GROUP-5: RETURN STEP FOR TABLE-1
G501 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-1.
STP1
G502 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-2.
STP2
G503 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-3.
STP3
G504 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-4.
STP4
G505 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-5.
STP5
G506 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-6.
STP6
G507 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-7.
STP7
G508 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-8.
STP8
G509 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-9.
STP9
6 G510 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-10.
STP10
G511 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-11.
STP11
G512 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-12.
STP12
G513 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-13.
STP13
G514 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-14.
STP14
G515 Return Step T1- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-1, Step-15.
STP15
GROUP-6: RETURN STEP FOR TABLE-2
G601 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-1.
STP1
G602 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-2.
STP2
G603 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-3.
STP3
G604 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-4.
STP4
G605 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-5.
STP5
G606 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-6.
STP6
G607 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-7.
STP7

Amtech

6-32
No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP
G608 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-8.
STP8
G609 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-9.
STP9
G610 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-10.
STP10
G611 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-11.
STP11
G612 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-12.
STP12
G613 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-13.
STP13
G614 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-14.
STP14
G615 Return Step T2- 1 1 14 1 Set return step for Table-2, Step-15.
STP15

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-33
 MODE-H: APPLICATION SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS

No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP

GROUP-1: MULTI-PUMP FUNCTION PARAMETERS
H101 No Of Pump 0 0 4 1 Select number of pumps to be controlled.
Selection
H102 Pump Start Hold Sec 60.0 0.1 3600.0 0.1 If the PID output reaches to upper limit and
Time remains there for more than the set time, the
next pump will be switched ON.
H103 Pump Stop Hold Sec 60.0 0.1 3600.0 0.1 If the PID output reaches to lower limit and
Time remains there for more than the set time, the
next pump will be switched OFF.
H104 Pump Continuous Hrs 8 2 168 1 If pump’s ON/OFF control is not carried out for
ON Time Limit more than the set time, the pump will change to
the longest operating pump to the shortest
operating pump.
H105 Pump Changeover Sec 3 1 120 1 Set the time for changing from the pump that
Time has been operating longest to the pump
operating shortest.

Amtech

6-34
 MODE-P: IN-BUILT PLC FUNCTIONS

No. Parameter Unit Def Min Max Res Description WP

GROUP-1: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS
P101 PLC Inst 1 ~ PLC 0 0 - 1 In-built PLC Command 1 ~ 10.
~ Inst 10
P110
GROUP-2: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS
P201 PLC Inst 11 ~ PLC 0 0 - 1 In-built PLC Command 11 ~ 20.
~ Inst 20
P210
GROUP-3: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS
P301 PLC Inst 21 ~ PLC 0 0 - 1 In-built PLC Command 21 ~ 30.
~ Inst 30
P310
GROUP-4: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS
P401 PLC Inst 31 ~ PLC 0 0 - 1 In-built PLC Command 31 ~ 40.
~ Inst 40
P410
GROUP-5: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS
P501 PLC Inst 41 ~ PLC 0 0 - 1 In-built PLC Command 41 ~ 50. 6
~ Inst 50
P510
GROUP-6: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS
P601 PLC Inst 51 ~ PLC 0 0 - 1 In-built PLC Command 51 ~ 60.
~ Inst 60
P610
GROUP-7: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS
P701 PLC Inst 61 ~ PLC 0 0 - 1 In-built PLC Command 61 ~ 70.
~ Inst 70
P710
GROUP-8: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS
P801 PLC Inst 71 ~ PLC 0 0 - 1 In-built PLC Command 71 ~ 80.
~ Inst 80
P810
GROUP-9: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS
P901 PLC Inst 81 ~ PLC 0 0 - 1 In-built PLC Command 81 ~ 90.
~ Inst 90
P910
GROUP-A: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS
PA01 PLC Inst 91 ~ PLC 0 0 - 1 In-built PLC Command 91 ~ 100.
~ Inst 100
PA10
GROUP-B: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS
PB01 PLC Inst 101 ~ 0 0 - 1 In-built PLC Command 101 ~ 110.
~ PLC Inst 110
PB10
GROUP-C: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS
PC01 PLC Inst 111 ~ 0 0 - 1 In-built PLC Command 111 ~ 120.
~ PLC Inst 120
PC10

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-35
 FUNCTION EXPLANATIONS

GROUP-1

M101: Output Frequency (Hz)

It displays output frequency of AC DRIVE in Hz. When the AC DRIVE is stop, it will display zero.
When auxiliary drive is selected, this parameter displays the output frequency of the auxiliary drive.
When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with “Hz”
unit.

M102: Motor Speed (rpm)

It displays the motor / shaft speed in rpm. When the AC DRIVE is stop, it will display zero.
If Motor control mode A401 = 1, 3: It displays calculated motor speed or shaft rpm using Line speed
display setting A104 or D205 (for auxiliary drive) and M101.
If Motor control mode A401 = 2, 4: It displays actual speed of motor shaft using encoder.
When auxiliary drive is selected, this parameter displays the auxiliary motor speed.
When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with “rpm”
unit.
6
M103: Output Current (Amp)
It displays actual output current of AC DRIVE in Ampere. When the AC DRIVE is stop, it will display
zero. When auxiliary drive is selected, this parameter displays the output current of the auxiliary drive.
When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with
“Amp” unit.

M104: Output Current (%)

It displays actual output current of AC DRIVE as a percentage of rated motor current B103. When
auxiliary drive is selected the rated motor current programmed in D103 is considered.
Output current (%) = Output current (M103) X 100 / Motor current (B103 or D103)
When the AC DRIVE is stop, it will display zero. When selected for the normal parameter display in
A601~A608, the value will be displayed with “%L” unit.

M105: Set Frequency (Hz*)

This parameter displays the set value of frequency in Hz. When local (Digital Operation Panel) option
is selected as frequency reference input in A106, it will display the value of A101 or D201 (for auxiliary
drive). When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed
with “Hz*” unit.

M106: Frequency Reference Input

It displays currently selected frequency reference input source in A106 or D204 (for auxiliary drive).

M107: Set Torque (%)

This parameter displays the set value of torque in %, when motor control mode A401 = 3,4. If local
(Digital Operation Panel) option is selected as torque reference input, it will display the value of A107.
When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with “%*”
unit.

Amtech

6-36
M108: Torque Reference Input
It displays currently selected torque reference input source in A108, when motor control mode A401 =
3, 4.

M109: PID Reference

This parameter displays the value of currently selected PID reference input source in the unit selected
in C614. When local (Digital Operation Panel) option is selected as PID reference input source, it will
display the value of C611. When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value
will be displayed with “PR” unit.

M110: PID Feedback

This parameter displays the value of currently selected PID feedback input source in the unit selected
in C614. When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed
with “Fb” unit.

M111: FSV Input Voltage

This parameter displays the analog input voltage at FSV.

M112: FSI Input Current 6

This parameter displays the analog input current at FSI.

M113: VIN Input Voltage

This parameter displays the analog input voltage at VIN.

M114: IIN Input Current

This parameter displays the analog input current at IIN.

M115: Output Current U

This parameter displays the Output current of U phase.

M116: Output Current V

This parameter displays the Output current of V phase.

M117: Output Current W

This parameter displays the Output current of W phase.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-37
 GROUP-2

M201: Input Voltage Vry (Vac)

This parameter displays the input line-to-line voltage between R & Y at input. This is calculated based
on the DC bus voltage and output power. This may differ from the actual input voltage. If this voltage
differs from the actual voltage then adjust parameter C223: Input voltage gain. When selected for the
normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with “Vry” unit.

M202: Input Voltage Vyb (Vac)

This parameter displays the input line-to-line voltage between Y & B at input. This is calculated based
on the DC bus voltage and output power. This may differ from the actual input voltage. If this voltage
differs from the actual voltage then adjust parameter C223: Input voltage gain. When selected for the
normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with “Vyb” unit.

M203: Output Voltage (Vac)

This parameter displays the output line-to-line voltage. This is calculated voltage based on the voltage
command. This may differ from the actual output voltage. The actual output voltage depends on input
supply voltage. When the AC DRIVE is stop, it will display zero. When auxiliary drive is selected, it
displays the output voltage for the auxiliary drive.
6 When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with “Vo”
unit.

M204: DC Bus Voltage (Vdc)

This parameter displays the dc bus voltage. When selected for the normal parameter display in
A601~A608, the value will be displayed with “Vdc” unit.

M205: Output Power (kW)

This parameter displays the output power. This may differ from the actual output power. When the AC
DRIVE is stop, it will display zero. When the auxiliary drive is selected, the output power of auxiliary
drive is displayed.
When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with “kW”
unit.

M206: Energy Meter (kWH)

M207: Energy Meter (MWH)

This parameter displays the total output power consumption per hour basis. This may differ from the
actually consumed output energy. This is stored in the non-volatile memory.
When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with
“kWH” and “MWH” unit respectively.

M208: Heat sink Temperature (°C)

This parameter displays the actual heat sink temperature. When selected for the normal parameter
display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with “°C” unit.

M209: Torque Current (%)

The torque current value is displayed using the motor rated current B103 as 100%. When the AC
DRIVE is stop, it will display zero.

Amtech

6-38
When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with
“%Tq” unit.

M210: Excitation Current (%)

The excitation current value is displayed using the motor rated current B103 as 100%. When the AC
DRIVE is stop, it will display zero.
When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with
“%Ex” unit.

M211: Heat Sink Temperature (°F)

This parameter displays the actual heat sink temperature in °F. When selected for the normal
parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with “°F” unit.

M212: Energy Saved in kWH

M213: Energy Saved in MWH

This parameter displays the total power saved per hour basis using VFD. This may differ from the
actually saved energy. To get the nearest value, enter the kW consumption in B112 before the VFD is
installed. The energy saved is stored in the non-volatile memory.
6
M214: Hank Count
This parameter displays the current hank count. The max possible value is 6553.5. It is cleared to
zero when power is turned off.

M215: Money Saved with VFD

M216: Money Saved with VFD x1K

This parameter displays the money saved using VFD. This may differ from the actually saved money.
To get the nearest value, enter the kW consumption in B112 before the VFD is installed. Also, enter
the energy cost in parameter B114 and select your currency unit in parameter B113. Parameter M216
shows the money saved in x1000.

M217: Encoder Count

This parameter displays the Encoder count as per below formula,
Encoder Count = (Encoder Pulses (B109) * Motor Speed (M102)* 4 *Speed loop time (B601)) /
(60*1000).

M218: ASR O/P Monitor

The ASR output is displayed. The polarity is positive during forward run drive, negative during forward
run regeneration, negative during reverse run drive, and positive during reverse run regeneration. This
is displayed as a percentage in respect to the motor's rated torque.
When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with
“ASR” unit.

M219: ACR O/P Monitor

The ACR output is displayed. The polarity is positive during forward run drive, negative during forward
run regeneration, negative during reverse run drive, and positive during reverse run regeneration.
When selected for the normal parameter display in A601~A608, the value will be displayed with
“ACR” unit.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-39
 M220: Drive Overload
If the output current exceeds the unit's rated current, the display value counts up from 0%.In the
normal-duty mode (Normal-duty, A401 = 5/6/7/8), the display counts up at rate of 120%/minute in
respect to the unit's rated current. In the heavy-duty mode (Heavy-duty, A401 = 1/2/3/4), the display
counts up at a rate of 150%/minute.
When this display value reaches 100%, a fault "Drive Over Load" occurs.
Note: The unit rated current value differs for normal-duty mode and heavy-duty mode.

M221: Motor Overload

If the output current exceeds the motor overload reference, the display counts up from 0%.
When this display value reaches 100%, a fault "Motor Over Load" occurs.

GROUP-3

M301: Total Conductivity Time (Hrs)

The total (cumulative) power on time after product shipment is counted and displayed in this
parameter.

M302: Total Run Time (Hrs)

6 The total (cumulative) AC DRIVE run time after product shipment is counted and displayed in this
parameter.

M303: Automatic Tuning display

This parameter displays the progress of auto tuning process, when auto-tuning function is executed. It
will start with 0% and reach to 100% when auto-tuning is over. It will show zero otherwise.

M304: Rated Current (A)

This parameter displays the rated current capacity of the unit.

M305: Inverter Type (kW)

This parameter displays the rated kW capacity of the unit.

M306: Control Version

This parameter displays the ROM version of DSP Control Board (PCA-2014A) of AC DRIVE.

M307: Programmable Sequence Inputs

This parameter displays the status of various programmable sequence inputs.

M o d e - M G r o u p - 3
M 3 0 7 P S I - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
F w d , L c l , N o r m a l R u n
As shown above, line-2 shows the programmable sequence input and line-3 shows the status of
respective input. The zero value indicates that the programmable sequence input is OFF and 1
indicates ON. In the above screen, only PSI-2 is ON and the others are OFF.

Amtech

6-40
M308: Programmable Sequence Outputs
This parameter displays the status (selected function status) of various programmable sequence
outputs.
PSO-5, 6 & 7 indicates the status of trip relay, programmable relay 1 and programmable relay 2
respectively.

M o d e - M G r o u p - 3
M 3 0 8 P S O - 1 2 3 4 R - 5 6 7
0 1 0 0 0 1 0
F w d , L c l , N o r m a l R u n
As shown above, line-2 shows the programmable sequence output and line-3 shows the status of
respective output. The zero value indicates that the programmable sequence output is OFF and 1
indicates ON. In the above screen, only PSO-2 and 6 are ON and the others are OFF.

M309: Unit Serial Number

This parameter displays the serial number of the unit.

M310: Ship Month

6
This parameter displays the month of unit shipment.

M311: Ship Year

This parameter displays the year of unit shipment.

M312: Display Version

This parameter displays the ROM version of Display Board (PCA-2012) of AC DRIVE.

M313 to M322: PLC Display 1 to 10

For In-built PLC programming, there are 115 numbers of 16-bit registers out of this, 10 registers can
be displayed in parameter M313 to M322.The values of these registers will be saved in EEPROM on
power off.

M323: PLC FLAG STAT 0-7

For In-built PLC programming, there are 100 numbers of 1-bit flags, 8 of these flag status can be
display in parameter M323..

GROUP-4: FAULT HISTORY

FLT-1 ~ FLT10: Fault 1 ~ 10

Parameter FLT-1 displays the latest fault. It also displays the DC Bus Voltage (Vdc), Load Current
(Amp), Output Frequency (Hz), and Heat sink Temperature (°C) at the time of fault occurrence. Other
four parameters Input Voltage (Vry), Total Conductivity Time (Hr), Energy Meter (MWH) and Energy
Meter (kWH) will be stored in the next page.

PAGE-1

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-41
 M o d e - M F L T - 1 G r o u p - 4
E x t e r n a l F a u l t
5 8 5 V d c 0 . 0 A m p
1 0 . 0 0 H z 3 5 ° C

PAGE-2
M o d e - M F L T - 1 G r o u p - 4
E x t e r n a l F a u l t
4 2 0 V r y 6 0 1 1 0 H r
1 1 0 MW H 7 3 5 k W H
As shown above, in the first page, line-2 shows the fault code, line-3 shows the DC Bus Voltage &
Output Current and line-4 shows the Output Frequency & Heat sink Temperature. In the second page
also, line-2 shows the fault code, line-3 shows Input Voltage (Vry) & Total Conductivity Time (Hr) and
line-4 shows the Energy Meter (MWH & kWH). If no fault is detected since shipment, line-2 in both the
pages will display “No previous fault” and the value of different parameters will be read as zero.
6 Same way FLT-2 ~ FLT10 shows the previous fault codes and parameters at the time of fault
occurrence.

GROUP-6

M601 ~ M624: Output Current of U, V, W phase and Inverter Unit Current

These parameters display the Output current of U, V and W phase of Inverter Unit 1 to 6, whereas,
parameters M604, M608, M612, M616, M620 and M624 display output current of Inverter Unit 1 to 6.
M621, M622, M623 and M624 parameters are applicable when PCA-2049A parallel interface board is
used in the drive.

GROUP-7

M701: Control Version Parallel Inverter

Indicate ROM version of DSP Based interface board PCA-2013A/PCA-2049A for parallel inverter.

M702: Temperature Inverter Unit (IU) – 2 (°C)

M703: Temperature Inverter Unit (IU) – 3 (°C)

M704: Temperature Inverter Unit (IU) – 4 (°C)

M705: Temperature Inverter Unit (IU) – 5 (°C)

These parameters display the actual heat sink temperature of Inverter Unit 2 to 5. The value will be
displayed with “°C” unit.
M706: Temperature Diode Unit (DU) – 1 (°C)

Amtech

6-42
M707: Temperature Diode Unit (DU) – 2 (°C)
These parameters display the actual heat sink temperature of Diode Unit 1 and 2. The value will be
displayed with “°C” unit.

M708: Temperature Panel – 1 (°C)

M709: Temperature Panel – 2 (°C)

These parameters display the actual heat sink temperature of Panel 1 and 2. The value will be
displayed with “°C” unit. This parameter is applicable when PCA-2013A parallel interface board is
used in the drive.

M710: Driver Status

M o d e - M G r o u p - 7
M 7 1 0 D r i v e r S t a t u s
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
IU-1 U-Phase IU-2 IU-3 IU-4 IU-5
IU-1 V-Phase
6
IU-1 W-Phase

As shown above, line-3 shows the driver fault status of respective IU unit. The zero value indicates no
driver fault from IU unit and 1 indicates driver fault from respective phase of respective IU unit. In the
above screen, only V phase of IU-1 unit has detected driver fault. The sequence of driver fault status
bit is shown in above figure. This parameter is applicable when PCA-2013A parallel interface board is
used in the drive.

M711: Temperature Inverter Unit (IU) – 6 (°C)

This parameter displays the actual heat sink temperature of Inverter Unit 6. The value will be
displayed with “°C” unit. This parameter is applicable when PCA-2049A parallel interface board is
used in the drive.

M712: Short Circuit Status IU 1~6

M o d e - M G r o u p - 7
M 7 1 2 S C S t s I U 1 t o 6
0 1 0 0 0 0
IU-1 IU-2 IU-3 IU-4 IU-5 IU-6

As shown above, line-3 shows the short circuit or driver fault status of respective IU unit. The zero
value indicates no fault from IU unit and 1 indicates short circuit or driver fault from respective IU unit.
For example, in the above screen, only IU-2 unit has detected short circuit or driver fault. The
sequence of driver fault status bit is shown. This parameter is applicable only when PCA-2049A
parallel interface board is used in the drive. This value shows last fault condition and will be update
with latest fault. This status clears by value “555” in B311.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-43
 M713: Over Current Status IU 1-2-3
This parameter displays the over current fault from individual phase (current sensor) from inverter unit
(IU) 1, 2 or 3.
This parameter is applicable only when PCA-2049A parallel interface board is used in the drive. This
value shows last fault condition and will be update with latest fault. This status clears by value “555” in
B311.

M o d e - M G r o u p - 7
M 7 1 3 O C S t s I U 1 - 2 - 3
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
IU-1 U-Phase IU-2 IU-3
IU-1 V-Phase
IU-1 W-Phase

M714: Over Current Status IU 4-5-6

This parameter displays the over current fault from individual phase (current sensor) from inverter unit
(IU) 4, 5 or 6.
This parameter is applicable only when PCA-2049A parallel interface board is used in the drive. This
value shows last fault condition and will be update with latest fault. This status clears by value “555” in
6 B311.

M o d e - M G r o u p - 7
M 7 1 4 O C S t s I U 4 - 5 - 6
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
IU-4 U-Phase IU-5 IU-6
IU-4 V-Phase
IU-4 W-Phase

M715: Over Temperature Status IU 1~6 DU 1~2

This parameter displays the over temperature fault from thermostat from inverter unit (IU) 1 to 6 and
diode unit (DU) 1 and 2. This parameter is applicable only when PCA-2049A parallel interface board
is used in the drive. This value shows last fault condition and will be update with latest fault.

M o d e - M G r o u p - 7
M 7 1 5 O T I U 1 - 6 D 1 - 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
IU-1 IU-2 IU-3 IU-4 IU-5 IU-6 DU-1 DU-2

GROUP-8
Default Differ Parameter (Change Parameter List)
This group provides the change parameters list, only the parameters which differ from default value
and user also can change parameters value from this group. Use UP or DOWN key for next changed
parameters.

Amtech

6-44
 M G 8 * D E F A U L T D I F F E R * *
A 1 0 1 L o c a l S e t F r e q
2 0 . 0 0 H z
F w d , L c l , N o r m a l R u n

MODE – A

GROUP – 1: FREQUENCY SETTING

A101: Local Set Frequency (Hz)

This is the set frequency when the frequency reference input source is Local (A106=1). The output
will ramp to this frequency, when start command is given.
The minimum limit for this parameter is decided by minimum frequency A102. If A102 is set higher
then A101, the value of A102 is automatically assigned to A101.
The maximum value of this parameter is decided by Maximum frequency A103. The value of A101
cannot be set higher than A103.
6

A102: Minimum Frequency (Hz)

This is the minimum output frequency of the AC DRIVE.
In terminal mode, this is the minimum output attained with minimum analog input reference. This
value should always be lower then the maximum frequency A103. The minimum frequency will be
reached after start command with selected acceleration ramp up time. This is applicable to all
frequency references including jog select input, preset inputs and static pot inputs.

A103: Maximum Frequency (Hz)

This is the maximum output frequency of the AC DRIVE.
In terminal mode, this is the maximum output attained with maximum analog input reference.

A104: Jog Frequency (Hz)

This frequency setting is selected when executing jogging run with the programmable sequence input
command Jog Select. The selected acceleration time A201 (or A203) / deceleration time A202 (or
A204) and stop mode A304 will be applicable to this signal.
If auxiliary drive is selected, then the acceleration time D206 (or A203) / deceleration time D207 (or
A204) will be applicable.
The minimum limit for this parameter is A102 and maximum limit is A103.
Speed search function is carried out, when executing jogging run command, if it is enabled. Jog
Select is valid in all conditions of A301. However, RUN command has the higher priority then Jog
Select, if both the signals are input together.

A105: Line Speed Setting

The entered value will be displayed as motor speed in M102 at 50 Hz, if motor control mode A401=1
(open loop v/f mode). It will not have any effect in other modes.
The final speed of the driven load can be displayed by this parameter. The value to be entered can be
derived at with following formula:

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-45
 Parameter Value = 50 x Desired rpm / Set output frequency
Suppose a line speed of 273 is to be displayed when the output is 90 Hz.
Parameter Value = 50 X 273 / 90 = 151.667 = 152
Now, at 90Hz the motor speed M102 will show (152 X 90 / 50) i.e. 274 rpm.

A106: Frequency Reference Input

This parameter can be used to select the speed reference input to the AC DRIVE. The speed
reference can be independently selected from the given options even if the AC DRIVE is controlled
from any of three sources, i.e. Local (Digital Operation Panel), Terminal or Serial. The different
frequency reference inputs are explained as under. The minimum and maximum limits are decided by
A102 and A103 respectively in all the options.
1. Local
When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to local set frequency A101. Use
Digital Operation Panel (keypad) to change the set value. The monitor mode parameter M105 shows
the value of local set frequency A101 and M106 will show keypad as frequency reference input. The
local set frequency A101 will not have any effect in other options.

2. FSV 0-10V
When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to analog input FSV. The output
frequency will be minimum at 0 V and maximum at 10 V.
6 F F

A103 A103

A102 V I
10V A102 4mA 20mA
FSV 0-10V FSI 4-20mA
3. FSI 4-20mA
When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to analog input FSI. The output
frequency will be minimum at 4 mA and maximum at 20 mA.

4. FSV 0-5V
When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to analog input FSV. The output
frequency will be minimum at 0 V and maximum at 5 V.

5. FSI 0-20mA
When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to analog input FSI. The output
frequency will be minimum at 0 mA and maximum at 20 mA.

Amtech

6-46
 F F

A103 A103

V A102 I
A102 FSV 10-0V 10V 4mA FSI 20-4mA 20mA

6. FSV 10-0V
This is an inverse to option-2. When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to
analog input FSV. The output frequency will be minimum at 10 V and maximum at 0 V.

7. FSI 20-4mA
This is an inverse to option-3. When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to
analog input FSI. The output frequency will be minimum at 20 mA and maximum at 4 mA. The
maximum limit is decided by A103.
6
8. FSV 5-0V
This is an inverse to option-4. When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to
analog input FSV. The output frequency will be minimum at 5 V and maximum at 0 V.

9. FSI 20-0mA
This is an inverse to option-5. When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to
analog input FSI. The output frequency will be minimum at 20 mA and maximum at 0 mA.

10. Static potentiometer

When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 will be decided by programmable sequence
inputs. Assign two programmable sequence inputs to Freq Increase and Freq Decrease
respectively. When Freq Increase is applied, the set frequency will increase and when Freq
Decrease is applied, the frequency will decrease. If both the signals are applied simultaneously, it will
have no effect. The rate of frequency increase / decrease is 0.1 Hz at every 100msec.

11. Serial
In this option, the set frequency M105 can be assigned from serial link.

12. PID Output

In this option, the PID output will be the set point. When selecting this input, enable the PID Control in
C601. The monitor option M105 will display the corresponding set frequency value, even if the AC
DRIVE is stop.
For more information on PID control, refer Mode-C, Group-6 parameters.

13. VIN 0-10V

When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to analog input VIN. The output
frequency will be minimum at 0 V and maximum at 10 V.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-47
 F F

A103 A103

V I
A102 10V A102 4mA 20mA
VIN 0-10V IIN 4-20mA

14. IIN 4-20mA

When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to analog input IIN. The output
frequency will be minimum at 4 mA and maximum at 20 mA.

15. PLC A-O/P 1

When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to PLC A-O/P 1. This Parameter
option value can be set directly from In-built PLC function. The output frequency will be minimum at
6 0d and maximum at 1000d.

16. PLC A-O/P 2

When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to PLC A-O/P 2. This Parameter
option value can be set directly from In-built PLC function. The output frequency will be minimum at
0d and maximum at 1000d.

17. PLC A-O/P 3

When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to PLC A-O/P 3. This Parameter
option value can be set directly from In-built PLC function. The output frequency will be minimum at
0d and maximum at 1000d.

18. PLC A-O/P 4

When this option is selected, the set frequency M105 corresponds to PLC A-O/P 4. This Parameter
option value can be set directly from In-built PLC function. The output frequency will be minimum at
0d and maximum at 1000d.
For In-built PLC function and related parameters detail, refer Mode-P.

A107: Local Torque Setting (%)

This parameter is available only if motor control mode A401 = 3, 4, 7, 8 are selected. This setting
value is used as the torque command value when torque reference input is Local (A108 = 1).

A108: Torque Reference Input

This parameter can be used for torque reference input to the AC DRIVE. The torque reference can be
independently selected from the given options even if the AC DRIVE is controlled from local (Digital
Operation Panel), terminal or serial. The different torque reference inputs are explained as under. The
minimum limit is 0% and maximum limit is 200%, if output current does not exceed B301 value.

1. Local
When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to local set torque A107. Use digital
operation panel (keypad) to change the set value. The monitor mode parameter M107 shows the
Amtech

6-48
value of local set torque A107 and M108 will show keypad as torque reference input. The local set
torque A107 will not have any effect in other options.
T T

200% 200%

0% V 0% I
0 10V 0 4mA 20mA
FSV 0-10V FSI 4-20mA
2. FSV 0-10V
When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to analog input FSV. The minimum 0%
output torque will be available at 0 V and maximum 200% at 10 V.

3. FSI 4-20mA
When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to analog input FSI. The minimum 0%
output torque will be available at 4 mA and maximum 200% at 20 mA.
6
4. FSV 0-5V
When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to analog input FSV. The minimum 0%
output torque will be available at 0 V and maximum 200% at 5 V.
T T

200% 200%

0% 0%
V I
0 FSV 10-0V 10V 0 4mA FSI 20-4mA 20mA

5. FSI 0-20mA
When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to analog input FSI. The minimum 0%
output torque will be available at 0 mA and maximum 200% at 20 mA.

6. FSV 10-0V
This is an inverse to option-2. When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to
analog input FSV. The Maximum 200% torque will be available at 0 V and minimum 0% at 10 V.

7. FSI 20-4mA
This is an inverse to option-3. When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to
analog input FSI. The Maximum 200% torque will be available at 4 mA and minimum 0% at 20 mA.

8. FSV 5-0V
This is an inverse to option-4. When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to
analog input FSV. The Maximum 200% torque will be available at 0 V and minimum 0% at 5 V.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-49
 9. FSI 20-0mA
This is an inverse to option-5. When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to
analog input FSI. The Maximum 200% torque will be available at 0 mA and minimum 0% at 20 mA.

10. Static potentiometer

When this option is selected, the set torque M107 will be decided by programmable sequence inputs.
Assign one each programmable sequence input to Freq Increase and Freq Decrease respectively.
When Freq Increase is applied, the set torque will increase and when Freq Decrease is applied, the
set torque will decrease. If both the signals are applied simultaneously, it will have no effect.

11. Serial
In this option, the set torque M107 can be assigned from serial link.
The monitor option M107 will display the corresponding set torque value, even if the AC DRIVE is
stop

12. PID Output

In this option, the PID output will be the set point. When selecting this input, enable the PID Control.
The monitor option M107 will display the corresponding set frequency value, even if the AC DRIVE is
stop.
6
13. VIN 0-10V
When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to analog input VIN. The output torque
will be zero at 0V and maximum at 10V.
F F

A103 A103

V I
0 10V 0 4mA 20mA
VIN 0-10V IIN 4-20mA
14. IIN 4-20mA
When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to analog input IIN. The output torque
will be zero at 4mA and maximum at 20mA.

15. PLC A-O/P 1

When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to PLC A-O/P 1. This Parameter
option value can be set directly from In-built PLC function. The output torque will be zero at 0d and
maximum at 1000d.

16. PLC A-O/P 2

When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to PLC A-O/P 2. This Parameter
option value can be set directly from In-built PLC function. The output torque will be zero at 0d and
maximum at 1000d.

17. PLC A-O/P 3

Amtech

6-50
When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to PLC A-O/P 3. This Parameter
option value can be set directly from In-built PLC function. The output torque will be zero at 0d and
maximum at 1000d.

18. PLC A-O/P 4

When this option is selected, the set torque M107 corresponds to PLC A-O/P 4. This Parameter
option value can be set directly from In-built PLC function. The output torque will be zero at 0d and
maximum at 1000d.

A109: Extended Parameter

This parameter is used for extend the Mode – D, E, G, H, P. When this Parameter is Disable then
Mode – D, E, G, H, P are not display. When this Parameter is Enable then Mode – D, E, G, H, P are
display.

A110: Frequency Reference Select 1

A111: Frequency Reference Select 2

A112: Frequency Reference Select 3 6

Use these parameters to select the frequency reference as per the "Reference Select 0" and
"Reference Select 1" PSI selection. Refer the PSI selection for further detail.

A113: Stop Frequency

During deceleration drive act as coast to stop at this frequency.

GROUP – 2: ACCELERATION / DECELERATION

A201: Acceleration Time-1 (Sec)

Acceleration Time-1 is the time taken by AC DRIVE output frequency to ramp up from zero frequency
to maximum frequency A103.
Short acceleration time can result in excessive output current and if it exceeds the acceleration
current limit B303, the acceleration will cease until the current reduces below the B303 value. In such
case, the actual acceleration time will differ from programmed value. The AC DRIVE may trip in over
current fault if the condition persists for long time. Increase acceleration time in such cases.
F

Max.Frequency
(A103)

0 t
Acceleration Deceleration
Time-1(A201) Time-1(A202)

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-51
 A202: Deceleration Time-1 (Sec)
Deceleration Time-1 is the time taken by AC DRIVE output frequency to ramp down from maximum
frequency A103 to zero frequency.
Short deceleration time can result in excessive output current and if it exceeds the stall current limit
B301, the deceleration will cease until the current reduces below the B301 value. In such case, the
actual deceleration time will differ from programmed value. The AC DRIVE may trip in over current /
dc bus over voltage fault if the condition persists for long time. Increase deceleration time in such
cases.

A203: Acceleration Time-2 (Sec)

A204: Deceleration Time-2 (Sec)

The Acceleration Time-2 and Deceleration Time-2 can be selected in place of Acceleration Time-1
and Deceleration Time-1. This is valid only if Ramp Select input is ON. Acceleration Time-2 is the
time taken by AC DRIVE output frequency to ramp up from zero frequency to maximum frequency
A103.
Deceleration Time-2 is the time taken by AC DRIVE output frequency to ramp down from maximum
frequency A103 to zero frequency.
F

6 Max. Frequency (A103)

Deceleration
Time-1 (A202)
Ramp Select = OFF
Acceleration Deceleration
Time-1 (A201) Time-2 (A204)
Ramp Select = ON

ON
Ramp Select

A205: S-Curve Selection

A206: S-Curve Time-1 (Sec)

A207: S-Curve Time-2 (Sec)

Acceleration/deceleration with the S-shape pattern is possible by setting parameter A205=1. The
higher the S-curve time period, the more pronounced is the S-shape.
The total acceleration / deceleration times will not change.
When this parameter is set, all acceleration and deceleration will be as shown in below fig.
Note: Set so that the relation of the A206 / A207 setting and acceleration / deceleration time is as shown below.
A206 / A207 Setting value × 2 ≤ acceleration / deceleration time

Amtech

6-52
 F

Max. Frequency (A103)

A206 A207

t
A206 A207

Acceleration Deceleration
time-1 (A201) time-1 (A202)

A208: Current Limit Acceleration Time (Sec)

A209: Current Limit Deceleration Time (Sec)

These are the acceleration / deceleration time for the stall current limit function. When the AC DRIVE
is operating at set frequency and output current exceeds the stall current limit B301 value, the output 6
frequency and voltage are reduced. The deceleration time is decided by current limit deceleration time
A209. The dc bus voltage will rise in this process. If DC bus voltage control (B307= 2 or 3) is enabled,
it will stop the deceleration, if dc bus voltage exceeds 740 Vdc level for 400 V series. This level is
factory settable. The deceleration will resume, if dc link voltage reaches to 710 V (hysteresis of 30 V)
and the output current is still higher than the stall current limit. When the output current falls below the
stall current limit, the output frequency and output voltage will ramp up with current limit acceleration
time A208 to set frequency value. The dc bus regulation level for 500 V series is 875 Vdc and 1050
Vdc for 600 V series.
I
Stall Current
Limit (B301)

t
F
M105

Output Freq.
Current Limit
(M101) Current Limit Accel
Decel Time (A209)
Time (A208)
t
Vdc
740Vdc

DC Bus voltage Control

(B307=2 or 3)
t

A210: Acceleration Deceleration Multiplier

This is multiplier for the acceleration/ deceleration time related parameters. Parameters A201 ~ A207
and D206 ~ D207 will be multiplied by this multiplier and the effective values of these parameters will
be the result of this multiplication.
For example, if A201=10 second and A210=10, then the effective value of A201=100 second.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-53
 GROUP – 3: START / STOP SELECTION & DC BRAKING

A301: Start Control

The AC DRIVE can be started from Local (Digital Operation Panel), Terminal or Serial irrespective of
the frequency reference input. However, the direction will be decided as per the start control selection
only. When the start control is Local, the direction can only be changed through Digital Operation
Panel. The same applies to other selections also.
If in running condition, start control is changed from Local to Terminal, the operation will continue as
per the status of the new selection. For example, present selection is Local. Now if in running
condition, the selection is changed to Terminal. If RUN signal is present in terminal mode, the AC
DRIVE will continue running. If RUN signal is absent, the AC DRIVE will stop. When the selection is
changed from Terminal to any other mode (Local or Serial), AC DRIVE will continue its operation as
per the status of Terminal and not as per the new selection (Local or Serial).
The drive will accept the stop from Terminal only, if A301=2 (Terminal) is set. It will not stop from
Local (Digital Operation Panel) or Serial.
The drive will accept the stop from local (Digital Operation Panel) or Serial if A301=1 or 2 is set. In this
case, the drive will not stop from Terminal.

A302: Maintained Start / Stop

When using Terminal as start control (A301=2), this parameter gives the choice of having maintained
6 or momentary contacts for start or stop.
If A302=0: The start / stop control is maintained type as described in below figure.

RUN
Output frequency

COM

RUN

If A302=1: The start / stop control is momentary type as described in below figure.
Output frequency

RUN

STOP
RUN

COM
STOP

A303: Start Delay Time (Sec)

The motor will be delayed start from the run command by the set time. This is used for
synchronization with peripheral machines such as mechanical brakes. The start command can be
from Digital Operation Panel (keypad), Terminal or Serial.
The start delay time is also applicable to Jog Select input.

A304: Stop Mode

This parameter allows the user to select the stop mode. If A304=0 selected, the output will ramp down
to stop with deceleration time after the stop command and then applying the dc brake (if programmed)
to stop. If A304=1 selected, the output will be turned off simultaneously with the stop command. The
dc braking will not be applicable in this mode. The motor will stop depending on its inertia.
When stop key is pressed for 2.5 seconds or longer during operation, the drive will coast to stop
regardless of Local or Terminal start control.

Amtech

6-54
To restart after coast to stop, confirm that the motor has stopped. The AC DRIVE may trip if attempted
when the motor is running. (Enable the speed search function in such applications.)

A305: Motor Direction

This parameter allows the user to set the motor direction, when Start control selection is local (Digital
Operation Panel) A301=1. Set A305=0, to rotate the motor in forward direction and A305=1 to rotate
the motor in reverse direction in Local mode.
When A301=2: Terminal, the direction of rotation is determined by the status of programmable
sequence input.
Set B308 to prevent unintentional reverse direction operation. It will prevent the unit to start in reverse
direction, when enabled. This parameter cannot be changed during running condition.
Note: If reverse direction is locked and run command is given with reverse direction selection, the unit will not
start in reverse direction.

A306: DC Brake Start Frequency (Hz)

This is the frequency at which the dc brake will be applied. To enable this feature, the stop mode
should be ramp down and the dc braking time should not be zero. If dc braking time is zero, this
feature will be disabled.

A307: DC Brake Current (%) 6

This parameter decides the dc brake current.

A308: DC Brake Time (Sec)

This parameter decides the length of time for which dc braking is on.
When the stop mode is ramp down and stop command is issued, the output will ramp down with
deceleration time. When the AC DRIVE output reaches to dc braking start frequency, the dc voltage is
injected to the motor. The amount of voltage and the length of time for which it is applied are decided
by the dc braking current A307 and A308 respectively.
The dc braking is utilized to stop high inertia load forcefully. During dc braking mechanical energy
trapped in rotor due to system inertia will be dissipated as heat in the motor. Hence for safety dc
breaking is utilized at lower frequency.

A309: Stall Current Limit Selection

This parameter provides the choice for the selection of the stall current limit either from Local or
Terminal.
When the stall current limit selection is Local, the stall limit comes from the parameter B301 and if
selection is terminal then comes from analog input VIN (0-10V). It’s range from 0 to 200% according
to 0-10V at VIN.

A310: Auto Start / Line Start

A310 = 1: (OFF) Starts (Runs) with the start (run) command ON after pre-charging.
A310 = 2: (ON without Speed Search) If the start (run) command is ON when the power is turned on,
run will start after the inverter is charged. Speed search is not executed with this setting, so if the
motor is rotating when the power is turned ON, the inverter operation could trip.
A310 = 3: (ON with Speed Search) If the start (run) command turns ON when the power turns ON,
Speed search will start when the inverter charging is completed, and then operation will start.
If auto start (A310 = 2, 3) is used, under voltage fault will not be detected
This function is not applicable, if start control either local or serial.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-55
 GROUP – 4: V / F CHARACTERISTICS

A401: Control Mode

Set the required motor control mode. This Parameter does not change by default Load in B311.
A401=1: V/F Open loop Heavy duty Control.
A401=2: V/F Close-loop Heavy duty Control.
A401=3: Sensor-less Heavy duty Vector Control.
A401=4: Close-loop Heavy duty Vector Control.
A401=5: V/F Open loop Normal duty Control
A401=6: V/F Close-loop Normal duty Control
A401=7: Sensor-less Normal duty Vector Control
A401=8: Close-loop Normal duty Vector Control

A402: V/F Selection

Select appropriate v/f curve as per the application.
The AC DRIVE can be operated in linear curve mode, Square curve or custom setting mode.
In a linear curve mode, the v/f curve will be linear through out the range from minimum frequency to
Base frequency.
6 In square curve, the v/f curve will be square as shown in the figure. Fan and pump application require
additional energy conservation on variable torque/ horsepower loads due to reduced output v/f at
2
lower frequencies. So that Fan and pump loads can be programmed with X=Y law.
The custom mode setting allows the user to set different v/f points on characteristic curve using
parameters A403 ~ A410.
Vout

Base voltage
(A404)
Linear curve
(A402=1)

Square curve
(A402=2)
Fout
Base frequency
(A403)

A403: Base Frequency (%)

This is output frequency up to which the v/f is maintained constant. The unit operates in constant
torque mode up to this point and thereafter changes to constant horsepower mode. The maximum
output voltage at this point can be set with base voltage A404. This is percentage of Motor Frequency
B105.

A404: Base Voltage (%)

This parameter sets the maximum output voltage when the output frequency reaches to base
frequency as set in parameter A403. The voltage set is percentage of motor voltage B102.

A405 ~ A407: V/F1 ~ 3 Frequency (%)

Amtech

6-56
A408 ~ A410: V/F1 ~ 3 Voltage (%)
Custom three-point v/f characteristics as shown in the below figure can be set for the motors having
special v/f characteristics. Choose custom v/f curve in A402.
Vout

(A404)

(A410)
(F3,V3)

(F2,V2)
(A409)

(A408)
(F1,V1)

Fout
(A405) (A406) (A407) (A403)

Set so that F1 (A405) ≤ F2 (A406) ≤ F3 (A407) and V1 (A408) ≤ V2 (A409) ≤ V3 (A410).

A405~A407 are percentage of A403 and A408~A410 are percentage of A404.

GROUP – 5: TORQUE BOOST

6
A501: Manual Torque Boost setting (%)
Set the boost voltage at 0Hz as a percentage in respect to the Motor voltage (B102), when setting
manually. When programmed to zero, it will be disabled.
When automatic torque boost is selected, manual torque boost setting will not be valid regardless of
the manual torque boost selection state. This is automatically adjusted by the automatic tuning.
Vout

Base voltage
(A404) Output voltage
with manual
torque boost

Output voltage
with no torque
A501 boost
Fout
Base frequency
(A403)

A502: Automatic Torque Boost selection

When automatic torque boost is selected, manual torque boost setting will not be valid regardless of
the manual torque boost selection state.
The automatic torque boost function carries out voltage boosting using the current detection value.
This allows the torque to be improved when starting and at low speed regions.

A503: Slip Compensation (Hz)

Set motor’s rated slip. Set the slip frequency for the motor rated load in respect to the base frequency,
when setting manually. The output frequency changes according to the motor rated torque. The
output frequency will respond with a time constant of approximately 500msec in respect to the change
in the load torque.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-57
 Output frequency

Load torque

GROUP – 6: DISPLAY PARAMETER SELECTION

A601 ~ A608: Normal parameter 1 ~ 8

A601: It selects parameter wishing to display on normal screen position Norm-1 out of M101~M105,
M107, M109~M110, M115~M117, M201~M211, and M217 ~ M219 of monitor mode.
Similarly A602~A608 selects parameters for Norm-2 to Norm-8 positions.

The default setting will be as under.

User Selectable four parameters

N o r m
6
Norm 1 0 . 0 H z 4 2 . 0 A m p Norm 3

Norm 2 5 0 . 0 H z * 4 1 5 V r y Norm 4

F w d , L c l , D r i v e S t o p

To display the Output Frequency M101 (Hz) parameter at Norm 1 position as shown in the above
screen, select option 1 (M101 Hz) in parameter A601 Norm Parameter1.

M o d e - A G r o u p - 6
A 6 0 1 N o r m P a r a m e t e r 1
1 : M 1 0 1 H z
F w d , L c l , D r i v e S t o p

Similarly, to display the desired parameters at positions Norm 2, Norm 3 and Norm 4, select the
appropriate option in A602, A603 and A604 respectively.
Parameters A605~A608 selects parameters for Norm-5 to Norm-8 positions for the meter screen and
are not applicable for the normal screen. Below is the meter screen with eight parameters.

User Selectable eight parameters

Norm 5 4 1 5 V r y 2 2 k W Norm 7

Norm 1 5 0 . 0 H z 4 2 . 0 A m p Norm 3

Norm 2 5 0 . 0 H z * 5 0 % L Norm 4

Norm 6 5 8 5 V d c 3 5 ° C Norm 8

GROUP – 7: FREQUENCY REFERENCE MATH OPERATIONS

Amtech

6-58
A701: Multipler-A106
This is a multiplier to the frequency reference selected in A106.

A702: Math Reference Input2

Select the second reference for the math operation from the below options.
=1: Not Used
=2: FSV 0-10V
=3: FSI 4-20mA
=4: VIN 0-10V
=5: IIN 4-20mA
=6: PLC A-O/P 1
=7: PLC A-O/P 3
=8: PLC A-O/P 2
=9: PLC A-O/P 4

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-59
 A703: Multipler-A702
This is a multiplier to the math reference input2 selected in A702.

A704: Math Operator

Select the mathematical operation to be carried out between frequency reference selected in A106
and math reference input2 selected in A702 from the following options.
=1: + Add
=2: x Multiply
=3: / Divide

A705: Fix Bias (Hz)

This is fixed bias added into the output after the math operation.

A706: Variable Bias

This parameter can be used to add variable bias into the output after the math operation. Select from
the below options.
=1: Not Used
=2: FSV 0-10V
6 =3: FSI 4-20mA
=4: VIN 0-10V
=5: IIN 4-20mA
=6: Static Pot
Multiplier
Fix Bias
A705
A106: Freq Ref Input A701

+
Internal Freq
/ x + Command
Multiplier

A702: Math Ref Input A703

Variable Bias
Math Operator
A706
A704

Amtech

6-60
MODE – B

GROUP – 1: MOTOR PARAMETERS

B101: Rated Input Voltage (Vac)

Select suitable rated input voltage for the AC DRIVE. When the rated input voltage is changed, the
motor voltage may change accordingly.

B102: Motor Voltage (Vac)

Enter motor nameplate voltage. This is used as reference voltage for many parameters. This is the
motor terminal voltage during full load at the base frequency.

B103: Motor Current (Amp)

Enter motor rated current from the motor nameplate. This is full load motor current at base frequency.
The motor over load and other current related protections are based on this value. This value cannot
be set higher than AC DRIVE rated current M305.

B104: Motor Frequency (Hz)

Enter motor base frequency from the motor nameplate. Base frequency A403 should be set in 6
accordance to the motor frequency.

B105: Motor Speed (rpm)

Enter motor base speed from the motor nameplate. When higher than this speed, the flux control
during vector control will be weakened.

B106: Motor Output Rating (kW)

Enter motor capacity from the motor nameplate.

B107: Motor Poles

Enter motor poles from the motor nameplate.

B108: No Load output Voltage (Vac)

Enter the motor terminal voltage during no load at the base speed. It will be automatically set if auto-
tuning function is executed.

B109: Encoder Pulses (P/R)

Enter the encoder pulses from the encoder specification. This is used when the motor control mode in
A401=2, 4, 6, 8.

B110: Carrier Frequency (kHz)

This is the carrier frequency of the PWM. Set in accordance to the rated capacity of the AC DRIVE. If
set higher than the specified carrier frequency, derate the output current accordingly.

B111: DTC Gain

This is gain for the dead time compensation. Adjust incase of motor hunting.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-61
 B112: kW without VFD (kW)
Enter the power consumption in kW before Axpert-Eazy variable frequency drive is installed. This is
used to calculate the energy saving with VFD.

B113: Currency Selection

Select the currency of the energy cost. The money saved using VFD is displayed in this currency.

B114: Energy Cost

Enter the energy cost here. This is used to calculate the money saved using VFD.
Note: Parameters B115 to B117 are not applicable to standard VFD and applicable only when the function is
enabled in factory parameters and the unit is provided for the variable voltage fix frequency source.

B115: Local Set Voltage (%)

Enter the output voltage in % of Motor voltage B102. This is applicable only when the unit is
configured to use as variable voltage fix frequency power supply.

B116: Output Voltage Reference Selection

6 Use this parameter to select the output voltage reference input.

When Local is selected, the output voltage is set using B115.

B117: Encoder Polarity

This is used to select Encoder polarity.
= 0: Forward
= 1: Reverse

B118: No Load Output Current (Amp)

Set the motor no load current. If the no-load motor current is not available, enter the current drawn by
the no-load motor when it runs on mains.

B119: Motor Overload Selection

Set the motor overload in percentage with respect to motor rated current which is set in B103. This is
reference for the inverse time motor overload characteristics. Changing this parameter can change
the inverse time motor overload characteristics.

GROUP – 2: MOTOR CONSTANT

B201: Automatic Tuning selection

This parameter allows the user to select the automatic tuning process. Select appropriate option for
the automatic tuning that matches the working conditions.
The basic parameter such as A501: Manual torque boost is adjusted apart from motor parameters
such as B202 ~ B211, Primary (stator) Resistance, Secondary (rotor) Resistance, Leakage
Inductance and Excitation (magnetizing) Inductance are adjusted.
Refer 4-3 Automatic Tuning & Adjustment for further detail.
= 1: Automatic tuning processes disable.
= 2: Stationary (Belt ON) (for V/F and V/F close loop)
The automatic tuning process is executed without rotating the motor. Select this option when it is
difficult to decouple the load from motor or the load is less than 10% or less.

Amtech

6-62
= 3: Rotational (Belt OFF) (for Vector open and close loop)
The automatic tuning process is executed with rotating the motor. Select this option when it is
possible to decouple the load from motor. In this mode, motor rotate up to the half of base speed.
=4: Extended Rotational (Belt OFF) (for Vector open and close loop)
The automatic tuning process is executed with rotating the motor with different speed. Select this
option when it is possible to decouple the load from motor. In this mode, motor rotate up to base
speed or higher depends on maximum frequency.
=5: Reserved for future use.

B202 & B203: Primary Resistance R1 (mΩ)

The motor circuit constant is set. This value is decided by mantissa section B202 and exponent
section B203 as below. R1 = Value of B202 x (10^ value of B203) [mΩ].
For example, if B202= 0.200 and B203= 2, the value of R1= 0.200 x 10^2 = 0.200 x 100 = 20 mΩ

B204 & B205: Secondary Resistance R2’ (mΩ)

This is the secondary resistance (rotor resistance) of induction motor.

B206 & B207: Leakage Inductance L (mH)

This is the value of leakage inductance of the induction motor. 6
B208 & B209: Excitation Inductance M’ (mH)
This is the value of excitation inductance of the induction motor.

B210 & B211: Iron Loss resistance Rm (mΩ)

These parameters (B202 ~ B211) are related to motor’s internal distributed parameters. They are
useful for auto torque boost application (B202 ~ B203). During auto tuning mode these parameters
are automatically calculated.

GROUP – 3: PROTECTION PARAMETERS

B301: Stall Current Limit (%)

When the AC DRIVE output current crosses the stall current limit, the output ramps down with Current
limit deceleration time A209. This is effective only when the AC DRIVE is operating at set speed. This
feature is not active while the AC DRIVE is accelerating or decelerating. When the current decreases
below the programmed value, the AC DRIVE again starts accelerating to the set speed with Current
limit acceleration time A208. This feature helps in maintaining relatively constant output torque
characteristics.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-63
 I
Stall current
limit (B301)

t
F
M105

Output freq.
Current limit decel
(M101) Current limit accel
time (A209)
time (A208)
t
Vdc
740Vdc

DC bus voltage
control (B307=1)
t
Set the current limit as a percentage of motor rated current.
When local is selected in A309: Stall Current Limit Selection, B301 will be effective. When terminal is
selected, stall current limit is set by the 0-10V analog signal at VIN. Its range is from 0 to 200%
according to 0-10V at VIN.

6
B302: Adjustable Over Current Level (%)
Set the upper current limit as a percentage of motor rated current. Whenever the AC DRIVE output
current exceeds the set value, the AC DRIVE trips indicating Adjustable over current fault. Always set
higher side to prevent the unnecessary tripping of the AC DRIVE during normal operation. This gives
the user to program the current level below the standard inverse time curve. This may be used in
cases where excessive torque shocks can lead to a harmful effect on the machinery.
Set to 300% to disable this function. The standard inverse time trip remains in effect.

B303: Acceleration Current Limit (%)

This is acceleration current limit and effective only during normal acceleration. It stops the
acceleration during acceleration, if the motor current exceeds the programmed value. When the
I
Accel current
limit (B303)

t
F

M105

Output freq.
(M101)

t
current reduces below the programmed value, the AC DRIVE again starts accelerating to the set
speed. This feature helps in preventing over current tripping of high inertia load during fast
acceleration.

B304: Under Current Level (%)

This feature trips the AC DRIVE when the current falls below the programmed value for more than
1sec after the speed reaches its set speed. This feature is not active while the AC DRIVE is
accelerating or decelerating. Making this 0 will disable this.

Amtech

6-64
Note: In pump applications, if the flow decreases below a minimum speed there will be cavitations. This feature
becomes useful to turn off the pump in such case.

B305: Overload Setting (%)

This is reference for the inverse time overload characteristics. Changing this parameter can change
the inverse time overload characteristics in cold and hot start, adjusted as per the heat sink
temperature. The cold start means the heat sink temperature is less than 50 degree C.
The setting uses motor rated current as 100%.

Over load for hot start is 150% for 60 seconds inverse time characteristics. Note that if 155% of the
rated current is exceeded, a trip will occur at the 160% for 10 seconds and at 170% for 4 seconds.

Overload curves for cold start is adjusted as per the heat sink temperature. In case of ND, in cold start
120% overload will be available for 90 seconds instead of 60 seconds. In case of HD, in cold start
150% overload will be available for 90 seconds instead of 60 seconds.

B306: Earth (Ground) Fault Detection Level (%)

This parameter sets the earth (ground) fault detection level. When the vector sum of all the 3-phase
current is more than the set limit, the unit will trip in earth (ground) fault. Set to zero to disable the
earth (ground) fault protection.

Note: The internal earth (ground) fault protection function is to protect the unit against earth (ground) faults in the 6
motor and the motor cable. This is not a personal safety or a fire protection feature. The earth (ground) fault
protective function can be disabled setting B306 to zero.

B307: DC Bus voltage Control

When enabled, it will prevent the over voltage during RUN condition. Refer below figure for the
functioning of dc bus voltage control. The deceleration will cease, if dc bus voltage is >740V. It will
resume only after the dc bus voltage reduces to 710V (30V hysteresis). In this case actual
deceleration time will be more than the programmed deceleration time. The dc bus regulation level for
500V series is 875Vdc and 1050Vdc for 600V series. Use B317 gain parameter to increase DC bus
voltage control response.
Vdc
B307= 2 or 3
740Vdc

30V hysteresis

t
F

M105

Output freq.
(M101)

B308: Reverse Direction Lock

Set this to prevent unintentional reverse direction operation. When enabled it will prevent the unit to
start in reverse direction. This parameter cannot be changed during running condition.

Note: If reverse direction is locked and run command is given with reverse direction selection, the unit will not
start in reverse direction.

B309: Change Password

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-65
 This parameter is used to change the 4-digit user password for parameter locking.

B310: Parameter Lock

This is user programmable 4-digit password to prevent unintentional parameter change from the
digital operation panel. When programmed, it will not allow the user to change any parameter from
digital operation panel or serial link except Local Set Frequency A101 (or D201), Local Torque
Reference A107, PID Reference Setting C611 and terminal functions. The unit will be shipped
without any password protection. To lock the parameters, first enter your selected 4-digit password
in B309 (Change Password) and then enter any value other than your selected password to B310
(Parameter Lock). The parameters will be locked and cannot be changed (except the set frequency).
Now, to open the lock, enter the selected password to B310 (Parameter Lock). If you have entered
correct password, you will have the access of all parameters. Now you can change the parameters,
even the password. To lock the parameters again follow the same thing.

When someone tries to enter parameter in lock condition, below massage is displayed.
: : P a r a m e t e r s : :
: : L o c k e d : :
: : E n t e r P a s s w o r d : :
P r e s s E n t e r t o E x i t
6 Note: Up to control version 7.09C B309= Parameter Lock, B310 = Change Password, above 7.09C B309 =
Change Password, B310= Parameter Lock

B311: Default value Load

Custom Parameter Save

When set to 111, current parameters will be saved to the non-volatile memory for the future use. This
feature is extremely useful for the custom default.

Custom Parameter Default

When set to 222, all the parameters will be set to custom saved parameters saved using 111.

Default Load as per US standard

When set to 333, default value will be loaded as per the US standard in all the parameters. However,
this will not change the factory setting parameters, user password, C211 to C218 and B202 to B211.
Following parameters will be different than the general default.
A101, A103, B104, D103, D201, D203 = 60.00Hz
B101, B102, D101 = 460V
B105, D104 = 1800rpm

General Default Load

When set to 444, default value will be loaded in all the parameters. However, this will not change the
factory setting parameters, user password, C211 to C218 and B202 to B211.

Fault History Clear

When set to 555, the fault history buffer is cleared. No previous fault code and parameter will be
available.

Full Default Load

Amtech

6-66
When set to 666, all the parameters will be set to default condition including C205 to C218 and B202
to B211. However, this will not change the factory setting parameters and user password.

Full Default Load

When set to 777, all the PLC parameters will be set to default.

Note that the value entered in B311 will not be memorized. If correct value is entered, appropriate
action will be taken and “00” will be displayed. If incorrect value is entered, no action will be taken and
“00” will be displayed.
B312: 0Hz Overload Setting (%)

B313: 0.7*BF Overload Setting (%)

For the self-cooling type motor, when operating at low speed, set these parameters to meet the motor
characteristics.
B312 is valid from 0.10Hz to 1.00Hz.
B313 is valid from >1.00Hz to 0.7*Base Frequency
B305 is valid from >0.7*Base Frequency

Note that B312<=B313<=B305

B314: Output Current Unbalance Level (%) 6

Set the unbalance current level for the output. When the current unbalance exceeds the set level, the
unit will trip. Set to 0% to disable the function.

B315: Copy Parameter Set

This parameter is used for the copy all parameters to the Display EEPROM from control side, Display
used as Pen Drive. User can copy 5 sets of all parameters
=0: Enter Copy Set =4: Copy Set 4
=1: Copy Set 1 =5: Copy Set 5
=2: Copy Set 2
=3: Copy Set 3

B316: Paste Parameter Set

This parameter is used for the paste all parameters to the control side from Display EEPROM, Display
used as Pen Drive. User can paste 5 sets of all parameters. The following options are
=0: Enter Paste Set =4: Paste Set 4
=1: Paste Set 1 =5: Paste Set 5
=2: Paste Set 2
=3: Paste Set 3
When control version is not matching during paste operation, below screen will display.
: : C o n t r o l : :
: : V e r s i o n N o t : :
: : C o m p a t i b l e : :
P r e s s E n t e r t o E x i t

B317: DC Bus Voltage Control Gain

This parameter sets the gain setting during DC bus voltage control function (B307 = 2: Frequency
Increase). By increasing this parameter value, DC bus voltage control response rate increased.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-67
 B318: KEB Selection
This parameter will select the KEB function.
0:Disable 1:Enable
B319: KEB Threshold Level
This parameter will select the KEB function.

B320: KEB Kp
This parameter is used to set the proportional gain of KEB PID controller.

B321: KEB Ti
This parameter is used to set the integral time constant of KEB PID controller.

B322: KEB Td
This parameter is used to set the derivative time constant of KEB PID controller.

Example: 400 Volt series drive

VDC level = 415 VAC * 1.35 = 560 VDC

Presetting KEB Threshold level (B319) = 80%
KEB ON level = VDC level * B319 * 0.01 = 560 * 80 * 0.01 = 448 VDC
KEB OFF level = VDC level * (B319 +5) * 0.01 = 560 * 85 * 0.01 = 476 VDC

B323: Voltage Reduction Time

This setting value is the time to reduce the output voltage from the V/f setting value to 0V after the
output frequency reaches the set frequency. Normally, the default value (10.0) is set. When using for
loads with sudden torque fluctuations, and the output frequency drops remarkably with the stall
current limit function, set an appropriately low value. If the rotation becomes unstable during the
voltage reduction or recovery operations causing a trip, set an appropriately high value.

B324: Voltage Lower Limit Setting Value

Set a value between 50 and 99 while the inverter is stopped to select the high-efficiency operation
function. When not using the high-efficiency operation function, set 100 while the inverter is stopped.
This setting value is the lower limit of the output voltage reduced when the high-efficiency operation
function is selected, and uses the V/f setting voltage (output voltage when not using high-efficiency
Amtech

6-68
operation) as the reference. When using for loads with sudden torque fluctuations, and the output
frequency drops remarkably with the stall current limit function, set an appropriately high value.

Note) Slipping will increase during high-efficiency operation, so it is recommended to execute

automatic tuning before operation and set the manual torque boost selection to valid (A501).

Normally for the V/f constant operation, the no-load loss is large with a light load, and the motor
efficiency drops remarkably. Thus, according to the load, the output voltage is reduced using the B324
setting value as the lower limit in respect to the voltage set with V/f, and the motor efficiency is
improved.

GROUP – 4: PRESET SPEED

B401 ~ B407: Preset Speed 1 ~ 7 (Hz)

This is frequency setting for different preset speeds. The drive supports eight different speeds that
can be set by three programmable sequence input using parameters C101 ~ C106 and C114 ~ C115.
The following preset speed can be selected with the sequence input commands Preset i/p-0, Preset
i/p-1 and Preset i/p-2. Set desire frequencies in B401 ~ B407. When no sequence input is present,
the set frequency will be decided by the Frequency reference input A106.

Preset i/p-2 Preset i/p-1 Preset i/p-0 Speed Selected

OFF OFF OFF Normal Speed Reference (A106)
OFF OFF ON Preset Speed 1 (B401)
OFF ON OFF Preset Speed 2 (B402)
OFF ON ON Preset Speed 3 (B403)
ON OFF OFF Preset Speed 4 (B404)
ON OFF ON Preset Speed 5 (B405)
ON ON OFF Preset Speed 6 (B406)
ON ON ON Preset Speed 7 (B407)

The Start Control A301 determines the direction of rotation. If Local (Digital Operation Panel) is
selected as start control, the direction can be change only through parameter A305. When Terminal is
selected as start control, the status of sequence input terminal would decide the direction.
The preset speed can be set higher than max frequency A103 up to 600Hz. However, the output
frequency will not exceed the maximum frequency A103.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-69
 GROUP – 5: SKIP FREQUENCY

B501: Skip Frequency 1 (Hz)

B502: Skip Frequency 2 (Hz)

B503: Skip Frequency 3 (Hz)

B504: Skip Band (Hz)

If the equipment being driven has problems due to mechanical resonance at some frequencies, the
same can be jumped over by programming them in parameters B501 ~ B503. The AC DRIVE output
settles for top or the bottom of the skip band, the one being closest to the desired speed. This is only
applicable during normal operation of the AC DRIVE. During acceleration or deceleration this
parameter will not function.

Operation
frequency
6
B503

B502

B501 B504

Set frequency

GROUP – 6: VECTOR CONTROL CONSTANTS-1

B601: Speed Loop Time (mS)

It is a time at which the speed control loop will execute. This parameter is used to adjust the speed
control loop bandwidth. Default value is changed for vector control open or close loop mode.

B602: ASR P-Action Control (%)

If the speed setting value or motor speed changes suddenly, this will prevent sudden change in the
output of proportional control of ASR.

Amtech

6-70
B603: ASR Dead Band (%)
This represents non-sensitive range of ASR’s input. If the speed error is less than this value than it will
be considered as zero error. This is in percentage of maximum frequency.
Error

Final Error

Dead Band

B604: Speed LPF Time Constant 1 & B622: Speed LPF Time Constant 2 (mS)
It is time constant of low pass filter for speed feedback to the ASR. These parameters are applicable
for sensor less vector control only.

Filter's input

100 %
Time B622
Speed LPF
6
Constant
Tc 2
63 %
Filter's output

B604
Speed LPF
Tc 1

t B620 B621 Output

ASR Freq 1 ASR Freq 2 Frequency
Time Constant

B605: ASR Kp 1 & B616: ASR Kp 2

It is proportional gain for ASR. If we ignore the Integral action than at any time the ASR’s output will
be Kp times the error at that time. To increase the speed response, set a large value. Note that if the
value is too high the actual speed will hunt.

B606: ASR Ti 1 & B617: ASR Ti 2 (Sec)

It is Integral time constant for ASR. If Kp=1 and Error=100% than ASR’s output will be 100% within
this time. The Integral constant Ki is given by,
Ki = Kp/Ti
To increase the speed response, set a small value. Note that if the value is too low then the actual
speed will hunt.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-71
 B607: ASR Drive Torque Limit (%)
In motoring mode, it will limit the quadrature current component (torque current) for vector control.

B608: ASR Regenerative Torque Limit 1 (%)

B624: ASR Regenerative Torque Limit 2 (%)
B625: ASR Regenerative Torque Limit 3 (%)
6 In regenerative mode, it will limit the quadrature current component (torque current).

B609: Speed Estimation Kp 1 & B618: Speed Estimation Kp 2

This is a proportional gain for the adaptive speed estimation. To increase the speed estimation
response, set large value. Note that if the value is too high the speed estimation value will hunt. These
parameters are applicable for sensor less vector control only.

B610: Speed Estimation Ti 1 & B619: Speed Estimation Ti 2 (Sec)

This is an Integral time constant for the adaptive speed estimation. To increase the speed estimation
response, set low value. Note that if the value is too low the speed estimation value will hunt. These
parameters are applicable for sensor less vector control only.

Amtech

6-72
 Speed Est. B618/ B619
Kp/ Ti Speed Est. Kp 2/ Ti2

B609/ B610
Speed Est. Kp1/ Ti1

B620 B621 Output

ASR Freq 1 ASR Freq 2 Frequency

B611: Over Speed Protection Level (%)

This is the over speed protection level. When the detection speed is equal to or higher than the set
level for 1000msec, the unit will trip in over speed fault. Set as a percentage of maximum frequency.

B612: Speed Deviation Level (%)

This is the speed deviation level. A speed deviation error occurs when the speed command and
speed detection difference is higher than the set level (B612) for B626 time. Set as a percentage of 6
maximum frequency.

B613: Machine Time Constant (mS)

The time to accelerate the motor and load’s torque inertia to the base speed at the rated torque is set.

B614: Acceleration Machine Bias (%)

This adds fixed bias in speed PID output during acceleration.

B615: Deceleration Machine Bias (%)

This adds fixed bias in speed PID output during deceleration.

B620: ASR Gain Change Frequency 1 (Hz)

Gain change frequency for low speed.
B621: ASR Gain Change Frequency 2 (Hz)
Gain change frequency for high speed.

B623: Encoder Low Pass Filter Time Constant (ms)

The speed detection noise is cut at the set time constant. These parameters are applicable for close
loop V/F and close loop vector control.

B626: Speed Deviation Fault Judgment Time (Sec)

A speed deviation fault occurs when the speed command and speed detection difference is the same
or higher than the speed deviation level (B612), and this situation continues for longer than the speed
deviation fault judgment time (B626).

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-73
 B627: Field Weakening Gain
This is gain for field weakening. If hunting occurred in speed in field weakening region, decrease gain.

GROUP – 7: VECTOR CONTROL CONSTANTS-2

B701: Torque Mode Selection

When this mode is active, the prime parameter to be control is Torque instead of Speed. This mode is
applicable for vector control mode only.

B702: Excitation Current Reference (%)

It is excitation current reference. It is almost equal to no load motor current.

B703: Torque LPF Time constant (mS)

It is time constant of the filter for the torque current feedback to the ACR.

B704: ACR Kp
It is proportional constant for ACR. If we ignore the Integral action than at any time the ACR’s output
will be Kp times the error at that time. To increase the current response, set large value. Note that if
the value is too low or too high then the current will hunt.
6
B705: ACR Ti (mS)
It is Integral time for ACR. If Kp=1 and Error =100%, ACR output will be 100% within this time. The
Integral constant Ki is given by,
Ki = Kp/Ti
To increase the speed response, set small value. Note that if the value is too low or too high then the
current will hunt.

B706: ACR Q Upper Limit (%)

This is the ACR Q-Controller output upper limit.

B707: ACR Q Lower Limit (%)

This is the ACR Q-Controller output lower limit.

B708: ACR D Upper Limit (%)

This is the ACR D-Controller output upper limit.

B709: ACR D Lower Limit (%)

This is the ACR D-controller output lower limit.

B710: Torque Reference Polarity (%)

This is used to select Torque reference polarity
=0: Unipolar =1: Bipolar

B711: Voltage Saturation Compensation Selection

=0: Disable =1: Enable

If the output voltage in control is larger than the voltage that can be output by the inverter, select this
control to limit the exciting current to prevent the current or torque from hunting.
Amtech

6-74
Select this when raising the output voltage to near the input voltage, or when the input voltage
changes.

B712: ACR Feed Forward Selection

=0: Disable =1: Enable

The voltage fluctuation caused by the leakage inductance is feed forward controlled. The current
regulator (ACR) response speed will be increased.

GROUP – 8: M FLUCTUATION COMPENSATION TABLE

B801 ~ B808: Table Reference Speed 1 ~ 8

This is the reference speed for changing the compensation amount according to the operation speed.
These parameters value will automatically set with Maximum Frequency. Default value as per
50/60Hz.

B809 ~ B816: Lm Fluctuation Compensation Coefficient 1 ~ 8

This compensates the exciting inductance fluctuation according to the B801 ~ B808 reference speed.
Set the compensation table so that the output voltage is constant during no-load operation through the
entire operation range. This is adjusted with the automatic tuning selection (B201) mode 4 (Extended
rotational) is executed. 6

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-75
 MODE – C

GROUP – 1: PROGRAMMABLE INPUT / OUTPUT SELECTION

C101 ~ C106: PSI-1 ~ 6

C114 ~ C115: PSI-RUN~STOP

User can configure eight programmable sequence inputs for different functions using parameters
C101 ~ C106 and C114 ~ C115. The status of the Programmable Sequence Input can be monitored
in M307. The various options are explained as under.

OPTION FUNCTION NAME FUNCTION

1 Not Used Indicates that no function is selected on the PSI.
2 Jog Select This is a jog command. If this signal is ON while RUN is OFF,
operation then conforms to the setting of jogging speed. For stoppage,
either ramp down stop or coast to stop is available.
3 Ramp select Acceleration / Deceleration ramp performance is switched over.
Acceleration / Deceleration Time-2 is available with ON, and
Acceleration / Deceleration Time-1 is available with OFF.
6 4 Preset i/p-0 The Preset Speed 0~7 are selected as per the binary combination of
the Preset i/p-0 ~ 2.
5 Preset i/p-1
6 Preset i/p-2
7 Freq Increase The currently selected frequency setting is increased or decreased.
When the ON state continues, the frequency is incremented
8 Freq Decrease /decremented with 0.1Hz at every 100msec. This is valid only if static
potentiometer is selected as frequency reference source in A106
9 Aux Drive The auxiliary drive setting is validated with this signal. This operation
is valid during the AC Drive stopping.
10 Emergency stop – This is used as emergency stop. This is Normally Open type. When
NO the digital input (connected to COM in case of sink logic or to +24V in
case of source logic) is Close, Emergency stop occurs as per the
selection in C503.
11 Fault Reset This is used for the fault reset. If RUN input is present at the time of
fault reset, the AC Drive will not start after fault reset. Issue fresh RUN
command to start the AC Drive after fault reset.
12 Ext Fault - NO This is used for the external fault function. This is Normally Open type.
When the digital input (connected to COM in case of sink logic and to
+24V in case of source logic) is Close, external fault occurs.
13 Reverse This input is used to select reverse direction of rotation in terminal
mode. Note that this will not function when RSF and PR function
are selected in E101.
14 Terminal When this input is selected, the operation control will be switched over
to terminal.
15 Ref Select 0 These two inputs are Ref Select 1 Ref Select 0 Freq reference
used to select the 0 0 A106
frequency reference
16 Ref Select 1 as shown in the side 0 1 A110
table. 1 0 A111
1 1 A112
17 PR Step Skip When this input is selected, it will skip the present step during Pattern
Run operation. Only applicable to Pattern Run function.

Amtech

6-76
 18 PR Step Hold When this input is selected, it will hold the present step during Pattern
Run operation. Only applicable to Pattern Run function.
19 PR/RSF Reset When this input is selected, it will reset the present Pattern Run
operation or Ring Spinning Frame Operation. Only applicable to
Pattern Run & Ring Spinning Frame functions.
20 PID Bypass This is used to bypass the PID controller. When this input is selected,
the PID Reference input will be PID Output and there will not be any
effect of PID controller.
21 PID Disable This is used to disable the PID controller. When this input is selected,
the PID Output will remain to the last value and there will not be any
effect of PID Reference or PID Feedback on the PID Output.
22 Emergency stop – This is used as emergency stop. This is Normally Close type. When
NC the digital input (connected to COM in case of sink logic or to +24V in
case of source logic) is open, Emergency stop occurs as per the
selection in C503.
23 Ext. Fault - NC This is used for the external fault function. This is Normally Close type.
When the digital input (connected to COM in case of sink logic and to
+24V in case of source logic) is open, external fault occurs.
24 Run This is used to give RUN command from terminal.
25 Stop This is used to give STOP command from terminal.
26 Drive Enable - NO This is used for the “Enable” function. It allows drive output when RUN
command is given. When “Enable” is not active, output will not come 6
even though RUN command is present. This is Normally open type.
When link (connected to COM in case of sink logic and to +24V in
case of source logic) is closed, “Enable” function activates.
27 Drive Enable - NC This is used for the “Enable” function. It allows drive output when RUN
command is given. When “Enable” is not active, output will not come
even though RUN command is present. This is Normally Closed type.
When link (connected to COM in case of sink logic and to +24V in
case of source logic) is open, “Enable” function activates.
28 PLC input 1 Option 28 ~ 35 are PLC input are use to read PSI status from Inverter
29 PLC input 2 to In-built PLC.
30 PLC input 3
31 PLC input 4
32 PLC input 5
33 PLC input 6
34 PLC input 7
35 PLC input 8
36 Torque Mode When this input is selected the unit will work in torque mode. This is
applicable only in vector control mode.
37 Ready1 Feedback This input is feedback of Ready1 PSO to check whether Ready1 PSO
is ON or OFF. If this input is not selected then Ready1 PSO will not
work. If this input is selected and feedback is not given then Ready1
PSO is continues ON and OFF at every 3 sec.
38 Forward Run This is used to give Forward RUN command from terminal. No need to
set extra direction PSI. (Note: If option 24:RUN or 13:Reverse is
selected in any PSI, then 38:Forward Run PSI is not selected and vice
versa).
39 Reverse Run This is used to give Reverse RUN command from terminal. No need
to set extra direction PSI. (Note: If option 24:RUN or 13:Reverse is
selected in any PSI, then 39:Reverse Run PSI is not selected and vice
versa).

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-77
 40 Forward Jog This is a forward jog command. No need to set extra direction PSI.
(Note: If option 2:JOG or 13:Reverse is selected in any PSI, then
40:Forward Jog PSI is not selected and vice versa).
41 Reverse Jog This is a Reverse jog command. No need to set extra direction PSI.
(Note: If option 2:JOG or 13:Reverse is selected in any PSI, then
41:Reverse Jog PSI is not selected and vice versa).
42 MBRK Answer This is a feedback signal from external brake in response to the
external brake command.

The default selection is as under.

TERMINAL OPTION NAME
PSI1 2 Jog Select
PSI2 10 Emergency stop
PSI3 11 Fault Reset
PSI4 4 Preset i/p-0
PSI5 5 Preset i/p-1
PSI6 6 Preset i/p-2
RUN 24 RUN
STOP 25 STOP
6
C107 ~ C110: PSO-1 ~ 4
User can configure four programmable sequence outputs for different functions using parameters
C107 ~ C110. The status of the Programmable Sequence Output can be monitored in M308. The
various options are explained as under.

OPTION NAME FUNCTION

1 Not Used No function is selected.
2 Run This turns ON during running, jogging or DC braking.
3 Local This turns ON when the operation mode is local (operation from the
digital operation panel is selected).
4 Reverse Run This turns ON when the motor is reverse running.
5 I-Detection This turns ON when the output current reaches the programmed I-
Detection Level C302 or higher.
6 Freq Attain This turns ON when the output frequency (speed) reaches the set
frequency (speed). The detection reach width is set with frequency
attainment detection width C301.
7 Speed Detect1 This turns ON when the output frequency (speed) value reaches a speed
higher than the speed set with the detection level –1.
8 Speed Detect2 This turns ON when the motor speed reaches a speed higher than that
set in the detection level-2.
9 Acceleration This turns ON during acceleration.
10 Deceleration This turns ON during deceleration.
11 Aux Drive This turns ON when the auxiliary drive parameter setting is validated by
the sequence input AUXDV.
12 Timer Output This turns ON during running, jogging, pre-excitation and DC braking. A
programmable off delay (C309) is provided, so even if the above
operations turn OFF, this control will not turn OFF for programmed time.
This is used for external fan/ motor control.
13 Zero Speed This turns ON when the output frequency (speed) value is below the
level set with zero speed level.
Amtech

6-78
 14 Fault Alarm This output is ON when minor fault alarm is detected.
15 PID Up Limit The output will be activated when the PID output reaches to the
programmed upper limit value.
16 PID Lo Limit The output will be activated when the PID output reaches to the
programmed lower limit value.
17 Temp Alarm The output is ON when the heat sink temperature exceeds the set
Temperature Alarm Level in C311
18 Ready The output is ON when the unit is ready to start. The soft charge
contactor is energized and no fault condition persists.
19 Pump-1 This is applicable to Multi-pump function only. The output turns ON,
20 Pump-2 when the respective pump is ON.
21 Pump-3
22 Pump-4
23 Doff-End Alarm This turns ON only at the point going back the set time (E105) from the
moment auto stop occurs after completion of the final step when
performing spinning frame operation.
24 Sleep Mode This turns ON when the unit is in sleep mode.
25 Fault The output is ON when fault occurs.
26 PLC Output 1 Option 26~32 are use to write PSO status from In-built PLC to Inverter.
27 PLC Output 2 This is explained in In-built PLC Function explanation.
6
28 PLC Output 3
29 PLC Output 4
30 PLC Output 5
31 PLC Output 6
32 PLC Output 7
33 PID F/B ULmt The output will be activated when the PID feedback reaches to the
programmed upper limit value.
34 PID F/B LLmt The output will be activated when the PID feedback reaches to the
programmed lower limit value.
35 FAN Control The output is ON when the heat sink temperature exceeds the set
temperature level in C315.
The output is OFF when the heatsink temperature goes below the set
level in C315 minus the set hysteresis level in C316.
Once the output is ON then remains ON for 10 minute even if the above
condition is satisfied or not.
36 Ready1 This option is for common dc application. Ready1 will be on 3 seconds
after soft charge operation. This will make sure that the capacitors are
charged to the fullest level. The PSI37: Ready1 feedback will be required
in this case. It will turn off and turn on the Ready1 PSO at every 3
seconds, If the feedback is not available.
37 MBRK Outputs an external brake command.
38 KEB ON The output will be on when the KEB function is activated.
39 STO Feedback The output will be on when STO function is activated (Hard link is not
connected if this function is selected in any PSI).
40 Panel Temp This output will be on if the panel inside temperature > C324 - 5. Output
Alarm will be off if panel inside temperature < C324 – 7.

The default setting of the programmable sequence outputs are as under.

TERMINAL OPTION NAME

PSO1 2 Run

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-79
 PSO2 6 Freq Attain
PSO3 1 Not Used
PSO4 1 Not Used

C111 ~ C112: Programmable Relay-1 ~ 2

C113: Programmable Fault Relay

User can configure two programmable relays for different functions using these parameters. The
status of the Programmable Relay can be monitored in M308. The options are same as PSO.
The default settings are as under.

RELAY OPTION NAME

Programmable Relay-1 2 Run
Programmable Relay-2 1 Not Used
Programmable Fault Relay 25 Fault

GROUP – 2: ANALOG OUTPUT SELECTION

6 C201 ~ C202: Vout-1 ~ 2

User can configure two programmable analog outputs (0~10V) for different functions using
parameters C201 ~ C202.

OPTION NAME FUNCTION

1 Output Freq The analog output will correspond to the output frequency (0~A103).
2 O/P Current The analog output will correspond to the output current (0~200%).
3 Output Power The analog output will correspond to the output power (0~B106).
4 Output Volt The analog output will correspond to the output voltage (0~100%).
5 DC Bus Volt The analog output will correspond to the dc bus voltage (0~800).
6 PID Output The analog output will correspond to the PID Output (0~100%)
7 Heat sink Temp. The analog output will correspond to the heat sink temp. (0~100 °C)
8 PLC A-O/P 1 The analog output will correspond to the PLC A-O/P 1 (0~1000d).
9 PLC A-O/P 2 The analog output will correspond to the PLC A-O/P 2 (0~1000d).
10 PLC A-O/P 3 The analog output will correspond to the PLC A-O/P 3 (0~1000d).
11 PLC A-O/P 4 The analog output will correspond to the PLC A-O/P 4 (0~1000d).
12 Unipolar Torque The analog output will correspond to the torque current (0~200%).
Current
13 Excitation The analog output will correspond to the excitation current (0~200%).
Current
14 Set Frequency The analog output will correspond to the Set frequency (M105).
15 Bipolar Torque The analog output will correspond to the torque current (-200~200%).
Current

The default setting of the programmable analog outputs are as under.

TERMINAL OPTION NAME

VO1 1 Output Freq
VO2 2 O/P Current

Amtech

6-80
C203 ~ C204: Iout-1 ~ 2
User can configure two programmable analog outputs (4~20mA) for different functions using these
parameters. The options are same as above.

The default setting of the programmable sequence outputs are as under.

TERMINAL OPTION NAME

IO1 3 Output Power
IO2 4 Output Volt

C205: Vout-1 Gain

This is gain setting for the VO1 analog output.

C206: Vout-2 Gain

This is gain setting for the VO2 analog output.

C207: Iout-1 Gain

This is gain setting for the IO1 analog output. 6
C208: Iout-1 Bias
This is bias setting for the IO1 analog output.

C209: Iout-2 Gain

This is gain setting for the IO2 analog output.

C210: Iout-2 Bias

This is bias setting for the IO2 analog output.

C211: FSV Gain

This is gain setting for the FSV analog input.

C212: FSV Bias

This is bias setting for the FSV analog input.

C213: FSI Gain

This is gain setting for the FSI analog input.

C214: FSI Bias

This is bias setting for the FSI analog input.
C215: VIN Gain
This is gain setting for the VIN analog input.

C216: VIN Bias

This is bias setting for the VIN analog input.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-81
 C217: IIN Gain
This is gain setting for the IIN analog input.

C218: IIN Bias

This is bias setting for the IIN analog input.

C219: FSV / FSI Time Constant (mS)

This parameter sets the filter time constant for the FSV and FSI analog inputs.

C220: VIN / IIN Time Constant (mS)

This parameter sets the filter time constant for the VIN and IIN analog inputs.

C221: Vout-1 bias

This parameter is bias setting for the analog output voltage vo1.

C222: Vout-2 Bias

This parameter is bias setting for the analog output voltage vo2.
6
C223: Input Voltage Gain
This parameter sets the gain setting for VRY (M201) and VYB (M202) monitor.

GROUP – 3: STATUS OUTPUT DETECTION LEVEL

C301: Frequency Attainment detection Width (%)

The frequency output attained operation width is set using this parameter as % of maximum
frequency A103. If Freq Attain option is selected for the PSO and relay outputs in parameter C106 ~
C111, the output is enabled when the output frequency attains the set frequency. The width of the
attainment detection is decided by the programmed value in C301 as explained in below figure. The
output remains high even if drive recent frequency deviates above or below set frequency by
Attainment width. Set with a percentage to the maximum frequency A103.
F

M105

C301

Freq Attain

C302: I-Detection (current detection) Level (%)

Amtech

6-82
The I-Detection (current detection) level is set. Set with a percentage of the rated current (B103). A
hysteresis (Set in C314) will occur with the I-Detection operation, which means the output will be off
only when the output current drops below the Current detection level by the % value in C314. The
state of the I-Detection programmable sequence output is shown in the below figure.

Iout
C314

C302

I-Detection

6
C303: Speed Detection Level – 1 (%)

C304: Speed Detection Level – 2 (%)

The speed detection operation level is set. Set with a percentage to the maximum frequency A103.
The output frequency or the motor speed will be the comparison target. When the output frequency
reaches the set level, the output will be ON. When the frequency reduces below the 1% hysteresis
level, the output will be OFF.
F

1%

C304

C303

Speed
Detect1

Speed
Detect2

C305: Zero Speed Detection Level (%)

The Zero speed detection operation level is set. Set with a percentage to the maximum frequency
A103. The output frequency or the motor speed will be the comparison target. A 1% hysteresis will
occur with zero speed operation. The status of Zero Speed programmable sequence output is as
under.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-83
 F

C305

1%
t

Zero Speed

C306: 4-20mA Reference Loss

This parameter configures the AC DRIVE’s response to a failure or fault of the 4-20mA frequency
reference input signal. The various options are as under.
1: No action at fault detection
2: Minor fault alarm and run at Minimum Speed
6 3: Minor fault alarm and run at Maximum Speed
4: Minor fault alarm and run at set speed
5: Minor fault alarm and run at preset speed-1
6: Fault, ramp down to stop
7: Fault, coast to stop

C307: Output Phase Loss Selection

When enabled, AC DRIVE will trip in the following condition. If the output current of any one phase is
<5% and the other two-phase current is >70% (factory set) of motor rated current for five cycles. This
fault will not occur during speed search operation. It can be disabled using C307. Note that this fault
will not occur if the output terminals are open circuit.

C308: Timer Output Control Selection

This parameter decides the status of the Timer Output option of the programmable sequence output.
When set to “0”, the programmable sequence output will be ON only when AC DRIVE is ON. When
set to “1”, it will be ON whenever power is applied.
F

M105

t
C309

Run

Timer Output

Amtech

6-84
C309: Timer Output Off Delay Time (Sec)
This parameter is applicable if timer output control selection is “0”. This is the delay time in turning off
the programmable sequence output after the AC DRIVE is off. Set the time in seconds.

C310: Temperature Control selection

This parameter controls the automatic change of the carrier frequency in case of temperature rise
above 85°C level. When enabled, the carrier frequency will be automatically reduced to control the
heat sink temperature. Once the frequency is reduced, it will only be increased if the heat sink
temperature reduces below 70°C.

o
C311: Temperature Alarm Level ( C)
This is temperature alarm level set point. Whenever the heat sink temperature exceeds the set value,
the Temp Alarm output will be set. Hysteresis of 2°C hysteresis will occur with temperature alarm.

Temp

2°C

C311

6
M208

Temp Alarm

C312: In- built PLC Selection /

: Input Phase Check

For Control version 7.02 and onwards, this parameter is used to enable the In-built PLC function.
 For Control version 3.17 and onwards, this parameter is used to enable or disable the Input phase
check function.

C313: Static Pot Options

This parameter provides selection of the static pot speed at power up to the user.
The following options are
=1: Last speed
=2: Min frequency (A102)
=3: Max frequency (A103)
=4: A101 Set frequency
=5: B401 Preset speed-1

C314: I-Detection Hysteresis Level

This parameter sets the hysteresis level for I-Detection operation

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-85
 C315: Fan ON Temperature Level
Set the temperature level to activate the PSO for FAN control.

C316: Fan OFF Hysteresis Level

Set the hysteresis level to de-activate the PSO for FAN control.

C317: External Brake Selection

C318: Brake Release Wait Time

C319: Acceleration Start Wait Time

C320: Brake Engage Wait Time

C321: Run Error Judgment Time At Engaging Brake

6
C322: Brake Answer Error Judgment Time
Parameters C317 ~ C322 used for external brake application.
Select the external brake function using B317.

All types of waiting time

Set the waiting time when using external brake control.
1. Use C318 (Brake Release Wait Time) to set the waiting time from RUN until the brake is
released.
2. Use C319 (Acceleration Start Wait Time) to set the waiting time from the point the brake is
released until acceleration is commenced. When there is a brake answer (C322, Brake Answer
≠
Error Judgment Time 0.0 sec), set the waiting time from after the brake answer, and if there is
no brake answer (C322, Brake Answer Error Judgment Time = 0), set the waiting time from the
point the brake release command is issued. In the case of the normal operation mode setting,
changes are not made to the settings during C318 wait time, and the settings prior to C318 wait
time are used.
3. Use B320 (Brake Engage Wait Time) to set the waiting time from the point zero speed detection
point turns ON until the brake is engaged.

Error determination
The following error determination can be made in cases of External Brake Selection is Enable.
1. RUN error determination when engaging brake.
In the case where RUN does not turn OFF in the time set at C321 (Run Error Judgment Time At
Engaging Brake) from the time the brake is engaged, a breakdown stop occurs at the end
controller due to an external brake RUN error (Ext Brake RUN Error fault). Set to 0.0 sec to turn
the RUN error determination OFF.
2. Brake answer error determination
In the case where (MBRK) brake command and (MBRK_ans) brake answer do not match above
the time set at C322 (Brake Answer Error Judgment Time), an external brake answer error (Ext
Brake Ans Error Fault) occurs as an external brake breakdown, and a breakdown stop occurs.
Set to 0.0 sec to turn the brake answer error determination OFF.

Amtech

6-86
 Fig. External brake sequence example

C323: Static Pot Option During Stop

This parameter provides selection of the static pot speed at stop to the user.
The following options are
=1: Last Speed
=2: Min Frequency 6
=3: Max Frequency
=4: A101 Set Freq
=5: B401 Preset speed-1

C324: Panel Temperature Limit

This parameter is set limit for panel temperature fault.
This fault Indicate that the panel inside temperature > C324. Fault will be reset if panel inside
temperature < C324 – 5 °C. This fault is applicable for IU/DU system.

GROUP – 4: SERIAL COMMUNICATION

C401: Baud Rate (bps)

Drive is facilitating with serial communication between drive unit and computer terminal. To control or
monitor single/ multiple units from single computer terminal, serial link can be used. This parameter
defines Baud rate (number of signal transition per second, it can be number of bits per second). The
available options are as under. Option-4 is set as default baud rate.

1: 1200 bps 4: 9600 bps

2: 2400 bps 5: 19200 bps
3: 4800 bps 6: 38400 bps

Refer the detail manual for the ModBus protocol and other information.

C402: Station Number

This parameter defines the address of the unit when connected to the serial network. This AC DRIVE
supports the ModBus protocol. The station number can be assigned to 1 ~ 247.

C403: Parity

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-87
 This parameter is used to set the parity. Parity is error-checking code to prevent from erroneous data
transformation between drive unit and terminal.

C404: Response Time (Sec)

Set the minimum time from receiving the command to returning an answer.

C405: Operation Panel Communication Loss selection

Enable or disable the operation panel communication loss fault. If enabled, AC DRIVE will generate
fault if it does not receive any response from the operation panel within 100msec. By default setting,
this fault is disabled.

For detail information on the ModBus protocol and register assignment, please refer “Serial
Communication Guide, Version 1.4”.
Note: Put jumper JP3 to “LD” position to use terminating resistors. Remove the cover designated as “Control
Unit” to access this jumper on PCA-2014A.

Amtech

6-88
GROUP – 5: AUTO RESTART & SPEED SEARCH

C501: Number Of Restart

C502: Restart wait Time (Sec)

Restart is function to reset the fault in the AC DRIVE and restart automatically to continue operation if
a fault occurs. User can select these parameters to automatically restart the unit in fault condition to
provide reliability and continuity of process during fault conditions.

Programming 0 in C501 disables the restart feature. Number of restart C501 defines the number of
attempts to restart during the fault condition.

When a fault is detected, the AC DRIVE output is shut off for the restart wait time C502. The operation
panel displays the fault while the AC DRIVE output is OFF.

When the restart wait time elapses, a fault is reset automatically and speed search operation is
performed.

When the number of such attempts exceeds the number of restart C501, the faults are not reset
automatically and the AC DRIVE output remains OFF. At this time a fault relay is activated and the
fault data will be stored in fault history. The RUN relay will also be deactivated. 6
Fout

A103
OC OC OC
M105

t
C502

n=1 n=2 n=3

Internal
fault

The number of restart times is cleared to 0 in the following cases.

1. A fault does not occur for more than 10 minutes.
2. A fault reset signal is applied from the operation panel or terminal.
3. The power supply is turned off and turned ON again.

This function is applicable to the following ten faults.

1. Instantaneous over current fault.
2. Drive over load fault.
3. Over voltage fault.
4. Under voltage fault.
5. Adjustable over current fault.
6. Earth fault.
7. Over temperature fault.
8. Under current fault.
9. External fault.
10. Phase loss fault.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-89
 C503: Emergency Stop mode
Set the stopping method for the emergency stop from the following options.

1. Coast to stop without fault output

2. Coast to stop with fault output
3. Ramp down to stop

C504: Speed Search selection

C505: Speed Search Current Limit (%)

C506: Speed Search Frequency Deceleration time (Sec)

C507: Speed Search Voltage Acceleration time (Sec)

C508: Speed Search Wait Time (Sec)

Speed search operation is useful to start the coasting motor or AC DRIVE changeover operation
without tripping. When selected, the AC DRIVE starts speed search from the maximum frequency.
6 The operation starts after the speed search wait time C508 after the start command. The following
figure explains the sequence of operation.

Speed search current limit C505 is applicable only during the speed search operation. The output
frequency deceleration time and output voltage acceleration time during the SSF can be adjusted
using C506 and C507 respectively as per the application.

C509: PLCT Time (Sec)

Power Loss Carry Through is a function that allows the AC DRIVE to run trip-less during the short-
term power outage / under voltage. As soon as the power outage / under voltage is detected, the AC
DRIVE output is turned OFF. If the supply resumes before the programmed time in C509, the AC
DRIVE will start with the speed search operation and reach to the set frequency. The fault relay will
not be enabled during this process nor the under voltage fault displayed on the operation panel.
However, if the power outage or under voltage condition persists for longer time than the programmed
time, the AC DRIVE will trip indicating under voltage fault. When programmed to 0, the PLCT feature
is disabled.

Note: The time in C509 must be less than the time for which the control power supply remains stable during the
power outage or under voltage condition.

C510: Speed Search Match Current Limit (%)

Speed search match current limit function limit drive current when speed match with actual motor
speed. Not usually necessary to set. When restarting is not possible with the factory settings, set the
value.

C511: Speed Search Match Frequency Gain

Set gain to increase the frequency after speed detect for speed search function.

Amtech

6-90
 Fout
Maximum Frequency
A103
C506 Set Frequency
M101
A201

Motor
speed

Iout
Speed search Speed search
current limit match current limit
C505

M104

C510

t
6
Vout

C507
t
C508

SPEED SEARCH FUNCTION

GROUP – 6: PID CONTROL SELECTION

C601: PID Control Selection

The AC DRIVE provides one inbuilt PID controller, which can be used to change the AC DRIVE
output frequency or can be utilized as stand alone module. This parameter is used to validate the PID
operation. When PID is used to control the speed of the AC DRIVE, select PID Output as frequency
reference in A106. The PID output can also be selected for the analog output. This will be useful when
using PID control block as stand alone module.

C602: PID Polarity

This parameter can be used to invert the output of PID as per the system requirement.

C603: PID Reference Input

The PID reference input can be selected from any of the 10 options. The various options include FSV
0-10V, FSI 4-20mA, Vin 0-10V, Iin 4-20mA, Local, Serial, PLC A-O/P 1, PLC A-O/P 2, PLC A-O/P 3
and PLC A-O/P 4. The value of selected PID reference input is displayed in M109 in %.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-91
 C604: PID Feedback Input Selection
The PID feedback input can be selected from any of the 8 options. The various options include FSV 0-
10V, FSI 4-20mA, Vin 0-10V, Iin 4-20mA, PLC A-O/P 1, PLC A-O/P 2, PLC A-O/P 3 and PLC A-
O/P 4.. The option selected for the PID reference input cannot be selected for the PID feedback input.
The value of selected PID feedback input is displayed in M110 in %.

C605: Proportional Gain

This parameter is used to set the proportional gain for the P-control. Setting to zero does not perform
P-control.

C606: Integral Time (Sec)

This parameter is used to set the integral time for the I-control. Setting to maximum value does not
perform I-control.

C607: Derivative Gain

This parameter is used to set the derivative gain for the D-control. Setting to zero does not perform D-
control.

C608: PID deviation Upper Limit (%)

6 This is the upper limit for the PID output deviation. If the programmable sequence output PID Up
Limit is selected, the output will be ON, when the PID output reaches to this level.

C609: PID deviation Lower Limit (%)

This is the lower limit for the PID output deviation. If the programmable sequence output PID Lo Limit
is selected, the output will be ON, when the PID output reaches to this level.

C610: PID Offset Adjustment (%)

Sets offset for the output after PID control.

C611: PID Reference Setting (%)

When Local is selected as PID reference, this parameter is used to set the PID reference using digital
operation panel. This parameter will not have any effect if other options are selected as reference.

C612: PID Display Scale - Max

Use this parameter to scale the PID signals in terms of process parameters. This is used only for the
display purpose and will not have any effect on the operation. Unit display as per C614.
Set this to the max value of the process parameter feedback sensor and will correspond to 10V.

C613: PID Display Scale - Min

Use this parameter to scale the PID signals in terms of process parameters. This is used only for the
display purpose and will not have any effect on the operation. Unit display as per C614.
Set this to the min value of the process parameter feedback sensor and will correspond to 0V.

C614: PID Display Unit Selection

Select appropriate unit for the process variable.

Amtech

6-92
 3
=0: No Unit =14: h =28: GPM =42: m /min =56: lb/m
=1: % =15: rpm =29: ft =43: kg/s =57: lb/h
=2: PSI =16: kh =30: MGD =44: kg/m =58: FPS
2
=3: kg/cm =17: lb ft =31: inHg =45: kg/h =59: ft/s
=4: ºC =18: mA =32: FPM =46: mbar =60: inH2O
=5: ºF =19: mV =33: kb/s =47: Pa =61: in wg
=6: CFM =20: W =34: kHz =48: GPS =62: ft wg
3
=7: m /h =21: kWh =35: ohm =49: gal/s =63: lbsi
=8: LPM =22: hp =36: ppm =50: gal/m =64: ms
=9: AMP =23: MWh =37: pps =51: gal/h =65: Mrev
3
=10: kW =24: m/s =38: l/s =52: ft /s =66: d
3 3 3
=11: V =25: dm /s =39: Km /h =53: ft /m =67: inWC
3
=12: Hz =26: bar =40: l/h =54: ft /h =68: m/min
3
=13: s =27: kPa =41: m /s =55: lb/s =69: Nm

C615: Sleep Mode Selection

When the sleep mode is selected, the inverter output is switched OFF, if the frequency reference (or
PID output) remains below the sleep mode enter frequency (C616) for the set time period (C617).
Sleep mode can be used with or without PID control.

C616: Sleep Mode Enter Frequency (Hz)

This is the frequency used to activate the sleep mode and turn off the inverter. This is the frequency at 6
which the drive will enter in sleep mode.

C617: Sleep Mode Active Delay (Sec)

The inverter output will be turned off if the frequency reference (or PID output) remains below sleep
mode enter frequency (C616) for the set sleep mode active delay time.

C618: Sleep Mode Wake Up Band (%)

This is to prevent from rapid on/off of the drive. This is set with respect to the max frequency (A103)
and used as hysteresis when leaving the sleep mode. The inverter will be turned on when the
frequency reference (or PID output) exceeds the sleep mode enter frequency (C617) + wake up band
(C618).

C619: Sleep Mode Leave Condition

This parameter defines the sleep mode leave condition. There are two conditions to wake up from the
sleep mode as below.
1. Freq Ref > C616 Sleep Mode Enter Freq + Wake Up Band
2. Freq Ref > A102 Min Freq + Wake Up Band

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-93
 (PSIX = 20)
C603: PID M109 C608: PID deviation
PID Bypass
Reference Upper Limit
C610: PID Offset
Input
Adjustment
PID Output
C602
=1
+ + A106=12
PID Frequency Ref
=0
- + C201
Vout1
=0 C202
C604: PID M110 Vout2
Feedback =1 C203
Input C609: PID deviation Iout1
Lower Limit C204
C601: PID Selection C607: Derivative Gain
Iout2
C606: Integral Time
C605: Proportional Gain

PID Controller

Amtech

6-94
GROUP – 7: PLC PANEL PARAMETER

C701 to C702: PLC Panel Par1 to 2

This PLC panel parameter 1 & 2 are used in-built PLC for Timer 1 application. Related memory
location of this parameter is from 101 to 102.

C703 to C704: PLC Panel Par3 to 4

This PLC panel parameter 3 & 4 are used in-built PLC for Timer 2 application. Related memory
location from of this parameter is 103 to 104.

C705 to C706: PLC Panel Par5 to 6

This PLC panel parameter 5 & 6 are used in-built PLC for Timer 3 application. Related memory
location from of this parameter is 105 to 106.

C707 to C708: PLC Panel Par7 to 8

This PLC panel parameter 7 & 8 are used in-built PLC for Timer 4 application. Related memory
location from of this parameter is 107 to 108.
6
C709 to C712: PLC Panel Par9 to 12
PLC panel parameter 9 to 12 can be input and used in-built PLC application. Related memory location
of this parameter is from 109 to 112.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-95
 MODE – D: AUXILIARY DRIVE PARAMETERS

PSI Aux Drive PSI Aux Drive

PSO Aux Drive PSO Aux Drive

RUN RUN

Inverter Output Inverter Output

GROUP – 1: MOTOR PARAMETERS

D101: Motor Voltage (Vac)

6 Enter motor nameplate voltage of auxiliary drive. This is used as reference in the software. This is
the motor terminal voltage during full load at the base frequency.

D102: Motor Current (Amp)

Enter motor rated current from the auxiliary motor nameplate. This is full load motor current at base
frequency. The motor over load and other current related protections are based on this value. This
value cannot be set higher than AC DRIVE rated current M305.

D103: Motor Frequency (Hz)

Enter motor base frequency from the auxiliary motor nameplate. Base frequency A403 should be set
in accordance to the motor frequency.

D104: Motor Speed (rpm)

Enter motor base speed from the auxiliary motor nameplate. When higher than this speed, the flux
control during vector control will be weakened.

D105: Motor Output Rating (kW)

Enter motor rated capacity from the auxiliary motor nameplate.

GROUP – 2: FREQUENCY SETTING

D201: Local Set Frequency (Hz)

This is the set frequency for auxiliary drive when the frequency reference input source is local
(A106=1). The output will ramp to this frequency, when start command is given.
The minimum limit for this parameter is decided by minimum frequency D202. If D202 is set higher
then D201, the value of D202 is automatically assigned to D201.
The maximum value of this parameter is decided by maximum frequency D203. The value of D201
cannot be set higher than D203.

Amtech

6-96
D202: Minimum Frequency (Hz)
This is the minimum output frequency of the AC DRIVE when auxiliary drive is selected.
In terminal mode, this is the minimum output attained with minimum analog input reference. This
value should always be lower than the maximum frequency D203. The minimum frequency will be
reached after start command with selected acceleration ramp up time.

D203: Maximum Frequency (Hz)

This is the maximum output frequency of the AC DRIVE when auxiliary drive is selected.
In terminal mode, this is the maximum output attained with maximum analog input reference.

D204: Frequency Reference Input

This parameter can be used to select the speed reference input when auxiliary drive is selected. The
speed reference can be independently selected from the given options even if the AC DRIVE is
controlled from any of three sources, i.e. Local (Digital Operation Panel), Terminal or Serial. The
minimum and maximum limits are decided by D202 and D203 respectively in all the options. The
options are same as for the main AC DRIVE. Refer A106 for the detail information.

D205: Line Speed Setting (rpm)

The entered value will be displayed as motor speed in M102 at 50Hz, when auxiliary drive is
selected. 6
The final speed of the driven load can be displayed by this parameter. The value to be entered can be
derived at with following formula:
Parameter Value = 50 x Desired rpm / Set output frequency
Suppose a line speed of 273 is to be displayed when the output is 90Hz.
Parameter Value = 50 X 273 / 90 = 151.667 = 152
Now, at 90Hz the motor speed M102 will show (152 X 90 / 50) i.e. 274 rpm.

D206: Acceleration Time-1 (Sec)

Acceleration Time-1 is the time taken by AC DRIVE output frequency to ramp up from zero frequency
to maximum frequency D203, when auxiliary drive is selected.
Short acceleration time can result in excessive output current and if it exceeds the Acceleration
current limit D403, the acceleration will cease until the current reduces below the D403 value. In such
case, the actual acceleration time will differ from programmed value. The AC DRIVE may trip in drive
over load fault if the condition persists for long time. Increase acceleration time in such cases.

D207: Deceleration Time-1 (Sec)

Deceleration Time-1 is the time taken by AC DRIVE output frequency to ramp down from maximum
frequency D203 to zero frequency.
Short deceleration time can result in excessive output current and if it exceeds the Stall current limit
D401, the deceleration will cease until the current reduces below the D401 value. In such case, the
actual deceleration time will differ from programmed value. The AC DRIVE may trip in drive over load/
dc bus over voltage fault if the condition persists for long time. Increase deceleration time in such
cases.

GROUP – 3: TORQUE BOOST & DC BRAKING

D301: Manual Torque Boost setting (%)

This parameter is for the auxiliary drive. When setting manually, set the boost voltage at 0 Hz as a
percentage in respect to the motor voltage D101. When programmed to zero, it will be disabled. This
is automatically adjusted by the automatic tuning.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-97
 D302: Slip Compensation (Hz)
This parameter is for the auxiliary drive. Set auxiliary motor’s rated slip. When setting manually, set
the slip frequency for the auxiliary motor rated load in respect to the base frequency. The output
frequency changes according to the auxiliary motor rated torque. The output frequency will respond
with a time constant of approximately 10msec in respect to the change in the load torque.

D303: DC Brake Start Frequency (Hz)

This is the frequency at which the dc brake will be applied, when the auxiliary drive is selected. To
enable this feature, the stop mode should be ramp down and the dc braking time should not be zero.
If dc braking time is zero, this feature will be disabled.

D304: DC brake Current (%)

This parameter decides the dc brake current when the auxiliary drive is selected.

D305: DC Brake Time (Sec)

This parameter decides the length of time that dc braking is on for the auxiliary drive.
When the stop mode is ramp down and stop command is issued, the output will ramp down with
6 deceleration time. When the AC DRIVE output reaches to dc braking start frequency, the dc voltage is
injected to the motor. The amount of voltage and the length of time for which it is applied are decided
by the dc braking current D304 and D305 respectively.
The dc braking is utilized to stop high inertia load forcefully. During dc braking mechanical energy
trapped in rotor due to system inertia will be dissipated as heat in the motor. Hence for safety dc
braking is utilized at lower frequency.

GROUP – 4: LIMITING PARAMETERS

D401: Stall Current Limit (%)

This parameter is for the auxiliary drive. When the AC DRIVE output current crosses the stall current
limit, the output ramps down with current limit deceleration time A209. This is effective only when the
AC DRIVE is operating at set speed. This feature is not active while the AC DRIVE is accelerating or
decelerating. When the current decreases below the programmed value, the AC DRIVE again starts
accelerating to the set speed with current limit acceleration time A208. This feature helps in
maintaining relatively constant output torque characteristics.
Set the current limit as a percentage of auxiliary motor rated current.

D402: Adjustable Over Current Level (%)

This parameter is for the auxiliary drive. Set the upper current level as a percentage of auxiliary
motor rated current. Whenever the AC DRIVE output current exceeds the set value, the AC DRIVE
trips indicating adjustable over current fault. Always set higher side to prevent the unnecessary
tripping of the AC DRIVE during normal operation. This gives the user to program the current level
below the standard inverse time curve. This may be used in cases where excessive torque shocks
can lead to a harmful affect on the machinery.
The default setting of 300% disables this feature and standard inverse time trip remains in effect.

D403: Acceleration Current Limit (%)

This is acceleration current limit for the auxiliary drive and effective only during normal acceleration.
It stops the acceleration, if the motor current exceeds the programmed during acceleration. When the
current reduces below the programmed value the AC DRIVE again starts accelerating to the set

Amtech

6-98
speed. This feature helps in preventing over current tripping of high inertia load during fast
acceleration.

D404: Under Current Level (%)

This parameter is effective only when the auxiliary drive is selected. This feature trips the AC DRIVE
when the current falls below the programmed value for more than 1sec after the speed reaches to set
speed. This feature is not active while the AC DRIVE is accelerating or decelerating. Making this 0 will
disable this.

Note: In pump applications, if the flow decreases below a minimum speed there will be cavitations. This feature
is useful to turn off the pump in such case.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-99
 MODE – E: RING SPINNING FRAME (RSF) FUNCTION PARAMETERS

GROUP-1: RSF / PATTERN RUN PARAMETER SELECTION

Ring Spinning Frame function is used to perform spinning pattern operation. In RSF, acceleration /
deceleration is performed in a straight line till the set frequency for the next step is reached.

Up to three speed-time pattern (Tables) can be set up to a maximum of 15 steps. Each step is set at
the target frequency and time taken to reach that frequency from the previous step.

Select RSF function in E101 to perform this operation. Now, when RUN command is issued, operation
will commence from step-1 of the selected table.

After the pattern has been completed, the inverter will stop according to the selected stop mode in
A304.
Frequency (speed)

E203
E206

E202 E207
E201 Normal deceleration
cusion

6 Time
G303
G301 G302 G307

If STOP command is issued during the ring spinning frame operation, inverter will stop according to
the selected stop mode in A304. When restarting the operation, it will accelerate the output frequency
as per the normal acceleration time to the frequency, where inverter was stopped. Now, it will resume
the normal RSF operation.

PR/RSF Reset: Assign ‘PR/RSF Reset’ function to any sequence input terminal. A stop occurs when
the PR/RSF Reset is turned ON during RSF operation. Operation is commenced from STEP-1 when
restarting the operation.

Doff-End Alarm: By setting the Doff-End alarm time (E105), the Doff-End alarm is output from the
point after completion of the final step to the point going back the set time.
The Doff-End alarm remains ON even after the pattern is completed. The Doff-End alarm is cleared
by the PR/RSF Reset.
Select the output terminal for the Doff-End alarm with the output selection (C107 to C112).
To restart the operation after the Doff-End alarm is ON, reset the Doff-End alarm using PR/RSF
Reset; otherwise it will not allow the operation to start even if the RUN command is reissued.

Hank count display (M213)

The current Hank count displays at monitor M213. The Hank count is obtained using the following
formula.
1
HC = FAVG × TRUN × × Gain
840
FAVG [Hz]: Average frequency
TRUN [sec]: Operation time
840: 1 Hank = 840 yard

FAVG [Hz]: Average frequency

Calculate the average frequency from the given equations considering the stop mode used.

Amtech

6-100
1) Stop Mode (A304) =0: Ramp down to stop

S1 + S2 +... + Sn + SD
Average Frequency =
T1(sec) +T2(sec) +...+ Tn(sec) + TD(sec)
Where,
[Fs(Hz) + F1(Hz)] x T1(sec)
S1 =
2
[Fn-1(Hz) + Fn(Hz)] x Tn(sec)
Sn = , n: Step number
2
Fn(Hz) x TD(sec)
SD =
2

2) Stop Mode (A304) =1: Coast-to-stop

S1 + S2 +... + Sn
Average Frequency =
T1(sec) +T2(sec) +...+ Tn(sec)
6
Frequency (speed)

F3
Fn-1

F2 Fn
F1 Normal deceleration
cusion

S1 S2 S3 Sn SD
Fs
Time
T1 T2 T3 T7 Td

It is necessary to set the gain (E106 & E107) in order to display the Hank count correctly. The gain is
obtained using the following formula.

2 1
Gain = 2p × R S ×
× ×K C
Pole G R
RS: Spindle radius [yard]
Pole: Motor pole count
GR: Gear ratio = N2 (N1: Motor gear count, N2: Spindle gear count)
N1
KC: Compensation coefficient (Compensate slippage etc.)
The Hank count calculation is continued during operation, however, is reset to zero when the power is
turned OFF.

E101: RSF/ Pattern Run Selection

Select any function from Ring Spinning Frame or Pattern Run function.

E102: Table1 Step Selection

Select the number of steps for table-1 for RSF.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-101
 E103: Table2 Step Selection
Select the number of steps for table-2 for RSF.

E104: Table3 Step Selection

Select the number of steps for table-3 for RSF.

E105: Doff End Alarm Time (Sec)

By setting the Doff-End Alarm Time, the Doff-End Alarm is output at the point going back the set time
(E105) from the moment auto stop occurs after completion of the final step when performing spinning
frame operation.

E106: Hank count gain

This is the gain, which is used in hank calculation.

E107: Hank Gain Multiplier

Select the multiplier for the hank gain.
6
E108: Table selection
Select the Table for RSF and Pattern Run function.

GROUP-2: RSF FREQUENCY FOR TABLE-1

E201- E215: Frequency T1 – STP1 ~ STP15 (Hz)

Enter the frequencies for table-1.

GROUP-3: RSF TIME FOR TABLE-1

E301- E315: RSF time T1 – STP1 ~ STP15 (Sec)

Enter the time to reach to the set frequency for each step for table-1.

GROUP-4: RSF FREQUENCY FOR TABLE-2

E401- E415: Frequency T2 – STP1 ~ STP15 (Hz)

Enter the frequencies for table-2.

GROUP-5: RSF TIME FOR TABLE-2

E501- E515: RSF time T2 – STP1 ~ STP15 (Sec)

Enter the time to reach to the set frequency for each step for table-2.

Amtech

6-102
GROUP-6: RSF FREQUENCY FOR TABLE-3

E601- E615: Frequency T3 – STP1 ~ STP15 (Hz)

Enter the frequencies for table-3.

GROUP-7: RSF TIME FOR TABLE-3

E701- E715: RSF time T3 – STP1 ~ STP15 (Sec)

Enter the time to reach to the set frequency for each step for table-3.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-103
 MODE – G: PATTERN RUN FUNCTION PARAMETERS

First select the pattern run function in E101. With pattern run function, the frequency, run direction and
time can be changed automatically.

Maximum of 15-patterns can be set in one table and such two sets of tables are available. Select the
table using E108. Note that only two tables (table-1 & table-2) are available for the pattern run
function.

Set the desired frequency (speed) pattern in E201~E215 for table-1. Use E401~E415 for table-2.
Set the desired time in second to stay at the desired frequency (speed) for each step in G301~G315
for table-1. Use G401~G415 for table-2.
Select the run mode for each step in G101~G115 for table-1. Use G201~G215 for table-2.

E202

E201 E205
Frequency (speed)

E204
Time

E203

Step-1 Step-2 Step-3 Step-4 Step-5

G301 G302 G303 G304 G305

RUN

Effect of different sequence inputs

RUN: Pattern run starts when RUN command turns ON. The inverter will stop when this is turned
OFF. This can be input from Local, Terminal or Serial.

PR Step Skip: Proceeds to the next step at the edge from OFF to ON. By turning this signal ON/OFF
with PR Step Hold, the step can be proceeded in synchronization with the peripheral machine
regardless of the internal timer.

PR Step Hold: The internal timer operation will stop when this command is ON. This is used to pause
the pattern run operation. The inverter will continue to run at the present frequency.

PR/RSF Reset: Assign ‘PR/RSF Reset’ function to any sequence input terminal. During the Pattern
run operation, when this turns ON, the operation will be reset to step-0.

The PR Step Skip and PR Step Hold are valid only when RUN command is ON. PR/RSF Reset is
valid all the time.

GROUP-1: MODE SELECTION FOR PATTERN RUN TABLE-1

G101- G115: PR Mode T1 – STP1 ~ STP15

Select the required mode for pattern run function for each step of Table-1
=1: STOP
=2: FORWARD
=3: REVERSE

Amtech

6-104
GROUP-2: MODE SELECTION FOR PATTERN RUN TABLE-2

G201- G215: PR Mode T2 – STP1 ~ STP15

Select the required mode for pattern run function for each step of Table-2
=1: STOP
=2: FORWARD
=3: REVERSE

GROUP-3: PATTERN TIME FOR TABLE-1

G301- G315: PR Time T1 – STP1 ~ STP15

Select the required time for pattern run function for each step of Table-1

GROUP-4: PATTERN TIME FOR TABLE-2

G401- G415: PR Time T2 – STP1 ~ STP15

Select the required time for pattern run function for each step of Table-2
6
GROUP-5: RETURN STEP FOR TABLE-1

G501- G515: Return Step T1 – STP1 ~ STP15

Select the return step for pattern run function for each step of Table-1

GROUP-6: RETURN STEP FOR TABLE-2

G601- G615: Return Step T2 – STP1 ~ STP15

Select the return step for pattern run function for each step of Table-2

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-105
 MODE – H: SPECIAL APPLICATION FUNCTION PARAMETERS

GROUP-1: MULTI-PUMP FUNCTION PARAMETERS

Multi-pump control refers to a function which controls the flow passage pressure at a constant level by
running pumps in parallel using one Axpert-Eazy AC Drive and it’s internal relay output /
programmable sequence outputs.
The pressure step of the ON/OFF controlled pumps is interpolated by a pump that is variable-speed
controlled by the AC Drive, which has the PID control function. This maintains the pressure's
continuation.
The relay outputs can be used for the pump’s ON/OFF control are the programmable relay1,
programmable relay2 and programmable sequence output. Assign the pump number to the respective
relay / PSO in parameters C107~C112.
The system configuration is shown below.

AXPERT EAZY AC DRIVE

PID Ref
Input
(C603)

U,V,W
PID M P

6 PSO-1

Pump-1
PSO-2 M P
Limiter Pump-2
PSO-3 M P
Monitor
Pump-3
PSO-4 M P
Pump ON/OFF
command
Pump-4
FSI M P
PID
Feedback
Input (C604) Pressure Feedback Pressure Sensor
Converter

Multi-pump control operation

An example of actual operation for the multi-pump control is shown below.

T1
ULT
PID Output

T3

LLT

T2 T2 (4)

Time

ON ON
Pump-1 (2) OFF
Sequence Output

(1)
ON
Pump-2 OFF
(3) T4
ON
Pump-3 OFF
(5)
ON
Pump-4 OFF

ON/OFF control pump changeover operation (when operating five pumps)

Amtech

6-106
ULT: PID Deviation Upper Limit (C608).
LLT: PID Deviation Lower Limit (C609).
T1: Pump start hold time (H102)
T2: Pump stop hold time (H103)
T3: Pump Continuous ON time limit (H104)
T4: Pump Changeover time (H105)

The ON/OFF control of multiple pumps is carried out so that the operation time of each pump is equal.
1) When the PID output reaches ULT and T1 is passed, the auxiliary Pump-2 with the shortest
operation time turns ON.
2) When the PID output reaches ULT and T2 is passed, the auxiliary Pump-1 with the shortest
operation time turns OFF.
3) Following (2), when the PID output matches LLT for the time of T2, the auxiliary Pump-3 with the
longest operation time turns OFF.
4) When the time that the PID output and LLT match does not reach T2, the pump OFF control will
not be carried out.
Pump changeover function using Pump Continuous ON time limit (H104).
5) When the time that the auxiliary pump's ON/OFF control is not carried out reaches T3, the
Pump-4 with the longest operation time within all of the auxiliary pumps turns OFF, and the
Pump-1 with the shortest operation time will turn ON after T4. If H104 is set to 0, changeover
following the continuous operation limit is prohibited.
6

The variable speed control pump will not change even if the continuous operation limit time is
exceeded.

When the inverter is stopped due to the stop command or fault, the pump status will not change and it
will remain as it is. To turn off the entire operating pumps, disable the multi-pump operation.

When the inverter’s power is turned off, the operation time history for each pump will be lost.

H101: No of Pump Selection

Select the number of pumps to be controlled. Set to zero to disable the multi-pump function.

H102: Pump Start Hold Time (Sec)

If the PID output reaches to upper limit and remains there for more than the set time, the next pump
will be switched ON.

H103: Pump Stop Hold Time (Sec)

If the PID output reaches to lower limit and remains there for more than the set time, the next pump
will be switched OFF.

H104: Pump Continuous ON Time Limit (Hrs)

If pump’s ON/OFF control is not carried out for more than the set time, the pump will change to the
longest operating pump to the shortest operating pump.

H105: Pump Changeover Time (Sec)

Set the time for changing from the pump that has been operating longest to the pump operating
shortest.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-107
 MODE – P: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND PARAMETERS

GROUP- 1 ~ 9, A, B, C: IN-BUILT PLC COMMAND

P101 ~ PC10: PLC Inst 1 ~ PLC Inst 120
Input the In-built PLC Commands as per PLC application.

Amtech

6-108
In-built PLC Function Explanation:

In-built PLC Function is one of the important features of this product, by using which, user can make
PLC related application without additional hardware. The In-built PLC function has the following
features.

Features:

• The In-built PLC can be used to get the same functionality of Programmable Sequence Inputs
(PSI).
• It is possible to assign the signals from the In-built PLC to the Programmable Sequences Output
(PSO).
• The In-built PLC can be used to get the same functionality as of programmable analog inputs.
• It is possible to assign the signals from the In-built PLC to the analog outputs.
• Bit status of PSI, PSO, Fault codes, Status codes and Control word can be read into the PLC bit
memory location.
• Monitor Parameters can be read in to PLC registers (16-bit memory location).
• User can develop program by using PLC Commands based on the required application.
• PLC Commands can be input from the LCD Display. This allows changes to be made easily at the
site.
• PLC Commands can be input with the standard serial interface.
• 115 registers (16-bit memory locations) and 100 Flags (1-bit memory location) for PLC operation.
• PLC program’s length up to 120 PLC Commands.
• 4 Timer Command can be set from display. 6
The In-built PLC function-processing chart is shown in fig. 6-1. PLC commands are separate in each
parameter and all command (P101 to PC10) execute within 20-millisecond interval.

Mode P, Group-
Mode P, Group-1 Mode P, Group-C
2~9,A,B

Command P101 Command P201 Command PC01

Command P102 Command P202 Command PC02
Command P103 Command P203 Command PC03
Command P104 Command P204 Command PC04
. . .
. . .
. . .
Command P108 Command PB08 Command PC08
Command P109 Command PB09 Command PC09
Command P110 Command PB10 Command PC10

Fig. 6-1 In-built PLC processing Chart

The In-built PLC function starts to read command from the Mode P Group-1 parameter (P101) and
executes it one-by-one. END (000) Command indicates end of program and after this command; PLC
st
function again executes from 1 command (P101).

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-109
 In-built PLC Block

PSI Analog I/P

& O/P In-Built PLC
Function
Monitor
PSO
Parameter

In-Built PLC
Main Control (Inverter)

Fig. 6-2 Block Diagram of In-built PLC function with Main Control

Fig. 6-2 is a block diagram of main control and In-built PLC function. All Digital Input and Output,
Analog Input and output are connected with main control.

Now user can program In-built PLC for his application. User can also take output of the drive as PLC
Input and output from PLC to the drive as an Input.

In-built PLC Function Related Parameters and Command.

The In-built PLC function related parameters are listed below.
6
1. In-built PLC (C312):
Use this parameter to enable the In-built PLC Function.

2. In-built PLC Command (P101 to PC10):

Input the PLC commands to be executed with the In-built PLC Function in parameters P101 to
PC10.

3. PLC Display Parameter (M313 to M322): In-built PLC  Display

For PLC programming, there are 115 numbers of 16-bit register and 100 numbers of 1-bit flag.
10 values of signed 16-bit register can be displayed in parameter M313 to M322 and these values
will be saved in EEPROM at the time of power off. (Related PLC command is DISPLAY_REG
(061)) and during power on these parameters value will come in register 76 to 85, 8 different flag
bit status can be display in parameter M323. (Related PLC command is DISPLAY_FLG (062)).

4. Digital Input From Inverter (PSI Status) to In-built PLC:

Parameters C101 to C106 and C114 to C115 have 41 selectable options. In these, 28 to 35 are
for PLC input options. Now to take PSI status as a PLC input, select one of the PLC input option
from these parameters. Use READ_PSI (047) command in PLC program for this operation.

5. Digital Output From In-built PLC to Inverter (PSO Status):

Parameters C107 to C113 have 36 Selectable options. In these, 26 to 32 options are for In-built
PLC output. Now to take In-built PLC’s output as Inverter’s PSO output, select one of the PLC
option from these parameters. Use WRITE_PSO (049) command in PLC program for this
operation.

6. Digital Input From In-built PLC to Inverter (PSI Status):

Parameters C101 to C106 and C114 to C115 have 41 selectable options.
User can activate one of 1 to 27 options of these parameters, without any extern digital signal on
PSI by using In-built PLC. Use WRITE_PSI (048) command in PLC program for this operation.

7. Digital Output From Inverter (PSO Status) to In-built PLC:

User can read and use status of PSO from inverter for In-built PLC application.
To read the PSO status in In-built PLC, use READ_PSO (046) command in PLC program.

Amtech

6-110
8. Analog Input From In-built PLC to Inverter:
The signals from In-built PLC can be given as Analog Input.
Parameters A106, A108, A702, D204, C603 & C604 have four PLC A-O/P options.
User has to select one of these options for this operation. Use WRITE_AN_O/P (054) command
in PLC program for this operation.

9. Analog Output From In-built PLC to Inverter:

Analog output can be given from In-built PLC.
Parameters C201 to C204 have four PLC A-O/P options. User has to select one of these options
for this operation. Use WRITE_AN_O/P (054) command in PLC program.

10. Analog Input From Inverter to In-built PLC:

The Inverter’s Analog input signals (FSV, FSI, Iin, Vin) can be read to In-built PLC. These Inputs
are stored in Register No. 94 to 97.

11. Analog Output From Inverter to In-built PLC

The Inverter’s Analog output signal (C201 to C204‘s 1 to 7 option) can be read to the In-built PLC.
These outputs are stored in Register No. 86 to 93.

12. In-built PLC PANEL Parameter (C701 to C712): Parameter  In-built PLC
Twelve parameters can be input. Related memory location from 101 to 112.

Note: To get proper output from PLC program, make sure to select correct option in PLC parameters state
above. It is advisable to set unused PLC parameters to default conditions.
6
Memory Description:

There are 115 numbers of 16-bit register or memory locations, 100 numbers of 1-bit flag and one 32-
bit register.
16-bit register description has shown below table.

16-bit
Register Name Access Type Details Value
No.
0-75 User Memory Read/Write User can Read and Write -32768 to 32767
76 User Memory Read/Write User can Read and Write
77 User Memory Read/Write User can Read and Write
78 User Memory Read/Write User can Read and Write
79 User Memory Read/Write User can Read and Write
M313 – M322
80 User Memory Read/Write User can Read and Write (during power on
81 User Memory Read/Write User can Read and Write condition) or
-32768 to 32767
82 User Memory Read/Write User can Read and Write
83 User Memory Read/Write User can Read and Write
84 User Memory Read/Write User can Read and Write
85 User Memory Read/Write User can Read and Write
86 Output Voltage Read Read Output Voltage value M203
87 Output Current Read Read Output Current value M104
88 Output Power Read Read Output Power value M205
89 Output Frequency Read Read Output Frequency value M101
90 DC Bus Voltage Read Read DC Bus Voltage value M204
91 PID output Read Read PID output value 100d = 100%
92 Torque Current Read Read Torque Current value M209
Read Heat sink temperature
93 Heat sink temperature Read value M211

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-111
 16-bit
Register Name Access Type Details Value
No.
94 FSV Input Read Read input value from FSV 100d = 100%
95 FSI Input Read Read input value from FSI 100d = 100%
96 Vin Input Read Read input value from Vin 100d = 100%
97 Iin Input Read Read input value from Iin 100d = 100%
98-100 Reserved -- -- --
101 Panel Parameter 1 Read Read value set with C701 --
102 Panel Parameter 2 Read Read value set with C702 --
103 Panel Parameter 3 Read Read value set with C703 --
104 Panel Parameter 4 Read Read value set with C704 --
105 Panel Parameter 5 Read Read value set with C705 --
106 Panel Parameter 6 Read Read value set with C706 --
107 Panel Parameter 7 Read Read value set with C707 --
108 Panel Parameter 8 Read Read value set with C708 --
109 Panel Parameter 9 Read Read value set with C709 --
110 Panel Parameter 10 Read Read value set with C710 --
111 Panel Parameter 11 Read Read value set with C711 --
6 112 Panel Parameter 12 Read Read value set with C712 --
113-114 Reserved

All 100 numbers of 1-bit flags are Read/Write, and one 32-bit register is Read/Write.

In-built PLC Command Format:

The PLC commands used with the In-built PLC are 12- digit value shown in below table. These
commands can be input from the P101 to PA10 parameter.

0 0 2 0 0 1 0 2 5 0 0 0
OPCODE DATA1 DATA2 DATA3

12-digit In-built PLC Command format

Where, OPCODE = Command no.

DATA1 = Data format 1
DATA2 = Data format 2
DATA3 = Data format 3
 Note: Range of DATA1, DATA2 and DATA3 are different and it depends on command type. See list of
PLC Commands for detail. It is necessary to terminate program with END (000) Command.

Amtech

6-112
Sr. Command Op- DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 Description
No. Name Code
1 END 000 000 000 000 End of the Program.
2 REG_LD 001 Register (n) Value Load the 16-bit value in Register (n).
3 REG32_LD 002 Register (n) 000 000 Register (n) as a High 16-bit and Register (n+1) as a
Low 16-bit are loaded in Register 32 as 32 bits.
4 REG32_ST 003 Register (n) 000 000 Register 32 is store in Register (n) as a High 16-bit
and Register (n+1) as a Low 16-bit as 32 bit.
5 REGDEC 005 Register (n) 000 000 Decrement the value of Register (n) by 1.
6 REGINC 006 Register (n) 000 000 Increment the value of Register (n) by 1.
7 COPY_REG 007 Register (n) Register 000 Copy Register (m) in Register (n).
(m)
8 COPY_FLG 008 Flag (n) Flag (m) 000 Copy Flag (m) in Flag (n).
9 SET_FLG 009 Flag (n) 000 000 Set the Flag (n).
10 CLEAR_FLG 010 Flag (n) 000 000 Clear the Flag (n).
11 ADI 011 Register (n) Value Add immediate value. (Register (n) = Register (n) +
Immediate Value (0 to 32767)
12 ADD 012 Register (n) Register Register Add operation. (Register (n) = Register (n1) +
(n1) (n2) Register (n2)).
13 ADD32 013 Register (n) 000 000 Register (n) as a High 16-bit and Register (n+1) as a
Low 16-bit are added to Register 32 as 32 bits.
Register 32 = Register 32 + Register (n). 6
14 SUB 014 Register (n) Register Register Subtraction operator (Register (n) = Register (n1) -
(n1) (n2) Register (n2)).
15 SUB32 015 Register (n) 000 000 Register (n) as a High 16-bit and Register (n+1) as a
Low 16-bit are subtracted from Register32 as 32 bits.
Register 32 = Register 32 - Register (n).
16 MUL32 016 Register (n) Register 000 Multiplication operator (Register 32 = Register (n) *
(m) Register (m)).
17 DIV 017 Register (n) Register Register Division operator (Register (n) = Register (n1) /
(n1) (n2) Register (n2)).
18 DIV32 018 Register (n) 000 000 Division operator (Register 32 = Register 32 /
Register (n)).
19 AND 019 Flag (n) Flag (n1) Flag (n2) Logical AND operation between Flags (Flag (n) =
Flag (n1) & Flag (n2))
20 NAND 020 Flag (n) Flag (n1) Flag (n2) Logical NAND operation between Flags (Flag (n) =
~(Flag (n1) & Flag (n2)))
21 NOR 021 Flag (n) Flag (n1) Flag (n2) Logical NOR operation between Flags (Flag (n) = ~
(Flag (n1) | Flag (n2)).
22 XOR 022 Flag (n) Flag (n1) Flag (n2) Logical XOR operation between Flags (Flag (n) =
Flag (n1) ^ Flag (n2)).
23 XNOR 023 Flag (n) Flag (n1) Flag (n2) Logical XNOR operation between Flags (Flag (n) = ~
(Flag (n1) ^ Flag (n2))).
24 OR 024 Flag (n) Flag (n1) Flag (n2) Logical OR operation between Flags (Flag (n) = Flag
(n1) | Flag (n2)).
25 NOT_FLG 025 Flag (n) Flag (m) 000 Invert the specified Flag (Flag (n) = ~Flag (m)).
26 NOT_REG 026 Register (n) Register 000 Invert the specified register (Register (n) = ~Register
(m) (m))
27 WAND 027 Register (n) Register Register Logical Word (16-bit) AND operation between
(n1) (n2) registers (Register (n) = Register (n1) & Register
(n2))
28 WOR 028 Register (n) Register Register Logical Word (16-bit) OR operation between
(n1) (n2) registers (Register (n) = Register (n1) | Register (n-
2))
29 WXOR 029 Register (n) Register Register Logical Word (16-bit) XOR operation between
(n1) (n2) registers (Register (n) = Register (n1) ^ Register
(n2))

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-113
 Sr. Command Op- DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 Description
No. Name Code
30 NEG 030 Register (n) 000 000 Negative. Register (n) = - Register (n)

31 ABS 031 Register (n) 000 000 Absolute the value of Register (n). Register (n) =
ABS (Register (n))
32 CMP_GT 035 Flag (n) Register Register If Register (n) is greater than Register (m) then given
(n) (m) Flag (n) is set.
33 CMP_LT 036 Flag (n) Register Register If Register (n) is less than Register (m) then given
(n) (m) Flag (n) is set.
34 CMP_GE 037 Flag (n) Register Register If Register (n) is greater than or equal to Register (m)
(n) (m) then given Flag (n) is set.
35 CMP_LE 038 Flag (n) Register Register If Register (n) is less than or equal to Register (m)
(n) (m) then given Flag (n) is set.
36 CMP_EQ 039 Flag (n) Register Register If Register (n) is equal to Register (m) then given
(n) (m) Flag (n) is set.
37 CMP_NE 040 Flag (n) Register Register If Register (n) is not equal to Register (m) then given
(n) (m) Flag (n) is set.
38 IF 041 Flag (n) 000 000 If given Flag (n) is set then condition is true and
execute IF routine until ELSE or END_IF.
39 ELSE 042 000 000 000 If IF condition is false then ELSE loop will execute
until END_IF.
40 END_IF 043 000 000 000 Specify the end of IF and ELSE Loop.
6 41 JUMP 044 X (1-100) 000 000 JUMP to X command no.
42 READ_PSO 046 Flag (n) 1-7 000 Read the status of selected PSO (1-7) in selected
Flag (n).
43 READ_PSI 047 Flag (n) 1-8 000 Read the status of selected PSI (1-8) in selected
Flag (n).
44 WRITE_PSI 048 1-25 Flag (n) 000 Assign value of Flag (n) in PSI function (1-25).
45 WRITE_PSO 049 1-7 Flag (n) 000 Assign value of Flag (n) in PSO (1-7).
46 READ_MON_PA 050 Register (n) 0-115 000 Read the value of monitor parameter (0-115) in
RA Register (n).
47 READ_STA_BIT 051 Flag (n) 1-2 0-15 Read the value of status bit (0-15) of status register
(1-2) in Flag (n).
48 READ_FLT_BIT 052 Flag (n) 1-5 0-15 Read the value of fault bit (0-15) of fault register (1-5)
in Flag (n).
49 READ_CWORD 053 Flag (n) 1-2 0-15 Read the value of control bit (0-15) of control word
_BIT (1-2) in Flag (n).
50 WRITE_AN_O/P 054 1-4 Register 000 Assign the value of Register (n) to selected Analog
(n) O/P (1-4). i.e 1000d = 10V.
51 TIMER1 057 000 000 000 Input = Flag no 92
Output = Flag no 93
Count = C701 * C702 ms
Count in multiple of 1ms. Maximum Timer 298 Hour.
52 TIMER2 058 000 000 000 Input = Flag no 94
Output = Flag no 95
Count = C703 * C704 ms
Count in multiple of 1ms. Maximum Timer 298 Hour.
53 TIMER3 059 000 000 000 Input = Flag no 96
Output = Flag no 97
Count = C705 * C706 ms
Count in multiple of 1ms. Maximum Timer 298 Hour.
54 TIMER4 060 000 000 000 Input = Flag no 98
Output = Flag no 99
Count = C707 * C708 ms
Count in multiple of 1ms. Maximum Timer 298 Hour.
55 DISPLAY_REG 061 X1 (1-10) Register 000 It will display the value of Register (n) to selected
(n) display number. It will be stored in EEPROM on
Power off mode.
Amtech

6-114
Sr. Command Op- DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 Description
No. Name Code
56 DISPLAY_FLG 062 X1 (0-7) Flag (n) 000 It will display value of selected Flag (n) on X1 bit
location.
57 LPF1 063 Register (n) Register Tc (0-100) Inputs = Register (m) and Tc (in mS)
(m) LPF Output = Register (n)
58 LPF2 064 Register (n) Register Tc (0-100)
(m)
59 LPF3 065 Register (n) Register Tc (0-100)
(m)
60 LPF4 066 Register (n) Register Tc (0-100)
(m)
61 JMPC 067 X (1-100) Flag (n) 000 If Flag (n) = 1, then JUMP to X Command no.
62 JMPNC 068 X (1-100) Flag (n) 000 If Flag (n)! = 1, then JUMP to X Command no.
• Range of n, n1, n2 and m are 0 to 114 for register and 0 to 99 for flag.
• Register 0 to 85 have Read and Write access. Register 86 to 114 are Read Only.
• Flag status is single bit locations, which is 0 to 99.
• Memory Locations for Registers and Flag status are different.
• X1 indicate Display parameter (M313 to M323)
• X indicates Command No.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-115
 In-built PLC Command Detail Description:
1. END (OPCODE  000)
This command indicates End of PLC program. Any command after this command (END) will not be
executed.
Input Command
000000000000

2. REG_LD (OPCODE  001)

This command is used to Load 16-bit signed value into selected register.

Example,
REG_LD Rn 32000
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
Input Command
001001032000
001  indicates Command OPCODE
001  indicates Register Number 1
032000  indicate 16-bit value (32000).

3. REG32_LD (OPCODE  002)

This command is used to load 32-bit value into 32-bit Register.
6
Example,
REG32_LD Rn
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 113)
32-bit register = value of Register (n) as a high byte and the value of Register (n+1) as a low byte.
Input Command
002001000000
002  Indicate Command OPCODE
001  Indicates Register Number 1
000  Not used
000  Not used

4. REG32_ST (OPCODE  003)

This command is used to store 32-bit value into Register.

Example,
REG32_ ST Rn
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 84)
High byte of 32-bit value will be store into selected Rn and Low byte of 32-bit value will be stored into
selected R (n+1).
Input Command
003001000000
003  Indicate Command OPCODE
001  Indicates Register Number 1
000  Not used
000  Not used

5. REGDEC (OPCODE  005)

This command is used to Decrement the value of selected register by one.

Example,
REGDEC Rn
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)

Amtech

6-116
6. REGINC (OPCODE  006)
This command is used to increment the value of selected register by one.

Example,
REGINC Rn
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)

7. COPY_REG (OPCODE  007)

This command is used to copy the content of one register (Rm) to another register (Rn).

Example,
COPY_REG Rn Rm
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
Rm = Register Number (0 to 114)

8. COPY_FLG (OPCODE  008)

This command is used to copy the bit status of one Flag (Fm) to another Flag (Fn).

Example,
COPY_ FLG Fn Fm
Where,
Fn and Fm = Flag Number (0 to 99)
6
9. SET_FLG (OPCODE  009)
This command is used to set the bit status of selected Flag (Fn).

Example,
SET_FLG Fn
Where,
Fn = Flag Number (0 to 99)

10. CLEAR_FLG (OPCODE  010)

This command is used to clear the bit status of selected Flag (Fn).

Example,
CLEAR_FLG_FLG Fn
Where,
Fn = Flag Number (0 to 99)

11. ADI (OPCODE  011)

This command is used for summation of immediate signed 16-bit value and Register.

Example,
ADI Rn 32000
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
Result will be stored in Rn. (Rn = Rn + 32000).

12. ADD (OPCODE  012)

This command is used for 16-bit summation operation of two registers.

Example,
ADD Rn Rn1 Rn2
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
Rn1, Rn2 = Register Number (0 to 114)
Result will be stored in Rn. (Rn = Rn1 + Rn2)

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-117
 13. ADD32 (OPCODE  013)
This command is used for 32-bit summation.

Example,
ADD32 Rn
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 113)
Register Rn as high byte and Rn+1 as low byte and it will be added to 32-bit register. Result
will be stored into 32-bit Register.

14. SUB (OPCODE  014)

This command is used for 16-bit subtraction of two registers.

Example,
SUB Rn Rn1 Rn2
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
Rn1, Rn2 = Register Number (0 to 114)
Result will be stored in Rn. (Rn = Rn1 – Rn2)

15. SUB32 (OPCODE  015)

This command is used for 32-bit Subtraction.

Example,
6 SUB32 Rn
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 113)
32bit Register = 32bit Register - Rn
Register Rn as high byte and Rn+1 as low byte and it will be subtracted from 32-bit register.
Result will be stored into 32-bit Register.

16. MUL32 (OPCODE  016)

This command is used for multiplication operation of two registers.

Example,
MUL32 Rn Rm
Where,
Rn and Rm = Register Number (0 to 114)
32bit Register = Rn * Rm.
Result will be stored in 32-bit Register.
Result should not be exceeding more then 32-bit value.

17. DIV (OPCODE  017)

This command is used for division of two registers.

Example,
DIV Rn Rn1 Rn2
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
Rn1, Rn2 = Register Number (0 to 114)
Result will be stored in Rn. (Rn = Rn1 / Rn2).

18. DIV32 (OPCODE  018)

This command is used for division of 32-bit value.

Example,
DIV32 Rn
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 114)
Result will be stored in 32-bit Register. (32bit Register = 32bit Register / Rn.)

Amtech

6-118
19. AND (OPCODE  019)
This command is used for logical AND operation between two bits of Flags.

Example,
AND Fn Fn1 Fn2
Where,
Fn, Fn1 and Fn2 = Flag Number (0 to 99)
Result will be stored in Fn. (Fn = Fn1 & Fn2)

20. NAND (OPCODE  020)

This command is used for logical NAND operation between two bits of Flags.

Example,
NAND Fn Fn1 Fn2
Where,
Fn, Fn1 and Fn2 = Flag Number (0 to 99)
Result will be stored in Fn. (Fn = ~(Fn1 & Fn2))

21. NOR (OPCODE  021)

This command is used for logical NOR operation between two bit Flags.

Example,
NOR Fn Fn1 Fn2
Where,
Fn, Fn1 and Fn2 = Flag Number (0 to 99)
6
Result will be stored in Fn. (Fn = ~(Fn1 | Fn2))

22. XOR (OPCODE  022)

This command is used for logical XOR operation between two bit Flags.

Example,
XOR Fn Fn1 Fn2
Where,
Fn, Fn1 and Fn2 = Flag Number (0 to 99)
Result will be stored in Fn. (Fn = Fn1 ^ Fn2)

23. XNOR (OPCODE  023)

This command is used for logical XNOR operation between two bit Flags.

Example,
XNOR Fn Fn1 Fn2
Where,
Fn, Fn1 and Fn2 = Flag Number (0 to 99)
Result will be stored in Fn. (Fn = ~(Fn1 ^ Fn2))

24. OR (OPCODE  024)

This command is used for logical OR operation between two bit Flags.

Example,
OR Fn Fn1 Fn2
Where,
Fn, Fn1 and Fn2 = Flag Number (0 to 99)
Result will be stored in Fn. (Fn = Fn1 | Fn2)

25. NOT_FLG (OPCODE  025)

This command is used for logical NOT operation of selected bit Flag.

Example,
NOT_FLG Fn Fm
Where,

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-119
 Fn and Fm = Flag Number (0 to 99)
Result will be stored in Fn. (Fn = ~Fm)

26. NOT_REG (OPCODE  026)

This command is used for logical NOT operation of selected Register.

Example,
NOT_REG Rn Rm
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
Rm = Register Number (0 to 114)
Result will be stored in Rn. (Rn = ~Rm)

27. WAND (OPCODE  027)

This command is used for 16-bit logical AND operation of selected two Registers.

Example,
WAND Rn Rn1 Rn2
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
Rn1, Rn2 = Register Number (0 to 114)
Result will be stored in Rn (Rn = Rn1 & Rn2).

28. WOR (OPCODE  028)

6 This command is used for 16-bit logical OR operation of selected two Registers.

Example,
WOR Rn Rn1 Rn2
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
Rn1, Rn2 = Register Number (0 to 114)
Result will be stored in Rn. (Rn = Rn1 | Rn2)

29. WXOR (OPCODE  029)

This command is used for 16-bit logical XOR operation of selected two Registers.

Example,
WXOR Rn Rn1 Rn2
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
Rn1, Rn2 = Register Number (0 to 114)
Result will be stored in Rn. (Rn = Rn1 ^ Rn2)

30. NEG (OPCODE  030)

This command is used for negative operation of selected Register.

Example,
NEG Rn
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
Result will be stored in Rn. (Rn = -Rn)

31. ABS (OPCODE  031)

This command is used for absolute operation of selected Register.

Example,
ABS Rn
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
Result will be stored in Rn. (Rn = ABS (Rn))

Amtech

6-120
Note: OPCODE no. 032 to 034 Reserved.

32. CMP_GT (OPCODE  035)

This command is used for compare application.

Example,
CMP_GT Fn Rn Rm
Where,
Rn and Rm = Register Number (0 to 114)
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
It will compare Rn and Rm, and if Rn is greater than Rm then it will set Fn (bit status) to 1.

33. CMP_LT (OPCODE  036)

This command is used for compare application.

Example,
CMP_LT Fn Rn Rm
Where,
Rn and Rm = Register Number (0 to 114)
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
It will compare Rn and Rm, and if Rn is less than Rm then it will set Fn (bit status) to 1.

34. CMP_GE (OPCODE  037)

This command is used for compare application.
6
Example,
CMP_GE Fn Rn Rm
Where,
Rn and Rm = Register Number (0 to 114)
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
It will compare Rn and Rm, and if Rn is greater than and equal to Rm then it will set Fn (bit
status) to 1.

35. CMP_LE (OPCODE  038)

This command is used for compare application.

Example,
CMP_LE Fn Rn Rm
Where,
Rn and Rm = Register Number (0 to 114)
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
It will compare Rn and Rm, and if Rn is less than and equal to Rm then it will set Fn (bit
status) to 1.

36. CMP_EQ (OPCODE  039)

This command is used for compare application.

Example,
CMP_EQ Fn Rn Rm
Where,
Rn and Rm = Register Number (0 to 114)
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
It will compare Rn and Rm, and if Rn is equal to Rm then it will set Fn (bit status) to 1.

37. CMP_NE (OPCODE  040)

This command is used for compare application.

Example,
CMP_NE Fn Rn Rm
Where,

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-121
 Rn and Rm = Register Number (0 to 114)
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
It will compare Rn and Rm, and if Rn is not equal to Rm then it will set Fn (bit status) to 1.

38. IF (OPCODE  041)

This command is used for condition application.

Example,
IF Fn
Where,
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
If Fn is 1 then it will go to IF loop otherwise it will execute the PLC code written after
ELSE command.

39. ELSE (OPCODE  042)

This command is used for condition application.

Example,
ELSE
If IF command condition is false then it will go to the ELSE loop. Otherwise it will execute the
PLC code written after END_IF command.

40. END_IF (OPCODE  043)

This command indicates end of IF and ELSE condition loop.
6 NOTE: END_IF command must be used after IF, ELSE command.

Example,
IF Fn IF Fn
……. OR ………
END_IF ELSE
………
END_IF

Note: Nested IF….ELSE…..END_IF statement is not supported.

41. JUMP (OPCODE  044)

This command is used for branch application.

Example,
JUMP Xn
Where,
Xn = Command Number (1 to 100)
It will JUMP to selected Xn Command number and start executing from there.

Note: OPCODE no. 045 Reserved.

42. READ_PSO (OPCODE  046)

This command is used to read PSO status in selected Flag Number.

Example,
READ_PSO Fn PSOm
Where,
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
PSOm = PSO number (1 to 7)

43. READ_PSI (OPCODE  047)

This command is used to read PSI status from inverter to In-built PLC.
For this, user must have to select below PLC option in Inverter parameters C101 to C106 and C114 to
C115.

Amtech

6-122
Example,
READ_ PSI Fn PSIm
Where,
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
PSIm = PSI number (1 to 8)

PSI SELECTABLE OPTIONS

FLAG NO
(C101 to C106 and C114 to C115)

28: PLC I/P 1

29: PLC I/P 2
READ PSI 30: PLC I/P 3
31: PLC I/P 4
BIT STATUS OF FLAG
32: PLC I/P 5
33: PLC I/P 6
34: PLC I/P 7
35: PLC I/P 8

44. WRITE_PSI (OPCODE  048)

This command is use to Activate PSI terminal function from In-built PLC. 6
PSI terminal have selectable options for PLC.

Example,
WRITE_PSI PSIFunction (m) Fn
Where,
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
PSI Function (m) = PSI Selectable option (1 to 41)
It will load bit result of selected flag into PSI selected option.
Note: User should take care; below selectable options should be use either in In-built PLC or in PSI parameters
(C101 to C106 and C114, C115) at one time.

45. WRITE_PSO (OPCODE  049)

This command is used to write PSO status from In-built PLC to Inverter.
For this, user must have to select below PLC option in inverter parameters C107 to C113.

Example,
WRITE_PSO PSO (m) Fn
Where,
PSO (m) = PSO no. (1 to 7)
Fn = Flag no. (0 to 99)

PSO SELECTABLE OPTIONS

FLAG NO
(C107 to C113)

26:PLC O/P 1
27:PLC O/P 2
WRITE_PSO
28:PLC O/P 3
29:PLC O/P 4 BIT STATUS OF FLAG
30:PLC O/P 5
31:PLC O/P 6
32:PLC O/P 7

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-123
 46. READ_MON_PARA (OPCODE  050)
This command is used to read the monitor parameter value into the selected Register Number.

Example,
READ_MON_PARA Rn ModId
Where,
Rn = Register Number (0 to 85)
ModId = Modbus Id of Monitor Parameter (0 to 115)
Reference: Serial guide Manual
Example,
to read parameter M104, Output Current ‘s Modbus id is 40004. So
ModId = 40004 – 40001 = 3

47. READ_STA_BIT (OPCODE  051)

This command is used to read bit status of Status Register in selected Flag Number.

Example,
READ_STA_BIT Fn StsRegNo BitNo
Where,
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
StsRegNo. = Status Register Number (1 to 2)
BitNo. = Bit Number (0 to 15)
6 48. READ_FLT_BIT (OPCODE  052)
This command is used to read bit status of Fault Code Register in selected Flag Number.

Example,
READ_FLT_BIT Fn FltRegNo BitNo
Where,
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
FltRegNo. = Fault code Register Number (1 to 5)
BitNo. = Bit Number from (0 to 15)

49. READ_CWORD_BIT (OPCODE  053)

This command is used to read bit status of Control Word Register in selected Flag Number.

Example,
READ_CWORD_BIT Fn CwordRegNo BitNo
Where,
Fn = Flag number (0 to 99)
CwordRegNo = Control Word Register Number (1 to 2)
BitNo. = Bit Number from (0 to 15)

50. WRITE_AN_O/P (OPCODE  054)

This command is used to set Analog Output or Analog Input by the use of selected Register value.
Register value should be in the range of 0 to 1000d. Where 0d will give 0Volt and 1000d will give
10Volt.

Example,
WRITE_AN_O/P PLCAOPn Rn
Where,
PLCAOPn = PLC analog output number (PLCAOP1 to PLCAOP4).
Rn = Register Number (0 to 114).

FOR ANALOG OPUTPUT:

Analog output will come according to selection of C201 to C204.
To get PLC analog output at VO1 terminal, one of the selectable options from 8:PLC A-O/P 1 to
11:PLC A-O/P 4 should be set at C201.

Amtech

6-124
FOR ANALOG INTPUT:
Analog Input can be given to Parameters A106, A108, A702, D204, and C603 & C604 from In-built
PLC by setting one of four PLC A-O/P options and using this command.

51. TIMER1 (OPCODE  057)

This command is used to set fix timing event for required application.

Example,
TIMER1
1 count = 1 ms
Final count = C701 * C702 (Parameter)
Flag Number 92 is Input Flag and Flag Number 93 is Output Flag for Timer1.
TIMER1 is down counter. It will start after Flag number 92 is set to 1.it will only work if 92 Flag number
is set otherwise it will stop counting.
When TIMER1 will become zero, Flag number 93 will be set. Maximum Timer is 298 hour.

52. TIMER2 (OPCODE  058)

Final count = C703 * C704 (Parameter)
Flag Number 94 is Input Flag and Flag Number 95 is Output Flag for Timer2.
Same as TIMER1.

53. TIMER3 (OPCODE  059)

Final count = C705 * C706 (Parameter)
Flag Number 96 is Input Flag and Flag Number 97 is Output Flag for Timer3.
Same as TIMER1.
6
54. TIMER4 (OPCODE  060)
Final count = C707 * C708 (Parameter)
Flag Number 98 is Input Flag and Flag Number 99 is Output Flag for Timer4.
Same as TIMER1.

55. DISPLAY_REG (OPCODE  061)

This command is used to display the Register value on Display Panel and save it to EEPROM on
Power OFF mode.

Example,
DISPLAY_REG X1 Rn
Where,
X1 is the Display Number of Display Panel, which are 1 to 10. (M313 to M322)
Rn = Register Number (0 to 114)
User can also display the value of Read only Register.

56. DISPLAY_FLG (OPCODE  062)

This command is used to display the bit status of Flag Number on Display Panel and save it to
EEPROM on Power OFF mode. Total 8 number of flag bit status can be shown.

Example,
DISPLAY_FLG Bitloc Fn
Where,
Bitloc = bit location (0 to 7) of shown parameter on Display Panel (M232)
Fn = Flag Number (0 to 99)

57. LPF1 (OPCODE  063)

This command is used for the low pass filter.

Example,
LPF1 Rn Rm Tc
Where,
Rn = Register number (0 to 85)
Rm = Register number (0 to 114)

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-125
 Tc = Time constant. (0 to 100)
Result will be stored in Rn.

58. LPF2 (OPCODE  064)

59. LPF3 (OPCODE  065)
60. LPF4 (OPCODE  066)
Same as LPF1.

61. JMPC (OPCODE  067)

This command is used for conditional Branch application.

Example,
JMPC Xn Fn
Where,
Xn = Command Number (0 to 100)
Fn = Flag Number (0 to 99)
If Fn (flag no) in equal to 1, then It will JUMP to selected Xn Command number and start
executing from there.

62. JMPNC (OPCODE  068)

This command is used for conditional Branch application.

Example,
JMPC Xn Fn
6 Where,
Xn = Command Number (0 to 100)
Fn = Flag Number (0 to 99)
If Fn (flag no) in not equal to 1, then It will JUMP to selected Xn Command number and start
executing from there.

Amtech

6-126
In-built PLC Applications
Example 1
This example is used to control three signals by the use of two PSI.
As shown here if PSI1 will become Active and PSI2 is Inactive then RUN status will become
Active.
If PSI2 will become Active and PSI1 is Inactive then JOGGING status will become Active.
If both are Active at the same time then Fault will generate.

XOR PLC1
(RUN)
PSI1
AND PLC3
PSI2 (FLT)

XOR PLC2
Jogging

Program Code:

To write PLC program from display panel, programmer should keep following points in mind.
6
1. There is a PLC Program mode in Display Panel, which is Mode-P.
In Mode-P there are total 10 groups from P101 to PA01. So user can write up to 100
commands.
2. User has to start PLC programming from P101, and then continue to the P110.
After reaching there if user still want to enter commands then he should go to another group
P201 and start writing commands from there, likewise he can write 100 commands.
3. Now before start PLC programming, user should have knowledge of the PLC commands and
op-code.
4. If you will come to the P101 you will find 12-digit value. Here first 3-digit from left
is for OPCODE of commands you want to use. Second, third and fourth 3-digit depends upon
which Command you are using.

Example,
047001001000
047 is opcode of READ_PSI command.
001 is for memory location of Bit number (Flag no.1), which is user memory.
001 is for PSI1 status.
000 is not used.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-127
 Input from Display Panel into P101 to PA01

Parameter No. PLC Command Description

P101 047001001000 Copy the PSI1 status into Flag no. 1.
P102 047002002000 Copy the PSI2 status into Flag no. 2.
P103 008003001000 Copy the bit status Flag no. 1 into Flag no. 3.
P104 008004002000 Copy the bit status Flag no. 2 into Flag no. 4.
P105 019001001002 AND operation between two Flags and result will be stored in flag
no. 1.
P106 022003003001 XOR operation between two Flags and result will be stored in flag
no. 3.
P107 022004004001 XOR operation between two Flags and result will be stored in flag
no. 4.
P108 048012001000 Write the Flag no.1’s result into the PSI's selectable option no. 12
which is Ext Flt (NO).
P109 048024003000 Write the Flag no. 3’s result into the PSI's selectable option no. 24,
which is RUN.
P110 048002004000 Write the Flag no. 4’s result into the PSI's selectable option no. 2,
which is Jog Select.
P201 000000000000 End of Program.
6
Note:
User can use 0 to 99 single bit locations for general application.
User has to set following parameter.
1. Enable PLC function from C312.
2. Select option 28 in C101.
3. Select option 29 in C102.
4. Select option 1 in C114.

Example 2
This application can be used when RUN is required after certain delay.
In this example when Digital input will be applied to PSI1, RUN will be activated after 5
seconds of delay. To keep RUN status active PSI1 should be applied permanently otherwise
RUN will become Inactive.

PSI1 Timer of 5 RUN

Seconds

Program Code:
Input from Display Panel into P101 to PA01.

Parameter No. PLC Command Description

P101 047001001000 Copy the PSI1 status into Flag no. 1.
P102 008092001000 Copy the bit status of Flag no. 1 into Flag no. 92.
P103 057000000000 Here 5000 count (C701*C702) has been loaded to the TIMER1.
P104 048024093000 Write the bit status of Flag to the PSI's selectable option number
24, which is RUN.
P105 000000000000 End of Program.

Note: User should consider fix format for TIMER COMMAND. There are 4 Timer commands. All are used as
same format.

Amtech

6-128
Example,
057000000000
057 is opcode for TIMER1 command.
Parameter C701 = 1
Parameter C702 = 5000
So, 1 * 5000 = 5000 count will be loaded in to timer1 (1 count = 1ms)
User has to set following parameter.
1. Enable PLC function from C312.
2 Select 28 no. Selectable option in C101.
3. C701 = 1 and C702 = 5000.
4. Select option 1 (Not Used) in C114.

Example 3
This example demonstrates how to use memory location (Register 0 to 114) for 16-bit value.

Program Code:
Input from Display Panel into P101 to PA01.

Parameter No. PLC Command Description

P101 001002000050 Load 16-bit Immediate value (50) into Register no.2
P102 054001002000 Content of Register no. 2 is copied to PLC A-O/P 1. Here 0d = 0
volt and 1000d = 10 volt
P103 001003000010 Load 16-bit Immediate value into Register no.3 6
P104 035001003002 It will compare two Registers. If Register 3 is greater then 2, than
flag no. 1 will be SET (1) otherwise it will reset (0).
P105 049002001000 Write the bit status of Flag no.1 into PLCPSO2.
P106 000000000000 End of Program.

Note: User should consider fix format for REG_LD COMMAND.

Example,
001002000050
001 is opcode for REG_LD command.
002 Register number 2(Memory location for 16-bit value.)
000050 indicate one signed 16-bit value. (Maximum value is 32767.)
User has to set following parameter.
1. Enable PLC function from C312.
2. Select 8 no. Selectable option in C201. Output will come on Vo-1 terminal.
3. Selects 27 no. Selectable option in C107. Output will come on PSO1 terminal.

Note: User can use 0 to 85 16-bit memory locations for general application. These are read and write memory
locations. From 86 to 114 memory location contains analog values of internal parameters, which are given in In-
built PLC Function’s manual. These memory locations are read only.0 to 114 16-bit memory locations and 0 to 99
bit memory locations both are different.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-129
 Example 4
This example is given to just demonstrate how to use 16-bit memory locations (Register 0 to
114) and 32-bit memory location.

Program Code:
Input from Display Panel into P101 to PA01.

Parameter No. PLC Command Description

P101 001001001000 Copy 16-bit Immediate value (1000) into Register no.1
P102 001002032000 Copy 16-bit Immediate value (32000) into Register no.2
P103 001003001000 Copy 16-bit Immediate value (1000) into Register no.3
P104 001004030000 Copy 16-bit Immediate value (30000) into Register no.4
P105 002003000000 It will take Register no 3 as high 16-bit and Register no 4 as low 16-
bit and save it to 32-bit memory location as 32-bit value.
P106 013001000000 It will take Register no 1 as high 16-bit and Register no 2 as low 16-
bit and form 32-bit value, which will be added to the content of 32-
bit memory location. Result will be saved to 32-bit memory location.
P107 003005000000 It will take high 16-bit of the content of 32-bit memory location and
store it to Register no 5 and low 16 -bit to the Register no 6.
P108 061001005000 It will display the content of Register no 5 on Display Panel. (M313)

6 P109 061002006000 It will display the content of Register no 6 on Display Panel. (M314)
P110 000000000000 End of Program.

User has to set following parameter.

1. Enable PLC functions from C312.
Note: There is only one 32-bit memory location is given.
During 32-bit load and store commands user should use only 0 to 84 16-bit memory locations.

Example 5
This application can be used to monitor feedback of analog voltage input 0-10Vdc by the use
of PLC on Display Panel.

Program Code:
Input from Display Panel into P101 to PA01.

Parameter No. PLC Command Description

P101 016094108000 Multiplication between Register 94 and 108 and result will be stored
in 32-bit memory location.
P102 001001000100 Copy 16-bit Immediate value (100) into Register no.1
P103 018001000000 Division between 32-bit memory location and register 1 and result
will be stored in 32-bit memory location
P104 003010000000 The value of 32-bit memory location is stored in Register 10 as high
and register 11 as low 16-bit value.
P105 028012010011 Word OR logic between Register 10 and 11 and result will be store
in Register 12.
P106 061001012000 Display Register 12 in PLC Display Number 1.
P107 000000000000 End of Program.

User has to set following parameter.

1. Enable PLC function from C312.
2. Register 94 contains FSV input, which is read only memory location.
3. Register 108 contains value of Panel Para8 (C708) which is used for multiplication factor,
and that should be change as per input quantity range.
Note: There is only one 32-bit memory location is given.
Amtech

6-130
 During 32-bit load and store commands user should use only 0 to 84 16-bit memory locations.

Example 6.
This application can be used to monitor feedback on FSV and convert it to other quantity by
the use of PLC and display on Display Panel to monitor up to certain limit and give trip
(External Fault).

Program Code:
Input from Display Panel into P101 to PA01.

Parameter No. PLC Command Description

P101 016094108000 Multiplication between Register 94 and 108 and result will be stored
in 32-bit memory location.
P102 001001000100 Copy 16-bit Immediate value (100) into Register no.1
P103 018001000000 Division between 32-bit memory location and register 1 and result
will be stored in 32-bit memory location
P104 003010000000 The value of 32-bit memory location is stored in Register 10 as high
and register 11 as low 16-bit value.
P105 028012010011 Word OR logic between Register 10 and 11 and result will be store
in Register 12.
P106 061001012000 Display Register 12 in PLC Display Number 1.
P107 035001012102 If Register 12 is greater than Register 102 then Flag number 1 will 6
be set
P108 048012001000 Status of flag 1 will be written to 12:EXT_FLT option of PSI's
selectable options.
P109 000000000000 End of Program.

User has to set following parameter.

1. Enable PLC function from C312.
2. Register 94 contains FSV input, which is read only memory location.
3. Register 108 contains value of Panel Para8 (C708) which is used for multiplication factor,
and that should be change as per input quantity range.

Note: There is only one 32-bit memory location is given.

During 32-bit load and store commands user should use only 0 to 84 16-bit memory locations.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-131
 Example 7

This application can be used to monitor feedback on FSV and convert it to other quantity. And
to take sample after every 1-second, 1-minute and 1-hour and display them on separate
Display Parameters.
Samples of 1-second and 1-minute will be reset but samples of 1-hour will be continuously
Increased to measure total input quantity.

Program Code:
Input from Display Panel into P101 to PA01

Parameter No. PLC Command Description

P101 016094108000 To find feedback.
P102 001001000100
P103 018001000000
P104 003010000000
P105 028012010011
P106 061001012000
P107 057000000000 Set Timer1 of 1 second
P108 009092000000 Start Timer1
P109 041093000000 1 second routine-
6 P110 010093000000 Find summation of 60 samples and store it into register 5
P201 012005005012
P202 006020000000
P203 043000000000
P204 001021000060
P205 037010020021 To check if 60 samples are taken
P206 041010000000 1 minute routine –
P207 010010000000 If 60 samples are taken then find the average value of feedback
register 5 and store it to register 6.
P208 017006005021 And again take other 60 samples from register 6 and add it to
P209 012007007006 register 7.
P210 001005000000
P301 001020000000
P302 006030000000
P303 043000000000
P304 001060000060
P305 037030030060 To check if 60 samples are taken
P306 041030000000 1 hour routine-
P307 010030000000 If 60 samples are taken then add value of register 7 to register 9.
And display register 9 on Display Para3 which indicate total input
P308 001030000000 quantity.
P309 012009009007
P310 061003009000
P401 043000000000
P402 001051010000
P403 037055009051 Whenever register 9 will be greater 10000 it will reset to 0 and
P404 041055000000 register 56 will be increased by one, which indicates that 10000 of
total quantity input. (If it is increased to 2 that will indicate 20000 of
P405 006056000000 total quantity input)
P406 001009000000
P407 010055000000
Amtech

6-132
Parameter No. PLC Command Description
P408 043000000000
P409 047025001000 If PSI is given then it will reset all Registers and total quantity input.
P410 041025000000
P501 001005000000
P502 001020000000
P503 001007000000
P504 001006000000
P505 001009000000
P506 001056000000
P507 00103000000
P508 061003009000
P509 061005056000
P510 043000000000
P601 061002007000 To Display values of registers.
P602 061004009000
P603 061005056000
P604 061006020000
P605 061007030000 6
P606 000000000000 End of program

User has to set following parameter.

1. Enable PLC function from C312.
2. Register 94 contains FSV input, which is read only memory location.
3. Register 108 contains value of Panel Para8 (C708) which is used for multiplication factor,
and that should be change as per input quantity range.
4. Select 28 no. Selectable option in C101.
5. C701 = 10 and C702 = 100. (10*100 = 1000 count for Timer1)

Note: There is only one 32-bit memory location is given.

During 32-bit load and store commands user should use only 0 to 84 16-bit memory locations.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

6-133
 Example 8
This application is to demonstrate Low Pass filter command.

Program Code:
Input from Display Panel into P101 to PA01

Parameter No. PLC Command Description

P101 063001094030 Input is Register 94(FSV) and Time constant is 030. LPF output will
be in Register 1.
P102 061001001000 Output is displayed on Display Para1.
P103 000000000000 End of program

User has to set following parameter.

1. Enable PLC function from C312.
2. Register 94 contains FSV input, which is read only memory location.

Amtech

6-134
CHAPTER-7: ELECTRONICS CIRCUIT BOARDS

Axpert-Eazy Series AC AC DRIVE has following electronics circuit boards.

7-1 Main Control Board

The Control Board PCA-2014A is a multipurpose board and specifically designed to meet the high-
end performance of the power electronics products like AC DRIVE, Front-end converter, PWM DC
Drive etc…

It uses 32-bit High-Performance Digital Signal Processor TMS320F2811. The control board
generates the necessary pwm control signals for AC DRIVE operation. It accepts various inputs from
different circuits, gate drive board and Digital Operation Panel (LCD Keypad Module) to generate the
necessary control and gate signals.

The TMS320F2811 (U1) is the heart of this board. It handles the user interfaces and core algorithm
and generates IGBT gate signals. The PCA-2014A is connected to PCA-2012 Display Card with RS-
485 link. PCA-2012 display various parameters of the drive.

7-2 Display Board

The unit is equipped with Digital Operation Panel (LCD Keypad Module) for the user interface. All
parameters of drives can be accessed from Digital Operation Panel. The Digital Operation Panel
consists of Display Board PCA-2012 and 8-keys. The display board uses 20x4 Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD).

It has LPC2368 ARM micro-controller. When interfaced with main control board PCA-2014A, this
becomes master and the main control boards works as slave. The master and slave communication is
based on RS-485 (Modbus-RTU Protocol). 7

7-3 Power Supply Unit

For 400V series
PCA-92A is used as Power Supply Unit. This unit provides the power to all boards in the drive. The
input to the power supply board is 350~800Vdc. The different outputs of the power supply board are
+15V/2.2A, -15V/0.5A, +5V/1A and +24V/0.5A.

For 500V and 600V series

PCA-125A is used as Power Supply Unit. This unit provides the power to all boards in the drive. The
input to the power supply board is 400~1200Vdc. The different outputs of the power supply board are
+15V/2.2A, -15V/0.5A, +5V/1A and +24V/0.5A.

7-4 IGBT Gate Driver Boards

PCA-1024 or PCA-1018A or PCA1029 are used for IGBT gate driving circuit. This is used to drive the
IGBT switches. Depending on the AC DRIVE size, different driver boards are used. It requires +15V
power supply. Main control board PCA-2014A provides the input gate pulse via wire interface or fiber
optic cable. In case of fault, it transmits the same to the main control board.

7-5 MOV, RC Snubber, SC & Bleeder Board

This is snubber board for the input diode. PCA-91 is a combination of R and C connected across the
dc bus. This board also includes Soft charge resister and MOV network to protect the unit against the
surge / voltage transients coming in the power lines. This is used up to AMT-055-4 rating.

7-6 Bleeder Board

For 400V series
PCA-83/85/86 Bleeder board equalizes the dc bus voltage across the series capacitors.
For 500V and 600V series

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

7.1
 PCA-123/124/127 Bleeder board equalizes the dc bus voltage across the series capacitors.

7-7 RC Snubber Board

PCA-82 is snubber board for the input diode. It is a combination of R and C connected across the dc
bus.

7-8 MOV Board

PCA-77 is connected at the input of the unit. It protects the unit against the surge / voltage transients
coming in the power lines.

7-9 Interface Board for Multiple Inverters Unit

The Interface Board PCA-2013A/ PCA-2049A is used when multiple inverter units are connected in
parallel. It uses 32-bit High-Performance Digital Signal Processor TMS320F2811.

This board has a facility up to five no’s of inverter units are connected in parallel. This board has an
eight channel of temperature measurement and five channel of three phase current measurement.

7-10 Thyristor Firing Board (PCA-152)

PCA-152 is used to control thyristors in half controlled rectifier. This board also has a MOV network to
protects the unit against the surge / voltage transients.

Amtech

7.2
CHAPTER-8: MAINTENANCE, INSPECTION AND PART REPLACEMENT

DANGER

Always wait at least 20 minutes after turning the input power OFF before starting inspection.
Wait at least 20 minutes after turning the input power OFF before starting work. Make sure that
the displays on the operation panel have gone out before removing the front cover.
Remove the front cover, and confirm that the “DC BUS CHARGE LED” on bleeder board has
gone out. Also check that the voltage between terminals L+1 or L+2 and L– is 15V or less before
starting the inspections.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.

Maintenance, inspections and part replacement must be done by a designated person.
(Remove all metal accessories such as watches, bracelets, etc., before starting the work.)
(Always use an insulation measure tool.)
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks and injuries.

Always turn the power OFF before inspecting the motor or machine. A potential is applied on the
motor terminal even when the motor is stopped.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks and injuries.

Do not use parts other than those designated for the replacement parts.
Contact your AC DRIVE dealer for replacement parts.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.

Never modify the product.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks or injuries or product failure.

CAUTION

 Vacuum the AC DRIVE with a vacuum cleaner to clean it. Do not use water or organic solvents.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires or damage. 8
 Do not megger the unit.
Failure to observe this could lead to damage to semiconductor devices.
8-1 Inspection items
The inspections must be carried out periodically according to the working environment and frequency
of use. If there are any abnormalities, the cause must be inspected immediately and countermeasures
taken.
8-1-1 Daily inspections

Inspection item Inspection details and work

Temperature/humidity Confirm that the ambient temperature is 0°C (32°F) to 50°C (122°F) for 400
Volt series Drive and 0°C (32°F) to 40°C (104°F) for 500/600 Volt series Drive,
and that the humidity is 95% or less with no dew condensation.
Oil mist and dust Confirm that there is no oil mist or dust in the AC DRIVE.
Abnormal noise and Confirm that there is no abnormal noise or vibration from the installation site or
vibration AC DRIVE.
Input power source Confirm that the input voltage and frequency are within the specifications
range.
Cooling fan Confirm that the cooling fan rotates normally and that no lint, etc. is stuck on it.
Indicator Confirm that all lamps on the operation panel light properly.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

8.1
 8-1-2 Periodic Inspections
Inspection item Inspection details and work
Appearance Check the state of dirt and dust on the vent or heatsink, and clean if
necessary.
Interior Check the state of dirt and dust on the PCB and inside the equipment, and
clean if necessary.
Terminal block Tighten the terminal block screws if loose.
Cooling fan Replace the fan every three years.
Electrolytic capacitor Confirm that there is no liquid leaking or sheath discoloration.
Insulation resistance Do not perform a megger test on the AC DRIVE. When doing a megger test
inspection on the external circuit, disconnect all wires connected to the AC DRIVE.
Encoder Confirm that there is no looseness or play in the bearings or couplings.
The bearings are durable parts. Life of bearing is approx. 10,000 hours at
6000rpm, and approx. 30,000 hours at 3000rpm.They must be replaced
periodically.

8-1-3 Inspection of spares

The inspection shown in above table must also be performed for spare AC DRIVEs that are left
connected but are not used in normal operation. The operation of the AC DRIVE must be checked
every six months by turning the power on.

8-2 Measuring devices

As the voltage and current on the input and output sides include high harmonics, the measured value
will differ according to the measuring device. When measuring with a device for commercial
frequencies, measure with the following circuits and noted measuring devices.
Input voltage: Moving iron type voltmeter or Rectifying voltmeter
8
Output voltage: Moving iron type voltmeter
Input / output power: Electrodynamometer type wattmeter

Amtech

8.2
CHAPTER-9: OPTIONS

Besides the standard features available in the Axpert-Eazy series AC DRIVE, which satisfies most of
the industrial applications, AMTECH offers its users a spectrum of optional products designed to
match their requirement.

The list of optional products offered by AMTECH herewith is all developed, field tested and
commissioned at various locations in India. A brief description of the option is given. Contact
AMTECH with relevant data to design one for you.

9-1 Green Power Technology

Non-linear loads like AC DRIVE, UPS, Converters etc. draw power from mains in a way, which
introduce harmonic currents into the mains. They behave like harmonic source, which feeds harmonic
to all the equipments, connected with the power source. IEEE STD 519: 1992; IEEE Recommended
Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power System states that it is the
responsibility of the consumer to curb this mains ‘Pollution’ at the source point itself within acceptable
limits.

AMTECH offers Input Harmonic Converter as a solution for this problem. As per the requirement and
acceptable limits of induced harmonics such converters can be tailor made for you. Contact AMTECH
for details on Input Harmonic Converter.

9-2 Output Sinus Filter

Output of any AC DRIVE is Sine PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) modulated at high frequency carrier
wave. When this kind of waveform encounters motor load, it tends to create very high dV/dt stress for
the stator winding. After a long time the stator insulation gets weakened up and ultimately the stator
flashover takes place. The problem is particularly severe in places where the location of motor and AC
DRIVE is at large distance. This happens because of the impedance mismatch between cable and
the motor surge impedance. This can reach as high as 1.9 times the DC bus voltage.

Output Sinus Filter helps to outcome this problem. The output after sinus filter becomes sinusoidal
and the Motor gets relieved from excessive dV/dt stress. Motor can be placed far away from AC
DRIVE. The motor loss due to harmonic heating also reduces considerably.

Output Sinus Filter also helps in controlling the EMI and RFI generated by the power cable and motor.
That means an added advantage for equipments operating with small voltages and high frequencies.
9
Contact AMTECH for details on Output Sinus Filter.

9-3 Input/ Output Filter

Input filter is installed before the converter stage of the any AC DRIVE to smoothen the current drawn
from mains power supply. This also improves the wave shape at the input, as the peak value of drawn
current is restricted and the mains transformer do not goes towards saturation.

Output filter with around 3% impedance helps in changing the characteristic impedance of the motor.
Now the AC DRIVE sees the output filter as the reflecting impedance and the filtering choke bears the
dV/dt spikes. Thus the dV/dt transient do not hampers the motor thereby increasing its insulation life
and reduced heating. Alternatively RC Filters and LC Filters and other passive component
combinations are also designed to suit a particular requirement. For sizing and best filter selection for
your system, contact AMTECH.

9-4 Metering

At times there may be need of monitoring the internal AC DRIVE data. Optional analog or digital
metering of AC DRIVE operating data like various voltages, currents, rpm etc can be provided in the
panel. For the AC DRIVE data, which can be monitored, and the extra hardware, contact AMTECH for
details.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

9.1
 9-5 Enclosure

Some applications may demand enclosures, which suit the environment where the unit is to be
installed. Protection against water or ingress or against some harmful ambient gas can be provided
within the scope of the manufacturer. The enclosure can be modified for required degree of protection
like IP54/ 55. Occasionally the shape and size of the enclosure can also be discussed for
incorporating the unit in some other predefined structure. Contact AMTECH for details on Enclosure
options.

9-6 Battery Backup AC DRIVE

For critical applications where the equipment can’t bare the stoppage due to interruptions in the power
supply or its complete failure, AMTECH offers battery backup AC DRIVEs. This is also applicable at
locations where the input power provided for AC DRIVE is DC. Contact AMTECH for details on
Battery Backup AC DRIVE.

9-7 Remote Operator Box

Remote box for operation from near the actual driven motor site can be provided for the user with
optional controls and displays. We remind you here that our standard keypad control box can be
taken up to 1000 feet without any problem. Contact AMTECH for details on Remote Operator Box.

9-8 EMI Filter

AC DRIVE output carries high frequency carrier wave generates electromagnetic radiations. AMTECH
offers EMI filters to minimize the affect of AC DRIVE generated EMI noise on other equipments, which
are microprocessor based, and are placed very near to such EMI sources.

9-9 Dynamic Braking Unit

Dynamic breaking up 100% of the unit rating can be provided for high inertia loads, which require fast
deceleration. The mechanical inertial rotating energy is converted into electrical energy and dissipated
at dynamic breaking resistors. Contact AMTECH for details on Dynamic Braking.

9-10 AC DRIVE Bypass

A bypass with Direct-On-Line or Star-Delta bypass start can be provided for motor at critical places
9 where the process cannot bear any eventuality arising out of AC DRIVE failure. Contact AMTECH for
the scheme of bypass and other details on AC DRIVE bypass option.

Amtech

9.2
CHAPTER-10: ENCODER SPECIFICATIONS

10-1 Applicable encoder specifications

An encoder is used as a standard Line Driver type for the speed detection. The applicable encoder
specifications are as below.

Item Specifications

Supply voltage 5VDC ± 0.25V

Output method Line driver type

Output signal voltage VH (signal high-level voltage): 2.5V or more, VL (signal low
level Voltage): 0.5V or less at input terminal of PCA-2014A/
PCA-2004A. (Differential voltage of A+, B+ in respect to A-, B-)

Supply current Note 1 Max. 200mA (including signal supply current)

Output signal 90° ± 30° phase difference signal (A phase, B phase) Note 2

Pulse output frequency Maximum output pulse frequency is 300kHz when the motor
rotates at the maximum speed.

10.2 Wiring example

An example of the connection with standard line driver type +5V operated encoder is shown below.

ENCODER PCA-2014A / PCA-2004A

0.75mm2 (AWG 18), 50m(164') or
less, 6-core twisted shielded cable

5V 5V
+5V +5V
Max
200mA
0V
0V COM
COM
2k2
+3.3V
A+ PA 470R
A Phase Pulse
1k5

A- PAN
2k2
+3.3V
10
B+ PB 470R
B Phase Pulse
1k5

B- PBN

TB1
Z+

Z-

Fig. 10-1
Note 1: In case the current requirement of encoder exceeds 200mA or variation in encoder count,
connect separate isolated power source to the encoder. Do not connect 5V and 0V of the power
source to +5V and COM of PCA-2014A/ PCA-2004A respectively.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

10.1
 ENCODER 0.75mm2 (AWG 18), 50m (164') or PCA-2014A / PCA-2004A
less, 6-core twisted shielded cable

5V 5V
+5V +5V
Max
200mA
0V COM
0V COM

5V 0V

POWER
SOURCE

Fig. 10-2

Note 2: A phase pulse and B phase pulse of input to the PCA-2014A/ PCA-2004A are given as bellow
when a motor rotates forward. A, B phase pulses mean differential voltages of A+, B+ against A-, B-.

VH

A Phase
Pulse
VL

VH

B Phase
Pulse
VL

90 Degree 90 Degree 90 Degree 90 Degree

Fig. 10-3

10

Amtech

10.2
CHAPTER-11: SERIAL COMMUNICATION SET-UP
The Axpert-Eazy Drive is equipped with a serial communication function using RS485 as a standard.
It acts as a Modbus slave in the network. The unit can be controlled with a host computer (master)
using this function.
The primary introduction of ModBus protocol is provided in the document. For detail information
please refer “Modicon ModBus Protocol Reference Guide PI–MBUS–300 Rev. J”.
11-1 Connection method
This network is configured of one host computer (master) and 1 to 32 max Axpert-Eazy units (slaves).
TB1 on main control board is used for the connection.
Refer to Chapter-2 Installation and Wiring for wiring the control signal and for the wiring methods.
The total length of the connected cable must be within 300mt (1000ft).
By using a commercially available RS485-RS232C converter or USB converter unit, the inverter can
be connected to a host computer equipped with a serial port or USB, such as a commercially
available personal computer.
The details of the TB1 terminal section are shown below.

TB1 RX
P15 0V VIN IIN VO2 IO1 CANH RUN PSI6 COM PSI2 PSI4 +24V PSO1 PSO3 COM PB PA +5V
FSV FSI 0V VO1 0V IO2 CANL STOP +24V PSI1 PSI3 PSI5 COM PSO2 PSO4 COM PBN PAN COM
TX

'RX' and 'TX' are used for serial

communication

RS232

RS232 RS232/RS485
RS485 Converter
VCC GND DATA+ DATA-

RX
PSO3 COM PB
PSO4 COM PBN
TB1
TX

Fig. 11-1
11-2 Connecting the host computer and Axpert-Eazy (1-to-1) 10
HOST HOST HOST
COMPUTER COMPUTER COMPUTER
(Master) (Master) (Master) 11

RS485 RS232 USB

RS232 USB
AXPERT AXPERT RS232/RS485 AXPERT USB/RS485
Converter Converter
EAZY EAZY RS485 EAZY RS485

TB1 TB1 TB1

Shielded twisted cable Shielded twisted cable

Fig. 11-2

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

11.1
 CAUTION

Separates the communication cable from the main circuit cable and other power cables.

A shielded twisted pair cable should be used for connecting TB1 and the host computer.
Connect the shielded twisted pair cable's shield to control earth.

When connecting the TB1 and shielded twisted pair cable, do not solder the wires, which are
exposed after the sheath is peeled off.

If the communication is distorted and not carried out properly because of noise, etc., connect
a ferrite core, etc., to the cable, and increase the noise resistance.

When connecting several Axpert-Eazy units, connect two wires to each TB1 terminal, and
couple the Axpert-Eazy units. An example of the connection is shown below.

11-3 Connecting the host computer and Axpert-Eazy (1-to-many units)

HOST
COMPUTER
(Master)

RS485

AXPERT AXPERT AXPERT AXPERT

EAZY EAZY EAZY EAZY
JP3 JP3 JP3 JP3

TB1 TB1 TB1 TB1

Shielded twisted cable

10 The details of the TB1 terminal section are shown below.

TX
COM RX
11
TB1

Shielded twisted cable Shielded twisted cable

To host computer
To next unit
or unit
Shield Connect shield to control earth

Fig. 11-3

Amtech

11.2
 CAUTION

Separates the communication cable from the main circuit cable and other power cables.

A shielded twisted pair wire should be used for connecting TB1 and the host computer.
Connect the twisted pair cable's shield to the control earth.

When using several slave units, set JP3 of last unit to ‘LD’ position to connect the terminating
resistors as shown in the Fig. 11-3.

When connecting the TB3 and shielded twisted pair cable, do not solder the wires, which are
exposed after the sheath is peeled off.

If the communication is distorted and not carried out properly because of noise. Connect a
ferrite core to the cable and increase the noise resistance. If required take other precautions
for noise resistance / reduction.

11-4 Communication specifications

Connection method : RS485, 2-wire type

Transmission distance : Total extension distance less then 300mt (1000ft)
Baud rate : Select from 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400bps
Transmission method : Start-stop synchronization, half-duplex communication
Frame configuration : Start - 1 bit
Data - 8 bits
Stop: 1 bit (with parity) or 2 bits (if no parity)
Parity: Select from none, odd or even
Error detection : Sum check, parity, framing
Communication protocol : Modbus-RTU communication
Number of stations : Set between 1 and 247

The default factory settings are shown below.

Parameter Parameter name Unit Value

C401 Baud Rate bps =4: 9600 10
C402 Station Number =1
C403 Parity =1: No Parity
C404 Response Time Sec =0.01
11
11-5 Introduction to Modbus
Modbus is a serial, asynchronous protocol. The Modbus protocol does not specify the physical
interface. The typical physical interfaces are RS-232 and RS-485. The Device uses the RS-485
interface.

Modbus is designed for integration with Modicon PLCs or other automation devices, and the services
closely correspond to the PLC architecture. This Device ‘looks like’ a Modicon PLC on the network.

1 Transactions on Modbus Networks

Controllers communicate using a master–slave technique, in which only one device (the master) can
initiate transactions (called ‘queries’). The other devices (the slaves) respond by supplying the

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

11.3
 requested data to the master, or by taking the action requested in the query. Typical master devices
include host processors and programming panels. Typical slaves include programmable controllers.

The master can address individual slaves, or can initiate a broadcast message to all slaves. Slaves
return a message (called a ‘response’) to queries that are addressed to them individually. Responses
are not returned to broadcast queries from the master.

The Query–Response Cycle

Device Address Device Address

Function Code Function Code

Query Response
from from
Eight Bit Eight Bit
Master Slave
Data Bytes Data Bytes

Error check Error check

The Query: The function code in the query tells the addressed slave device what kind of action to
perform. The data bytes contain any additional information that the slave will need to perform the
function. For example, function code 03 will query the slave to read holding registers and respond with
their contents. The data field must contain the information telling the slave which register to start at
and how many registers to read. The error check field provides a method for the slave to validate the
integrity of the message contents.

The Response: If the slave makes a normal response, the function code in the response is an echo
of the function code in the query. The data bytes contain the data collected by the slave, such as
register values or status. If an error occurs, the function code is modified to indicate that the response
is an error response, and the data bytes contain a code that describes the error. The error check field
allows the master to confirm that the message contents are valid.

The Two Serial Transmission Modes

Standard Modbus networks using either of two transmission modes:

10 1. ASCII
2. RTU (Remote Terminal Unit)

This Device supports only the RTU mode. Only the RTU mode is described in this document.
11 Both the master and slave must be configured in RTU Mode.

2 RTU Mode

When controllers are setup to communicate on a Modbus network using RTU (Remote Terminal Unit)
mode, each 8–bit byte in a message contains two 4–bit hexadecimal characters. The main advantage
of this mode is that its greater character density allows better data throughput than ASCII for the same
baud rate. Each message must be transmitted in a continuous stream.

The format for each byte in RTU mode is:

Coding System: 8–bit binary, hexadecimal 0–9, A–F

Two hexadecimal characters contained in each
8–bit field of the message

Amtech

11.4
Bits per Byte: 1 start bit
8 data bits, least significant bit sent first
1 bit for even/odd parity; no bit for no parity
1 stop bit if parity is used; 2 bits if no parity
Error Check Field: Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC)

2.1 RTU Framing

In RTU mode, messages start with a silent interval of at least 3.5 character times. This is most easily
implemented as a multiple of character times at the baud rate that is being used on the network
(shown as T1–T2–T3–T4 in the figure below). The first field then transmitted is the device address.

The allowable characters transmitted for all fields are hexadecimal 0–9, A–F. Networked devices
monitor the network bus continuously, including during the ‘silent’ intervals. When the first field (the
address field) is received, each device decodes it to find out if it is the addressed device.

Following the last transmitted character, a similar interval of at least 3.5 character times marks the
end of the message. A new message can begin after this interval. The entire message frame must be
transmitted as a continuous stream. If a silent interval of more than 1.5 character times occurs before
completion of the frame, the receiving device flushes the incomplete message and assumes that the
next byte will be the address field of a new message.

Similarly, if a new message begins earlier than 3.5 character times following a previous message, the
receiving device will consider it a continuation of the previous message. This will set an error, as the
value in the final CRC field will not be valid for the combined messages. A typical message frame is
shown below.

START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC Check END

T1-T2-T3-T4 8 BITS 8 BITS N x 8 BITS 16 BITS T1-T2-T3-T4

Field Note
Address Valid slave addresses are valid from 0 to 247. 0 is the general call address while 1 to
247 addresses are assigned to individual slave device.
Function Valid function codes are 1 to 255, Which also includes the exception codes. The slave
generates exception codes while it detects any error. In this the 8th bit of function
code is modified to 1 from 0.
Data Data field contains any hexadecimal number, which can have register address as well
as data. All the data addresses in Modbus are referenced to zero. The first
occurrence of data item is addressed as item number zero. For example,
1. The coil known as ‘coil 1’ is addresses as coil 0000 in the data address field 10
of Modbus message.
2. Coil 127 decimal is addressed as coil 007E hex (126 decimal).
3. Holding register 40001 is addressed as register 0000 in the data address field
of the message. The function code field already specifies a ‘holding register’ 11
operation. Therefore the ‘4XXXX’ reference is implicit.
4. Holding register 40108 is addressed as register 006B hex (107 decimal).
CRC Check The RTU mode uses CRC Checking for error free transmission.

Every byte of the query or response is followed by at start bit and parity or stop bits at the end. With
RTU character framing, the bit sequence is:

With Parity Checking

Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Parity Stop

Without Parity Checking

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

11.5
 Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Stop Stop

3. Data Access

3.1 Register Read and Write

The device parameter and data set information is mapped into a 4xxxx register area. This holding
register area can be read from an external device, and an external device can modify the register
values by writing to them.

All parameters have access for either reading or writing. The parameter writes are verified for correct
value, and for valid register addresses. Some parameters never allow writes, some parameters allow
write, and some can be modified at any time.

The register addresses that are not allocated to any device parameter or data set are invalid. No
reads or writes are allowed for these addresses. If there is an attempt to read or write outside the
parameter addresses, the Modbus interface will return an exception code to the controller.

Exception Codes

Below is the table of exception code generated by slave device.

Code Name Reason

01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command.
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS Address does not exist or is read/write protected.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE Value is outside min-max limits. Parameter is read-only.
04 SLAVE DEVICE FAILURE Reading a multiple parameter register, which includes one or
more read protected parameters.
06 SLAVE DEVICE BUSY Slave device performing other important operation and it
cannot give response. Try with query after sometime.

3.2 Data Update

The device designed for time-optimized, reliable data transfer between the Modbus network and the
master device.

This device supports three function codes of the general modbus protocol. They are as below.

10 Code Name Meaning

03 Read Holding Registers Read the binary contents of holding registers (4X
references) in the slave.

11 06 Preset Single Register Presets a value into a single holding register (4X reference).
When broadcast, the function presets the same register
reference in all attached slaves.
16 (10 Hex) Preset Multiple Regs Presets values into a sequence of holding registers (4X
references). When broadcast, the function presets the same
register references in all attached slaves.

Amtech

11.6
4. Multi Drop Serial Link Parameters

The different parameters available on ModBus network are listed in table.

The description of different columns as below:

Sr. No. – It shows the modbus register address corresponding to the variable. All read and write
queries are made using parameter number.

Parameter Name – It shows the name of parameter corresponding to register address. It gives an
idea about use of the parameter in application.

R/W – It gives information of accessing the parameter. R means the parameter is read only. W means
the parameter is writing only. If R/W is written then the corresponding parameter has full access for
read and write.

Abbreviation Access
R Read Only
W Write Only
R/W Read and Write

Unit – It shows the corresponding unit for the parameter. If the unit is not listed then the parameter
may be gain or constant.

Default – It shows the default value of parameter.

Min – It shows the minimum value of the parameter. Any attempt to write the value less then minimum
value is not allowed. Blank cell means minimum value of parameter is 0.

Max – It shows the maximum value of the parameter. Any attempt to write the value more then
maximum value is not allowed. Blank cell means maximum value of parameter is 65535.

Resolution – It gives the information about the resolution for the corresponding parameter. For
example any parameter has resolution 1 digit after decimal point then if user want to write 2.5 then
first multiply it by 10 and then send it as 25. Similarly 25 received as read then divide it by 10 so the
last result is 2.5.

Please consider following points Regarding Resolution:

Digits after Read Operation Write Operation 10

decimal Point
1 Received Value/10 Send Value * 10
2 Received Value/100 Send Value * 100
11
3 Received Value/1000 Send Value * 1000
4 Received Value/10000 Send Value * 10000

Please treat negative values in 2’s complement form.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

11.7
 Mode Mode Mode Mode
Mbus ID Mbus ID Mbus ID Mbus ID
/Group /Group /Group /Group
M101 40001 M201 40011 M301 40021 Fault 1 Type 40029
M102 40002 M202 40012 M302 40022 Fault1 VDC 40030
M103 40003 M203 40013 M303 40023 Fault1 Output Frequency 40031
M104 40004 M204 40014 M304 40024 Fault1 Output Current 40032
M105 40005 M205 40015 M305 40025 Fault1 Heatsink Temperature 40033
M106 40006 M206 40016 M306 40026 Fault1 Vry 40396
M107 40007 M207 40017 M307 40027 Fault1 MWH 40397
M108 40008 M208 40018 M308 40028 Fault1 Conduction Time 40398
M109 40009 M209 40019 M309 40083 Fault1 KWH 40399
M110 40010 M210 40020 M310 40084 Fault 2 Type 40034
M111 40096 M211 40090 M311 40085 Fault2 VDC 40035
M112 40097 M212 40091 M312 50000 Fault2 Output Frequency 40036
M113 40098 M213 40095 M313 40654 Fault2 Output Current 40037
M114 40099 M214 40092 M314 40655 Fault2 Heatsink Temperature 40038
M115 40100 M215 40093 M315 40656 Fault2 Vry 40400
M116 40101 M216 40094 M316 40657 Fault2 MWH 40401
M117 40102 M217 40103 M317 40658 Fault2 Conduction Time 40402
M218 40104 M318 40659 Fault2 KWH 40403
M219 40105 M319 40660
M220 41100 M320 40661
M221 41101 M321 40662
M322 40663
M323 40086

Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus

/Group ID /Group ID /Group ID
10 Fault 3 Type 40039 Fault 5 Type 40049 Fault 7 Type 40059
Fault3 VDC 40040 Fault5 VDC 40050 Fault7 VDC 40060
Fault3 Output Fault5 Output Fault7 Output
40041 40051 40061
11 Frequency Frequency Frequency
Fault5 Output
Fault3 Output Current 40042 40052 Fault7 Output Current 40062
Current
Fault3 Heatsink Fault5 Heatsink Fault7 Heatsink
40043 40053 40063
Temperature Temperature Temperature
Fault3 Vry 40404 Fault5 Vry 40412 Fault7 Vry 40420
Fault3 MWH 40405 Fault5 MWH 40413 Fault7 MWH 40421
Fault3 Conduction Fault5 Conduction Fault7 Conduction
40406 40414 40422
Time Time Time
Fault3 KWH 40407 Fault5 KWH 40415 Fault7 KWH 40423
Fault 4 Type 40044 Fault 6 Type 40054 Fault 8 Type 40064
Fault4 VDC 40045 Fault6 VDC 40055 Fault8 VDC 40065
Amtech

11.8
Fault4 Output Fault6 Output Fault8 Output
40046 40056 40066
Frequency Frequency Frequency
Fault6 Output
Fault4 Output Current 40047 40057 Fault8 Output Current 40067
Current
Fault4 Heatsink Fault6 Heatsink Fault8 Heatsink
40048 40058 40068
Temperature Temperature Temperature
Fault4 Vry 40408 Fault6 Vry 40416 Fault8 Vry 40424
Fault4 MWH 40409 Fault6 MWH 40417 Fault8 MWH 40425
Fault4 Conduction Fault6 Conduction Fault8 Conduction
40410 40418 40426
Time Time Time
Fault4 KWH 40411 Fault6 KWH 40419 Fault8 KWH 40427

Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus

/Group ID /Group ID /Group ID
Fault10 Output
Fault 9 Type 40069 Fault9 MWH 40429 40077
Current
Fault9 Conduction Fault10 Heatsink
Fault9 VDC 40070 40430 40078
Time Temperature
Fault9 Output
40071 Fault9 KWH 40431 Fault10 Vry 40432
Frequency
Fault9 Output Current 40072 Fault10 Type 40074 Fault10 MWH 40433
Fault9 Heatsink Fault10 Conduction
40073 Fault10 VDC 40075 40434
Temperature Time
Fault10 Output
Fault9 Vry 40428 40076 Fault10 KWH 40435
Frequency

Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus

/Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID
M601 41117 M613 41130 M701 41127 M708 41113
M602 41118 M614 41131 M702 41107 M709 41114
M603 41119 M615 41132 M703 41108 M710 41088
M604 41102 M616 41105 M704 41109 M711 41097
M605 41120 M617 41133 M705 41110 M712 41140
M606 41121 M618 41134 M706 41111 M713 41150
M607 41122 M619 41135 M707 41112 M714 41151 10
M608 41103 M620 41106 M715 41152
M609 41123 M621 41153
M610 41128 M622 41154 11
M611 41129 M623 41155
M612 41104 M624 41099

Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus
/Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID
A101 40111 A201 40119 A301 40127 A401 40132 A501 40142 A701 40293
A102 40112 A202 40120 A302 40110 A402 40133 A502 40110 A702 40294
A103 40113 A203 40121 A303 40128 A403 40134 A503 40143 A703 40295
A104 40114 A204 40122 A304 40110 A404 40135 A704 40296

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

11.9
 A105 40115 A205 40110 A305 40110 A405 40136 A601 40144 A705 40297
A106 40116 A206 40123 A306 40129 A406 40137 A602 40145 A706 40298
A107 40117 A207 40124 A307 40130 A407 40138 A603 40146
A108 40118 A208 40125 A308 40131 A408 40139 A604 40147
A109 40326 A209 40126 A309 40334 A409 40140 A605 40148
A110 40331 A210 40288 A310 41011 A410 40141 A606 40149
A111 40332 A607 40150
A112 40333 A608 40151
A113 41006

Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus
/Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID
B101 40163 B201 40173 B301 40184 B321 41053 B601 40152 B620 41017
B102 40164 B202 40174 B302 40185 B322 41054 B602 40153 B621 41018
B103 40165 B203 40175 B303 40186 B323 41055 B603 40154 B622 41019
B104 40166 B204 40176 B304 40187 B324 41056 B604 40155 B623 41020
B105 40167 B205 40177 B305 40188 B605 40156 B624 41021
B106 40168 B206 40178 B306 40189 B401 40190 B606 40157 B625 41022
B107 40169 B207 40179 B307 40330 B402 40191 B607 40158 B626 41039
B108 40170 B208 40180 B308 40110 B403 40192 B608 40159 B627 41001
B109 40171 B209 40181 B309 40108 B404 40193 B609 40160
B110 40172 B210 40182 B310 40107 B405 40194 B610 40161 B701 40201
B111 40162 B211 40183 B311 40109 B406 40195 B611 40208 B702 40202
B112 40303 B312 40290 B407 40196 B612 40209 B703 40203
B113 40652 B313 40291 B613 41002 B704 40204
B114 40653 B314 40292 B501 40197 B614 41003 B705 40205
B115 40305 B315 40324 B502 40198 B615 41004 B706 40206
B116 40306 B316 40325 B503 40199 B616 41013 B707 40207
10 B117 41005 B317 40307 B504 40200 B617 41014 B708 40328
B118 41008 B319 41051 B618 41015 B709 40329
B119 41049 B320 41052 B619 41016 B710 41007
11 B711 41047
B712 41048

Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus
/Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID
B801 41023 C101 40211 C201 40223 C219 40265 C301 40233 C319 41043
B802 41024 C102 40212 C202 40224 C220 40266 C302 40234 C320 41044
B803 41025 C103 40213 C203 40225 C221 40319 C303 40235 C321 41045
B804 41026 C104 40214 C204 40226 C222 40320 C304 40236 C322 41046
B805 41027 C105 40215 C205 40227 C223 41012 C305 40237 C323 41040

Amtech

11.10
B806 41028 C106 40216 C206 40228 C306 40238 C319 41043
B807 41029 C107 40217 C207 40229 C307 40110 C320 41044
B808 41030 C108 40218 C208 40230 C308 40110 C321 41045
B809 41031 C109 40219 C209 40231 C309 40239 C322 41046
B810 41032 C110 40220 C210 40232 C310 40110 C323 41040
B811 41033 C111 40221 C211 40257 C311 40289 C324 41057
B812 41034 C112 40222 C212 40258 C312 40327
B813 41035 C113 40321 C213 40259 C313 40302 C401 40309
B814 41036 C114 40322 C214 40260 C314 40335 C402 40310
B815 41037 C115 40323 C215 40261 C315 41009 C403 40311
B816 41038 C216 40262 C316 41010 C404 40308
C217 40263 C317 41041 C405 40110
C218 40264 C318 41042

Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus
/Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID
C501 40240 C601 40110 C614 40301 C701 40664 D101 40267 D301 40279
C502 40241 C602 40110 C615 40210 C702 40665 D102 40268 D302 40280
C503 40242 C603 40248 C616 40642 C703 40666 D103 40269 D303 40281
C504 40110 C604 40249 C617 40646 C704 40667 D104 40270 D304 40282
C505 40243 C605 40250 C618 40645 C705 40668 D105 40271 D305 40283
C506 40244 C606 40251 C619 40644 C706 40669
C507 40245 C607 40252 C707 40670 D201 40272 D401 40284
C508 40246 C608 40253 C708 40671 D202 40273 D402 40285
C509 40247 C609 40254 C709 40672 D203 40274 D403 40286
C510 40336 C610 40255 C710 40673 D204 40275 D404 40287
C511 40337 C611 40256 C711 40674 D205 40276
C612 40300 C712 40675 D206 40277
C613 40304 D207 40278 10

Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus
/Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID
11
E101 40454 E201 40461 E301 40506 E401 40476 E501 40521 E601 40491
E102 40455 E202 40462 E302 40507 E402 40477 E502 40522 E602 40492
E103 40456 E203 40463 E303 40508 E403 40478 E503 40523 E603 40493
E104 40457 E204 40464 E304 40509 E404 40479 E504 40524 E604 40494
E105 40458 E205 40465 E305 40510 E405 40480 E505 40525 E605 40495
E106 40459 E206 40466 E306 40511 E406 40481 E506 40526 E606 40496
E107 40460 E207 40467 E307 40512 E407 40482 E507 40527 E607 40497
E108 40641 E208 40468 E308 40513 E408 40483 E508 40528 E608 40498
E209 40469 E309 40514 E409 40484 E509 40529 E609 40499

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

11.11
 E210 40470 E310 40515 E410 40485 E510 40530 E610 40500
E211 40471 E311 40516 E411 40486 E511 40531 E611 40501
E212 40472 E312 40517 E412 40487 E512 40532 E612 40502
E213 40473 E313 40518 E413 40488 E513 40533 E613 40503
E214 40474 E314 40519 E414 40489 E514 40534 E614 40504
E215 40475 E315 40520 E415 40490 E515 40535 E615 40505

Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus
/Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID
E701 40536 G101 40551 G201 40566 G301 40581 G401 40596 G501 40611
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
E715 40550 G115 40565 G215 40580 G315 40595 G415 40610 G515 40625

Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus Mode Mbus
/Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID /Group ID
G601 40626 G606 40631 G611 40636 H101 40647
G602 40627 G607 40632 G612 40637 H102 40648
G603 40628 G608 40633 G613 40638 H103 40649
G604 40629 G609 40634 G614 40639 H104 40650
G605 40630 G610 40635 G615 40640 H105 40651

5. Description of Different Queries Used for communication

5.1 Read Single Parameter

This query is used for single parameter read. Total 8 bytes are transmitted. 3.5-character times delay
is provided at the start and end of the query for indication of starting and ending of query. The 3.5
character time is calculated as below.
If 9600 baud rate is used then

Delay = (3.5*11)/9600 = 4.01 mSec

For example if you want to read parameter 40003 (Output Current) then the format of query is as
10 below.

Byte Query Bytes Description

Number
11 1 01h First byte is the address of the modbus slave device referred as station
number.
2 03h Indication of read operation
3 00h Starting address High byte
4 02h Starting Address Low byte. Parameter 40003 is addressed as 0002h.
Byte 3 and 4 has right justified packed value of parameter number.
5 00h No of parameters High Byte
6 01h No of parameters Low Byte. If only one parameter is to be read then 01h
is used. More than one parameter can be read.
7 CRC Low CRC Low Byte
8 CRC High CRC High Byte. The High and Low bytes are reversed in CRC
transmission. The method of calculating CRC is described in the next
Amtech

11.12
 section.

If the query is received properly then the response is returned as below.

Byte Query Bytes Description

Number
1 01h First byte is the address of the modbus slave device referred as station
number.
2 03h Indication of read operation
3 02h No. of data bytes packed after byte 3.
4 01h Data Byte High
5 F4h Data Byte Low. Byte number 4 and 5 has right justified packed value of
the required parameter.
6 CRC Low CRC Low Byte
7 CRC High CRC High Byte. The High and Low bytes are reversed in CRC
transmission. The method of calculating CRC is described in the next
section.

The data received as packed data in bytes 4 and 5. Hence received value is 01F4h = 500d. So the
final value of the parameter is 500/10 = 50.0 because parameter 40003 has resolution of 1 digit after
decimal point.

5.2 Read Multiple Parameter

This query is used for single parameter read. Total 8 bytes are transmitted. 3.5-character times delay
is provided at the start and end of the query for indication of starting and ending of query.

For example if you want to read parameter 40001 to 40010 then the format of query is as below.

Byte Query Bytes Description

Number
1 01h First byte is the address of the modbus slave device referred as station
number.
2 03h Indication of read operation
3 00h Starting address High byte
4 00h Starting Address Low byte. Parameter 40001 is addressed as 0000h. 10
Byte 3 and 4 has right justified packed value of parameter number.
5 00h No of parameters High Byte
6 0Ah No of parameters Low Byte. For 10 parameters to be read then 0Ah is
used. 11
7 CRC Low CRC Low Byte
8 CRC High CRC High Byte. The High and Low bytes are reversed in CRC
transmission. The method of calculating CRC is described in the next
section.

If the query is received properly then the response is returned as below.

Byte Query Bytes Description

Number
1 01h First byte is the address of the modbus slave device referred as station
number.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

11.13
 2 03h Indication of read operation
3 14h Total 20 data bytes packed after byte 3.
4-23 20 Bytes Data Bytes are in the ascending orders of parameter number. First two
for 40001, next two for 40002 and so on.
24 CRC Low CRC Low Byte
25 CRC High CRC High Byte. The High and Low bytes are reversed in CRC
transmission. The method of calculating CRC is described in the next
section.

5.3 Write Single Parameter

This query is used for single parameter read. Total 8 bytes are transmitted. 3.5-character times delay
is provided at the start and end of the query for indication of starting and ending of query

For example if you want to write parameter 40096 then the format of query is as below. The range of
this parameter is 0.0 to 100.0. If the sending value is 40.0 then the transmitted value in query is 40.0 *
10 = 400 because this parameter has resolution of 1 digit after decimal. After converting to
hexadecimal it becomes 190h.

Byte Query Bytes Description

Number
1 01h First byte is the address of the modbus slave device referred as station
number.
2 06h Indication of single write operation
3 00h Starting address High byte
4 5Fh Starting Address Low byte. Parameter 40096 is addressed as 005Fh.
Byte 3 and 4 has right justified packed value of parameter number.
5 01h Data High Byte
6 90h Data Low Byte.
7 CRC Low CRC Low Byte
8 CRC High CRC High Byte. The High and Low bytes are reversed in CRC
transmission. The method of calculating CRC is described in the next
section.

10 If the query is received properly then the response is the echo of the query after the value is being set.

5.4 Write Multiple Parameter

11 This query is used for multiple parameters Write. 3.5-character times delay is provided at the start and
end of the query for indication of starting and ending of query.

For example if you want to read parameter 40084 to 40093 then the format of query is as below. Then
total 29 bytes transmitted.

Byte Query Bytes Description

Number
1 01h First byte is the address of the modbus slave device referred as station
number.
2 10h Indication of multiple write operation
3 00h Starting address High byte
4 53h Starting Address Low byte. Parameter 40084 is addressed as 0053h.

Amtech

11.14
 Byte 3 and 4 has right justified packed value of parameter number.
5 00h No of parameters High Byte
6 0Ah No of parameters Low Byte. For 10 parameters to be write then 0Ah is
used.
7 14h Total 20 data bytes transmitted after byte 7.
8-27 20 Data Bytes. Total 20 Data Bytes transmitted. First two for parameter 400084, next
two for 40085 and so on.
28 CRC Low CRC Low Byte
29 CRC High CRC High Byte. The High and Low bytes are reversed in CRC
transmission. The method of calculating CRC is described in the next
section.
If the query is received properly then the response is returned as below. The first six bytes are same
as query.

Byte Query Bytes Description

Number
1 01h First byte is the address of the modbus slave device referred as station
number.
2 10h Indication of multiple write operation
3 00h Starting address High byte
4 53h Starting Address Low byte.
5 00h No of parameters High Byte
6 0Ah No of parameters Low Byte.
7 CRC Low CRC Low Byte
8 CRC High CRC High Byte. The High and Low bytes are reversed in CRC
transmission. The method of calculating CRC is described in the next
section.

6. CRC Generation

The Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) field is two bytes, containing a 16-bit binary value. The CRC
value is calculated by the transmitting device, which appends the CRC to the message. The receiving
device recalculates a CRC during receipt of the message, and compares the calculated value to the
actual value it received in the CRC field. If the two values are not equal, an error results.
10
The CRC is started by first preloading a 16-bit register to all 1's. Then a process begins of applying
successive 8-bit bytes of the message to the current contents of the register. Only the eight bits of
data in each character are used for generating the CRC. Start and stop bits, and the parity bit, do not
apply to the CRC.
11
During generation of the CRC, each 8-bit character is exclusive ORed with the register contents. Then
the result is shifted in the direction of the least significant bit (LSB), with a zero filled into the most
significant bit (MSB) position. The LSB is extracted and examined. If the LSB was a 1, the register is
then exclusive Ored with a preset, fixed value. If the LSB was a 0, no exclusive OR takes place.

This process is repeated until eight shifts have been performed. After the last (eighth) shift, the next 8-
bit character is exclusive ORed with the register's current value, and the process repeats for eight
more shifts as described above. The final contents of the register, after all the characters of the
message have been applied, it the CRC value.

A procedure for generating a CRC is:

1, Load a 16-bit register with FFFFh hex (all 1's). Call this the CRC register.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

11.15
 2. Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the message with the low-order byte of the 16-bit CRC register,
putting the result in the CRC register.

3. Shift the CRC register one bit to the right (toward the LSB), zero-filling the MSB. Extract and
examine the LSB.

4. (If the LSB was 0): Repeat Step 3 (another shift). (If the LSB was 1): Exclusive OR the CRC
register with the polynomial value A001 hex (1010 0000 0000 0001).

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until 8 shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete 8-bit byte
will have been processed.

6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the message. Continue doing this until all bytes
have been processed.

7. The final contents of the CRC register is the CRC value.

8. When the CRC is placed into the message, its upper and lower bytes must be swapped as
described below.

Placing the CRC into the Message

When the 16-bit CRC (two 8-bit bytes) is transmitted in the message, the low-order byte will be
transmitted first, followed by the high-order byte. For example, if the CRC value is 1241 hex (0001
0010 0100 0001):

Data CRCLo CRCHi

Addr Func Data Data Data Data
Count 41h 12h

10

11

Amtech

11.16
7. Description of Parameters

This description provides primary information of some parameters like Fault Codes, Status Codes
and Command Word properties. For more parameters details read the Operating manual of AC
Drive.

The access of parameter is not allowed until the valid password verification process is carried out.
Please check out 40107(B310) and 40108 (B309) for more details on “How to handle the password”.

40029 – 40078 & 40396 – 40435. Fault History Parameters (Mode- M, Group- 4)

Value Fault Type Value Fault Type

0 No previous fault 70 IU-1 I-Unbalance Flt
11 Over Current 80 IU-2 I-Unbalance Flt
22 Drive Over Load 90 IU-3 I-Unbalance Flt
33 DC Bus Over Voltage 100 IU-4 I-Unbalance Flt
44 DC Bus Under Voltage 110 IU-5 I-Unbalance Flt
55 Adjustable Over Current 120 IU-1 Current Sensor Fail
66 Speed Deviation Fault 121 IU1V Current Sensor Fail
77 Output Phase Loss 122 IU1W Current Sensor Fail
88 Ground/ Earth Fault 123 IU1U Current Sensor Fail
99 Under Current 130 IU-2 Current Sensor Fail
111 Auto Tune Abnormal 131 IU2V Current Sensor Fail
222 Thermistor Over Temperature 132 IU2W Current Sensor Fail
333 External Trip 133 IU2U Current Sensor Fail
444 Over speed fault 140 IU-3 Current Sensor Fail
555 Comm. Loss (Digital Operation Panel) 141 U3V Current Sensor Fail
666 Eeprom Error 142 IU3W Current Sensor Fail
777 Emergency Stop 143 IU3U Current Sensor Fail
888 4-20mA Missing 150 IU-4 Current Sensor Fail
1111 U-p Current Sensor Fail 151 IU4V Current Sensor Fail
2222 Charging Fault 152 IU4W Current Sensor Fail
4444 Driver Fault 153 IU4U Current Sensor Fail
5555 Thermostat Over Temp 160 IU-5 Current Sensor Fail 10
6666 Thermistor Not Connected 161 IU5V Current Sensor Fail
8888 O/P Current Unbalance 162 IU5W Current Sensor Fail
10 IU-2 Temperature Flt 163 IU5U Current Sensor Fail 11
20 IU-3 Temperature Flt 190 V-p Current Sensor Fail
30 IU-4 Temperature Flt 200 W-p Current Sensor Fail
40 IU-5 Temperature Flt 271 IU-6 Temperature Flt
50 DU-1 Temperature Flt 272 IU-6 I-Unbalance Flt
60 DU-2 Temperature Flt 273 IU6U Current Sensor Fail
279 Ext Brake Ans Error 274 IU6V Current Sensor Fail
280 Thermostat Not Connected 275 IU6W Current Sensor Fail
281 Thermistor Short 278 Ext Brake RUN Error
277 Motor Over Load 282 Panel Temp Fault

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

11.17
 For example information about last fault is as below.

40029 – 33 (Fault Type – Over Voltage)

40030 – 900 (DC link Voltage when fault occurred – 900 V)
40031 – 320 (Output Frequency when fault occurred – 32.0 Hz)
40032 – 500 (Output Current when fault occurred – 50.0 Amp)
40033 – 44 (Heatsink Temperature when fault occurred – 44 ºC)
40396 – 415 (Vry voltage when fault occurred – 415 Vac)
40397 – 10 (Energy in MWH when fault occurred – 10 MWH)
40398 – 150 (Total Conductivity Time when fault occurred – 150 Hour)
40399 – 8001 (Energy in kWH when fault occurred – 800.1 kWH)

Information for the second last fault can be derived from 40034, 40035, 40036, 40037, 40038 and so
on.
If the new fault occurred in the system then it is stored at the first location and successive faults are
shifted below one position and last fault is discarded.

40079 (Fault Code1), 40080 (Fault Code2), 40083 (Fault Code3), 40089 (Fault Code4), 40084
(Fault Code5). Fault Codes
Access – Read Only
Resolution – 1
It gives information about the latest faults present in the system. If they are received as zero then
there is no fault in the system. This parameter has bit level information.

Bit Fault Code1 Fault Code2 Fault Code3 Fault Code4 Fault Code5
No. (40079) (40080) (40087) (40089) (41095)
Thermistor Over IU-2 Temperature IU1U Cur Sensor IU-6 I-Unbalance
0 Over Current
Temperature Flt Fail Flt
IU-3 Temperature IU1V Cur Sensor IU-6 Temperature
1 Drive Over Load External Trip
Flt Fail Flt
Communication
IU-4 Temperature IU1W Cur Sensor IU6U Cur Sensor
2 Over Voltage Loss (Digital
Flt Fail Fail
Operation Panel)
IU-5 Temperature IU2U Cur Sensor IU6V Cur Sensor
3 Under Voltage Thermistor Short
Flt Fail Fail
Adjustable Over DU-1 IU2V Cur Sensor IU6W Cur Sensor
4 Eeprom Error
Current Temperature Flt Fail Fail
Speed Deviation DU-2 IU2W Cur Sensor Reserved
5 Emergency Stop
Fault Temperature Flt Fail
Frequency Reserved
10 Output Phase IU-1 I-Unbalance IU3U Cur Sensor
6 Reference
Lost Flt Fail
missing
Thermostat Over IU-2 I-Unbalance U3V Cur Sensor Reserved
7 Earth Fault
Temp Flt Fail
11 8 Under Current Thermistor NC
IU-3 I-Unbalance IU3W Cur Sensor Reserved
Flt Fail
Auto Tune IU-4 I-Unbalance IU4U Cur Sensor Reserved
9 Thermostat NC
Abnormal Flt Fail
V-p Cur Sensor O/P current IU-5 I-Unbalance IU4V Cur Sensor Reserved
10
Fail unbalance Flt Fail
U-p Cur Sensor Ext Brake RUN IU-1 Current IU4W Cur Sensor Reserved
11
Fail Error Sensor Fail Fail
Ext Brake Ans IU-2 Current IU5U Cur Sensor Reserved
12 Charging Fault
Error Sensor Fail Fail
W-p Cur Sensor IU-3 Current IU5V Cur Sensor Reserved
13 Motor Over Load
Fail Sensor Fail Fail
IU-4 Current IU5W Cur Sensor Reserved
14 Driver Fault Panel Temp Fault
Sensor Fail Fail
Amtech

11.18
 IU-5 Current
15 Over Speed Fault Reserved Reserved Reserved
Sensor Fail

For example if the bit 0 of 40080 is 1 then the Thermistor Over Temperature fault has occurred.

40081– 40082. Status Codes

Access – Read Only
Resolution – 1

It contains information about current status of the system. It has bit level information.

Bit No Status Code1 (40081) Status Code2 (40082)

0 Normal Run Accel1/Accel2 (0/1)
1 Drive Stopped Start Delay
2 Acceleration Jogging
3 Deceleration Fault
4 Auto Tuning Auto Restart
5 Speed Search Auxiliary Drive
6 DC Breaking Emergency Stop
7 Motor Direction Password
8 Current Limit Factory Password
9 Power Off RUN
10 PLCT Contact Amtech
11 Voltage Limit KEB active
12 Torque Mode Reserved
13 Precharge Complete Reserved
14 Sleep mode Reserved
15 Auto Tune select Reserved

40110. Control Word

Access – Read/Write
Resolution – 1

It contains information about system configuration. It has bit level information. 10

Bit Status Description WP
No
0 S Curve Selection This will enable the s-curve shape during acceleration
11
(A205) /deceleration.
= 0: Disable = 1: Enable
1 Ramp Down/Coast to Select the stop method.
Stop (A304) = 0: Ramp down to stop =1: Coast to stop
2 Motor Direction (A305) Select direction of motor rotation.
= 0: Forward = 1: Reverse
3 Auto Torque Boost When automatic torque boost is selected, the R1 drop
(A502) compensation and slip compensation functions will be valid.
= 0: Disable = 1: Enable
4 Open Phase Protection Output open-phase is detected if one phase current is <5%
(C307) and other two phase currents are >10% of motor rated

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

11.19
 current, when this protection is enabled.
= 0: Disable = 1: Enable
5 Speed Search (C504) Enable or disable the speed Search operation.
= 0: Disable = 1: Enable
6 PID Enable (C601) Enable or disable the PID control action.
= 0: Disable = 1: Enable
7 DC Bus Control When enabled, it will control the deceleration time to prevent
the over voltage during deceleration condition.
= 0: Disable = 1: Enable
8 PID Polarity (C602) This can be used to invert the PID output.
= 0: Negative = 1: Positive
9 Temperature Control This parameter controls the automatic change of the carrier
selection (C310) frequency in case of temperature rise above the predefined
level.
= 0: Disable = 1: Enable
10-11 Reserved
12 Reverse Direction Lock Set this to prevent unintentional reverse direction operation.
(B308) When enabled, ensure that forward direction is selected in
A305 (or at terminal). The AC DRIVE will not start otherwise.
= 0: Disable = 1: Enable
13 Maintained/Momentary When using terminal start/ stop facility, this parameter gives
Start (A302) the choice of having maintained or momentary contacts for
start or stop.
= 0: The start control maintained type
= 1: The start/ stop control momentary type.
14 Display Loss Detect Enable or disable the operation panel communication loss
Enable (C405) fault. If enabled, AC DRIVE will generate fault if it does not
receive any response from the operation panel within
100msec.
= 0: Disable = 1: Enable
15 Timer output Enable Set the ON/OFF control for the timer output.
(C308) = 0: ON only when AC DRIVE is ON
= 1: ON whenever power is ON

40497. Command Word

Access – Write Only
10 Resolution – 1

This parameter is used to start and stop the AC Drive.

Value Action
11
100 Start Drive
200 Stop Drive or Rest fault when fault is present

Amtech

11.20
CHAPTER-12: UL INSTRUCTIONS

The Axpert-Eazy Series AC Variable Frequency Drives AMT-055-4 to AMT-355-4 complies with
UL508C and CSA C22.2 No.14.

The UL and cUL marks are indicated on the rating nameplate for UL compliant parts.

Observe the following matters when using the inverter as an UL/cUL Standard compatible product.

(1) Use the inverter in an installation environment, where maximum surrounding air temperature does
not exceed 50 Degree C.

(2) For the main circuit connected to the inverter, use a "75°C CU" "voltage rating 600V or higher"
copper wire.

(3) Use the wire sizes given in Table 2-1 for the main circuit wiring. Use a UL/CSA Listed round crimp
terminal, which matches the wire diameter for the terminal connection. Crimp the crimp terminal
with a crimping tool recommended by the maker.

(4) When wiring the circuit, tighten with the torque given in Table 2-1.

(5) Always provide a UL Certified fuse on the input side of the inverter. When protected by Class fuse
as indicated below, these devices have the following short circuit rating.
Table 12-1
Model Rated Normal Rated Heavy Fuse Rating Fuse Class Short circuit
AMT-xxx-4 Duty Current Duty Current (A rms) current
(Amp) (Amp)
055 104 87 150A, 600VAC Class J 10,000A
075 147 110 200A, 600VAC Class J 10,000A
090 175 147 250A, 600VAC Class J 10,000A
110 215 175 300A, 600VAC Class J 10,000A
132 245 215 350A, 600VAC Class J 10,000A
160 320 245 400A, 600VAC Class J 18,000A
200 360 320 500A, 600VAC Class J 18,000A 12
250 470 360 600A, 600VAC Class J 18,000A
315 530 470 700A, 600VAC Class T 30,000A
355 600 530 800A, 600VAC Class T 30,000A

(6) Install the inverter as “open type equipment".

(7) The installation environment must satisfy "pollution degree 2".

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

12.1
 (8) The inverter has a motor overload protection function. Refer to Chapter 6, and set correctly
parameters B301 to B305.

(9) Integral solid-state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit
protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electric Code and any additional local
codes or equivalent.

12

Amtech

12.2
CHAPTER-13: CE MARKING

The Axpert-Eazy Series AC Drive complies with the EMC Directives and Low Voltage Directives.
Observe the following matters when using the inverter as an EMC Directive compliant product.

This Instruction details how to meet the EMC directives (89/336/EEC) with Axpert-Eazy. It is important
to understand before installation and operation of drive. The Axpert-Eazy is designed to meet the
EMC directives and are suitable for use in the Industrial Environments. These drives have been tested
with the power cables and control leads connected as shown in Fig. 13-1. If these drives are
connected with fewer control leads than these examples, it may be possible to reduce installation
costs by using ordinary cables rather than screened cables which are recommend in this manual. It is
strongly advised however that a compliance test should be performed under the actual operating
conditions to certify that the system complies with the relevant EMC requirements. If the drives are
used with any of the optional cards, you must provide suitable extra measures and must certify
through a test that the product, system or installation complies with the relevant EMC requirements.

This instruction also details how to use filters for the installation where the drives are installed as
stand-alone equipment without being fitted into any enclosure, and the installation where the drives
are installed inside a metal enclosure.

WARNING

This manual represents Amtech's recommendations based on its understanding of the EMC
regulations only and Amtech cannot accept responsibility for any legal problems arising from or in
connection with the use of its products.

Amtech have made every effort to ensure that their products comply with the directives laid out in
the certificate of conformity, which is supplied with each drive. In the case of EMC, the testing has
been carried out using the filters, which are recommended for each product.

The EMC directives set out immunity requirements for the electrical drive (ability to work properly
without being affected by external electromagnetic disturbance), in addition to the previously enforced
emission requirements (electromagnetic disturbance generated by the electrical drive).

In addition to the radiated noise directly generated from the drive and its connected cables, the
emission requirement includes the conducted noise, which is conducted outside the drive through the
input cables.

Immunity is the ability of a drive to operate properly without being affected by an external disturbance.

The EMC compliance is only achieved when the drive's immunity level exceeds its emission level
under its operating environment.

In addition to the immunity against a radiated and conducted disturbance, the EMC directive also
requires of the drive the immunity against static electricity discharges and fast transients.

A human body can easily be charged with static electricity by merely walking on carpet and with a
mere touch on the drive, this static electricity will be discharged through it. A discharging spark can be
at such a magnitude that it can damage the drive.

A drive which is installed near cables connected to a switching inductive load can often operate
incorrectly due to a fast transient induced on its control leads at a switching of the inductive load.

These are just a few examples of disturbance to which the drive is exposed, and the drive is now
required to operate correctly without being affected by such disturbance. 13

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

13.1
 13-1 Installation environments
The Axpert-Eazy conforms to the EN 61800-3 Category C3. Installing Axpert-Eazy with stand-alone is
recommended to use in Industrial Environment, ensure that no device or equipment is installed
adjacent to the drive that is intended for the Residential, Commercial and Light Industrial
Environments only, as interference with such equipment may occur.

13-2 Input filters and their connections

WARNING

Electrical shock hazards. The input filter terminals must be fully covered with appropriate
insulation material to avoid electrical shocks.

Electrical shock hazards. The input filters must be fully earthed. Otherwise, there may be a risk of
electrical shocks and the effectiveness of filters will be impaired.

In most cases, the input filter should be installed as closely, approximately 0.5 meter (20”) to the drive
as possible to ensure its effectiveness. This may be changed, if, for instance, a complete system is
filtered in its entirety. In this case, the whole system would require testing to ensure EMC compliance.

Ensure that the input filter is securely and effectively earthed. If the drive is installed on a metal plate,
install the filter on the same plate and then earth the plate. This is effective to reduce EMI.

13-3 Wiring & Earthing

Select the input cables from those specified in the manual

The output cable from the drive must be screened or armored and the screen or armor must be
connected to the earth as shown in fig. 13-1

Ensure that the input and output cable are not installed in parallel to each other. Keep them apart
from each other by at least 0.5 meter (20”)

Ensure that the screen of the output cable is earthed at both ends with one end connected to the
drive’s earth terminal and the other end to the motor earth

Arrange the termination at the drives end inside the enclosure. If it is not possible to terminate the
cables inside the enclosure then terminate them as closely to the drive’s conduit hole as possible
(preferably within 0.1 meter (4”))

If the screened output cables are over 5 meters (16.6’), this may cause a problem arising from a
floating capacitance, such as undesirable surge voltage increase at the motor terminals, electrical
noises from the cables when they discharge capacitance, or increase in leakage currents. In this
case, it is recommend to use output chokes
2

Use a 0.13mm (AWG 26) to 0.8mm² (AWG 18) wire for wiring to the control circuit and should be
screened if they are used for a speed setting circuitry, analogue signal circuitry for metering, or
relay signal circuitry. The screen should be connected to the drive's earth or COM terminal only
(refer to Fig. 13-1)

Control cables should be selected in accordance with the instructions in the drive's manual. The
control leads should be wired away from the power cables. If it is not possible, cross them at the
right angle, and if they are laid down alongside each other, ensure to separate them by at least
0.5 meter (20”)

When the section, which runs along the power cables, exceeds 10 meter (33.3’), separate them
further more. The control cables should not share the same conduit hole of the drive with the
power cables. Separate analogue control leads from relay control leads

To reduce emission and to increase immunity, ensure that no control cables are connected that is
13 not used. Also, wire them in such manner that they are as short as possible

Put the relay signal controller and analog speed-setting controller, analog signal meters in a metal
box

Keep the earthing cable of drive, motor and filter as short as possible and is installed in
accordance with the local requirements. Use low impedance earthing cables

Amtech

13.2

If the motor does not share the same earth post with the drive and filter, do not connect the
screen / earth cable of the drive’s output cable to the motor

AC Supply
L1
L2 EMI FILTER
L3

Earth
E

U Screened or armored motor

V cable
W
E
Motor
Inverter

RUN
Screened cable
RY0
FA/FC

FSV or VIN Screened cable

COM

FSI or IIN Metal box

Screened cable
COM

VO1 or VO2
COM Screened cable

IO1 or IO2
COM Screened cable

Fig. 13-1 Installation (Stand-alone)

13-4 Considerations to measuring devices

All the cables and leads connected to the drive or filter should be regarded as active sources of
electrical noise. For inspection or service, use measuring devices or equipment that are CE marked. If
they require an external power supply, use one, which is separate or well insulated from that of the
drive system.

Even for a system that comprises CE marked equipment and devices only, an EMC compliance test
may be required if the whole system is exported from one country to another. Ask the local
government for details.

13-5 Installation into a metal cabinet

13
(1) Install the drive unit in a metal cabinet and put the EMI filter on the power source cable as shown
in Fig. 13-2.
(2) The power source cable and motor cable outside the metal cabinet should be shielded and as
shortest as possible. Electrically connect the shield to the earth terminal of the motor.

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

13.3
 (3) It is not necessary to use shielded cables for the control circuit wiring inside the metal cabinet.
However, make the EMI filter power source cable and the motor cable as short as possible, and
separate them as far from each other as possible.
(4) In order to suppress the noise emission from the cables, earth the shield of the power source
cable and motor cable to the metal cabinet with metal clamps.
(5) Use the shielded cables for the drive control wiring and earth the shield to the metal cabinet with a
metal clamp.

EN 61800-3 Category C3 conformity is achieved by grounding the unit to the metal cabinet.

Metal cabinet

Shield grounded metal for

EMC correspondence
Inverter

Copper plate

E
EMI filter
EMI

MI

A shield part is clamped certainly.

Power cable
Screened
control cable Screened motor cable

Fig.13-2

13

Amtech

13.4
 Metal Cabinet
Cabinet
AC Supply

L1
EMI L2 Screened or armored
filter L3 Power Cable
Earth
E

U Screened or armored
V motor cable
W
E
Motor
Inverter

RUN
RY0 Screened cable
FA/FC

FSV or VIN Screened cable

COM

FSI or IIN
COM
Screened cable Metal box
VO1 or VO2
COM Screened cable

IO1 or IO2
COM Screened cable

Fig. 13-3

13-6 Insulation test

CAUTION

If an insulation test is performed on a system incorporating Eazy drive and filters, remove the
input filters from the system during the test. (For precautions for drive, see Chapter 2.)

Perform the test at the maximum voltage of 1500 VAC.

13

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

13.5
 This page is intentionally left blank

13

Amtech

13.6
 Appendix-A: Standard Specifications

Power Source 380 ~ 480VAC, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, 50/ 60 Hz

Tolerance Voltage tolerance: -15%, +10%, Frequency tolerance: ±5%
AMT-XXX-4 037 045 055 075 090 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 630 710 800 900 11E 14E 15E 18E

Rated Capacity (Hp) 50 60 75 100 125 150 175 215 275 335 420 475 535 600 670 845 950 1075 1200 1500 1875 2075 2415
Normal Duty

Max Continuous Rated

72 87 110 147 175 215 245 320 360 470 530 600 704 800 844 1067 1205 1440 1613 1992 2500 2700 3200
Current (A) (Note: 1)
Max Applicable Motor
37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 630 710 800 900 1120 1400 1550 1800
(kW) (Note: 2)
Overload Current Rating 120% for 60 seconds, 140% for 2.5 seconds every 5 minutes
Rated Capacity (Hp) 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 175 215 275 335 420 475 535 600 670 845 950 1075 1200 1500 1875 2075
Heavy Duty

Max Continuous Rated

60 72 87 110 147 175 215 245 320 360 470 530 600 704 800 844 1067 1205 1440 1613 1992 2500 2700
Current (A) (Note: 1)
Max Applicable Motor
30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 630 710 800 900 1120 1400 1550
(kW) (Note: 2)
Overload Current Rating 150% for 60 seconds, 175% for 2.5 seconds every 5 minutes
Power Source 500 ~ 575VAC, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, 50/ 60 Hz
Tolerance Voltage tolerance: -15%, +10%, Frequency tolerance: ±5%
AMT-XXX-5 037 045 055 075 090 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 630 710 900 10E 12E 14E 15E 18E

Rated Capacity (Hp) 50 60 75 100 125 150 175 215 275 335 420 475 535 600 670 845 950 1200 1340 1675 1875 2075 2415
Normal Duty

Max Continuous Rated

54 73 87 110 135 150 175 215 290 345 390 430 485 540 670 720 950 1060 1335 1400 1680 1720 2050
Current (A) (Note: 1)
Max Applicable Motor
37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 630 710 900 1000 1250 1400 1550 1800
(kW) (Note: 2)
Overload Current Rating 120% for 60 seconds, 140% for 2.5 seconds every 5 minutes
Rated Capacity (Hp) 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 175 215 275 335 420 475 535 600 670 845 950 1200 1340 1675 1875 2075
Heavy Duty

Max Continuous Rated

46 54 73 87 110 135 150 175 215 290 345 390 430 485 540 670 720 950 1060 1335 1400 1680 1720
Current (A) (Note: 1)
Max Applicable Motor
30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 630 710 900 1000 1250 1400 1550
(kW) (Note: 2)
Overload Current Rating 150% for 60 seconds, 175% for 2.5 seconds every 5 minutes
Power Source 600 ~ 690VAC, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, 50/ 60 Hz
Tolerance Voltage tolerance: -15%, +10%, Frequency tolerance: ±5%
AMT-XXX-6 037 045 055 075 090 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 630 710 900 10E 12E 14E 17E 18E 21E

Rated Capacity (Hp) 50 60 75 100 125 150 175 215 275 335 420 475 535 600 670 845 950 1200 1340 1675 1875 2275 2415 2815
Normal Duty

Max Continuous Rated

46 54 72 87 110 135 150 175 215 290 345 387 426 482 537 662 713 941 1058 1327 1396 1680 1720 2050
Current (A) (Note: 1)
Max Applicable Motor
37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 630 710 900 1000 1250 1400 1700 1800 2100
(kW) (Note: 2)
Overload Current Rating 120% for 60 seconds, 140% for 2.5 seconds every 5 minutes
Rated Capacity (Hp) 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 175 215 275 335 420 475 535 600 670 845 950 1200 1340 1675 1875 2275 2415
Heavy Duty

Max Continuous Rated

37 46 54 72 87 110 135 150 175 215 290 345 387 426 482 537 662 713 941 1058 1327 1396 1680 1860
Current (A) (Note: 1)
Max Applicable Motor
30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 630 710 900 1000 1250 1400 1700 1800
(kW) (Note: 2)
Overload Current Rating 150% for 60 seconds, 175% for 2.5 seconds every 5 minutes

13

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

A.1
 Power Source 200 ~ 240VAC, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, 50/ 60 Hz
Tolerance Voltage tolerance: -15%, +10%, Frequency tolerance: ±5%
AMT-XXX-2 011 015 018 022 030 037 045 055 075 090
Rated Capacity (Hp) 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
Normal Duty

Max Continuous Rated

46 61 76 88 110 147 175 215 255 328
Current (A) (Note: 1)
Max Applicable Motor
011 015 018 022 030 037 045 055 075 090
(kW) (Note: 2)
Overload Current Rating 120% for 60 seconds, 140% for 2.5 seconds every 5 minutes
Rated Capacity (Hp) 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
Heavy Duty

Max Continuous Rated

37 46 61 76 88 110 147 175 215 255
Current (A) (Note: 1)
Max Applicable Motor
7.5 011 015 018 022 030 037 045 055 075
(kW) (Note: 2)
Overload Current Rating 150% for 60 seconds, 175% for 2.5 seconds every 5 minutes

13

A
Amtech

A.2
 Control Method Digital Space Vector PWM Control
Control Mode V/F, Closed loop V/F, Sensor less Vector Control, Closed loop Vector Control
Frequency Range 0.1 ~ 600 Hz for V/F Control
Frequency Accuracy Digital references: ±0.01% (0 ~ 50ºC) / Analog References: ±0.01% (0 ~ 50ºC)
Output Frequency 0.0001 Hz (20-bit)
Control Functions

Resolution
Frequency Setting 0.01 Hz Digital, 0.012 Hz/ 50 Hz Analog (12-bit)
Resolution
V/ Hz Characteristics 2-Preprogrammed patterns, 1-Custom 3-point setting pattern
Torque Boost Manual / Automatic Selective: 0~20%
Acceleration/ Deceleration 0.1~ 6,00,000 Seconds
Time Linear or S-Curve selective
Skip Frequency Three frequencies can be set, band can be set up to 10.0 Hz
Slip Compensation Slip compensation frequency up to 5.0 Hz
Carrier Frequency Default: 5 kHz, 2~10 kHz up to AMT-250-4, Default: 4 kHz, 2~6 kHz for AMT-315-4 and higher, 500V and
(Note: 3) 600V systems.
Speed Search Function Allows the drive to start with rotating machine without damage / tripping. Bump less transfer for redundancy
application (Optional)
Power Loss Carry Through Up to 5 seconds for smooth operation of system during power loss
DC Braking DC Braking start frequency 0.1~50 Hz, Time: 0~25 seconds, Brake current: 15 to 150%
Frequency Setting Input Digital Operation Panel (Keypad)
Potentiometer: 2 k Ohm
Programmable Analog Inputs
Static Pot: Frequency Increase/ Frequency Decrease using digital inputs
Preset Speeds: Using digital inputs Preset input-0, 1 & 2
PLC Analog output –1, 2, 3 & 4
Operation Specifications

Serial RS-485
Torque Setting Input Digital Operation Panel (keypad)
Potentiometer: 2 k Ohm
Programmable Analog Inputs
Static Pot: Frequency Increase/ Frequency Decrease using digital inputs
Preset Speeds: Using digital inputs Preset input-0, 1 & 2
PLC Analog output –1, 2, 3 & 4
Serial RS-485
Programmable Analog FSV: 0~5 Vdc or 0~10 Vdc (or Inverse)
Inputs FSI: 0~20 mA or 4~20 mA (or Inverse)
VIN: 0~10 Vdc (or Inverse)
IIN: 0~20 mA or 4~20 mA (or Inverse)
Digital Inputs 8-Programmable Sequence Inputs, Sink / Source changeable
Programmable to 42 different options: Not Used, Jog Select, Ramp Select, Preset i/p-0, Preset i/p-1, Preset
i/p-2, Freq Increase, Freq Decrease, Aux Drive, Emergency Stop, Fault Reset, Ext Fault, Reverse,
Terminal, Ref Select 0, Ref Select 1, PR Step Skip, PR Step Hold, PR/RSF Reset, PID Bypass, PID
Disable, Emergency Stop-NC, Ext Fault-NC, Run, Stop, Drive Enable-NC, Drive Enable-NO/STO, PLC
input 1, PLC input 2, PLC input 3, PLC input 4, PLC input 5, PLC input 6, PLC input 7, PLC input 8, Torque
mode, Ready1 F/B, Forward Run, Reverse Run, Forward Jog, Reverse Jog and MBRK Answer

13

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

A.3
 Digital outputs 4-Programmable Sequence Outputs, open collector type
Programmable to 40 different options: Not Used, Run, Local, Reverse Run, I-Detection, Freq Attain, Speed
Detect1, Speed Detect2, Acceleration, Deceleration, Aux Drive, Timer Output, Zero Speed, Fault Alarm, PID
Up Limit, PID Lo Limit, Temp Alarm, Ready, Pump-1, Pump-2, Pump-3, Pump-4, Doff-End Alarm, Sleep
Mode, Fault, PLC Output 1, PLC Output 2, PLC Output 3, PLC Output 4, PLC Output 5, PLC Output 6, PLC
Output 7 PID F/B ULmt, PID F/B LLmt, Fan Control, Ready1, MBRK, KEB ON, STO Feedback and Panel
Operation Specifications

Temperature Alarm
Potential Free Contacts 3-Programmable relays: 1-NO, 1-NC for 2A @ 240 VAC
Programmable to 40 different options same as digital outputs
Programmable Analog 2-Programmable analog voltage outputs VO1 & VO2: 0~10 Vdc
Outputs
2-Programmable analog current outputs IO1 & IO2: 4~20 mA
Programmable between 15 different options: Output Frequency, Output Current, Output Power, Output
Voltage, DC Bus Volt, PID Output, Heat sink temperature, PLC Analog Output 1, PLC Analog Output 2, PLC
Analog Outpu3, PLC Analog Output 4, Unipolar Torque Current, Excite Current, Set Frequency and Bipolar
Torque Current
Network connectivity RS-485 for PC Interface with Modbus-RTU protocol as standard
Auto Restart Adjustable up to 10 times for ten faults
PID Controller Inbuilt PID can be used as stand alone
Display and Keypad unit Total 80-Character, 4-Line LCD panel with backlit, 8-Key keypad, 3-Status indicating LED for Run, Stop and
Fault.
Display

Simultaneous display of eight selectable monitor parameters from Output frequency, RPM, Current, %
Current, Set frequency, PID Reference, PID Feedback, Input voltage Vry, Input voltage Vyb, Output voltage,
DC Bus voltage, kW, kWH, MWH, Heat sink temperature °C and °F, Set Torque, Torque Current, Excitation
Current, ASR O/P Monitor and ACR O/P Monitor
Protective Function Current Limit, Over current fault, Drive over load fault, Motor over load fault, Load side short circuit fault,
Under current fault, DC Bus Over voltage fault, DC Bus Under voltage fault, Temperature fault, Output phase
Specifications

loss fault, Earth (Ground) fault, External fault, Charging fault, Current sensor fail fault, EEPROM fault,
Protective

4~20mA reference missing fault, Auto tuning fault, Emergency stop, Communication loss, Output unbalance
current fault.
Smooth Operation Speed Search, Auto Restart and Power Loss Carry Through functions, Heat sink over temperature alarm,
KEB (kinetic energy buffering)
Fault history Last ten faults with status and eight operational parameters like output frequency, output current, dc bus
voltage and heat sink temperature, Input voltage, Total ON Time, kWH, MWH.
Installation location Indoor
Vibration As per EN 60068-2-6, Acceleration: 1g, Frequency: 10 Hz ~ 150 Hz
Environment

Ambient temperature 0~50°C (32 ~ 122°F), Open chassis module from 400 kW onwards
Storage temperature -20°C (-4°F) ~70°C (158°F)
Altitude (above sea level) 1000 m (3300 ft) without derating, above this derate 5% per 305 m (1000 ft)
Humidity 0~95% maximum non-condensing
Enclosure IP00

Consult Amtech for the details on models AMT-011-X to AMT-030-X

The input power factor is 0.9 with 3% ACL
The inverter efficiency will be >98%
Note1: Indicates the total effective value including the higher harmonics
Note2: The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard induction motor.
Note3: If the default carrier frequency is exceeded, derate the output current by 5% per 1 kHz as the reduced rating.

13

A
Amtech

A.4
Outline Dimensions

13

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

A.5
 400 Volt Series
Dimensions in mm (inch) Weight
Model in kg
A B C D E F G H L J ФK (lb)
AMT-011-4
AMT-015-4 469 251 262 196.5 438.5 61.5 81 61.5 15 10 18
-
AMT-018-4 (18.5) (9.8) (10.3) (7.7) (17.2) (2.4) (3.2) (2.4) (0.59) (0.39) (39.7)
AMT-022-4
AMT-030-4
AMT-037-4 585 250 300 196.5 565 61.5 186 61.5 10 10 31
-
AMT-045-4 (23.0) (9.8) (11.8) (7.7) (22.2) (2.4) (7.3) (2.4) (0.39) (0.39) (68.3)
AMT-055-4
AMT-075-4 700 322 365 217 680 98 145 98 10 11 45
-
13 AMT-090-4 (27.6) (12.7) (14.4) (8.5) (26.8) (3.9) (5.7) (3.9) (0.39) (0.43) (99.2)
AMT-110-4
AMT-132-4 970 360 364 305 940 127 238 106 15 11 76
-
(38.2) (14.2) (14.3) (12.0) (37.0) (5.0) (9.4) (4.2) (0.59) (0.43) (167.6)
A AMT-160-4

Amtech

A.6
 AMT-200-4
1185 480 321 400 1155 167 431 187 15 200 11 103
AMT-250-4 (46.6) (18.9) (12.6) (15.7) (45.5) (6.6) (17.0) (7.4) (0.59) (7.87) (0.43) (227.0)

AMT-315-4
1330 506 321 400 1300 155 528 224 15 200 11 138
AMT-355-4 (52.4) (19.9) (12.6) (15.7) (51.2) (6.1) (20.8) (8.8) (0.59) (7.87) (0.43) (304.2)

AMT-200-4-P
1085 468 326 186 839 181 587 160.5 15 176 11 89
AMT-250-4-P (42.7) (18.4) (12.8) (7.3) (33.0) (7.11) (23.1) (6.32) (0.59) (6.93) (0.43) (196.2)

AMT-315-4-P
1185 478 351 186 940 175.5 687 175.5 15 186 11 99
AMT-355-4-P (46.6) (18.7) (13.8) (7.3) (37.0) (6.9) (27.05) (6.9) (0.59) (7.3) (0.43) (218.2)

AMT-400-4 Consult AMTECH or nearest dealer for the dimension

~
AMT-15E-4

500 and 600 Volt Series

Dimensions in mm (inch) Weight
Model
A B C D E F G H L J ФK in kg (lb)
AMT-011-5, AMT-015-5, AMT-018-5, AMT-022-5, AMT-030-5
AMT-011-6, AMT-015-6, AMT-018-6, AMT-022-6, AMT-030-6, AMT-037-6
595 292 300 236.5 574.5 84 142.5 81 10 10 22
-
(23.4) (11.5) (11.8) (9.3) (22.6) (3.3) (5.6) (3.1) (0.39) (0.39) (48.5)
AMT-037-5, AMT-045-5, AMT-055-5
AMT-045-6, AMT-055-6, AMT-075-6

679.5 292 300 236.5 659.5 84 227.5 81 10 10 28.5

-
(26.7) (11.5) (11.8) (9.31) (26.0) (3.3) (9.0) (3.1) (0.39) (0.39) (62.8)

AMT-075-5, AMT-090-5, AMT-110-5

AMT-090-6, AMT-110-6, AMT-132-6
906 368.5 364.5 313 876 121 375 119 15 11 65
-
(35.7) (14.5) (14.3) (12.3) (34.5) (4.8) (14.8) (4.7) (0.59) (0.43) (143.3)
AMT-132-5, AMT-160-5
AMT-160-6, AMT-200-6
970 360 364 255 940 127 236.5 105.5 15 11 77.4
-
(38.2) (14.2) (14.3) (10.0) (37.0) (5.0) (9.3) (4.2) (0.59) (0.43) (170.6)
AMT-200-5, AMT-250-5, AMT-315-5
AMT-250-6, AMT-315-6, AMT-355-6
1247 506 321 400 1217 154.5 460 224.5 15 200 11 117.7
(49.0) (19.9) (12.6) (15.7) (47.9) (6.0) (18.1) (8.8) (0.59) (7.87) (0.43) (259.4)
AMT-200-5-P, AMT-250-5-P, AMT-315-5-P
AMT-250-6-P, AMT-315-6-P, AMT-355-6-P
1185 478 351 186 940 175.5 687 175.5 15 186 11 102
(46.6) (18.7) (13.8) (7.3) (37.0) (6.9) (27.05) (6.9) (0.59) (7.3) (0.43) (224.8)
AMT-355-5 ~ AMT-15E-5
AMT-400-6 ~ AMT-18E-6 13
Consult AMTECH or nearest dealer for the dimension

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

A.7
 Appendix-B: Fault Codes

Sr. Fault Name Fault Description

No.

1 Over Current Fault This fault indicates that the unit has tripped due to excessive over current
(200% of the rated current). This is very fast acting. A short circuit condition
on the output will also cause the unit to display this fault. The drive will not
take second start before 1 minute. 3 starts permitted in 10 minutes. After 3
starts, message will be displayed “Do not Reset, Contact AMTECH”
2 Drive Over Load Fault This fault Indicate that the output current exceeded the thermal operation time
having inverse time characteristics. When Normal-duty is set, the standard
characteristics are 120% for one minute in respect to the motor rated current
value and 140% for 2.5 seconds. When Heavy-duty is set, the standard is
150% for one minute in respect to the motor rated current value and 175% for
2.5 seconds. The over load counter starts after 100% load current for Normal
-duty and 105% load current for Heavy-duty.
3 Adjustable Over Current This fault occurs when load current cross the adjustable over current level
Fault programmed in B302 for 50 msec.
4 Under Current Fault This fault occurs when the load current falls below the programmed under
current level (B304) for 1 second after reaching set speed.
5 U Phase Current Sensor It indicates that U phase current sensor has failed.
Fail
6 Over Voltage Fault This fault occurs when the dc link voltage exceeds 785 VDC for 400 V series,
965 VDC for 500 V series and 1160 VDC for 600 V series level may be due to
increased mains voltage or regeneration. If this fault occurs. The fault is
instantaneous in order to protect the unit. Over voltage can be a serious
condition and can lead to failure of the semiconductor components. When an
over voltage fault occurs, the cause should be investigated and promptly
corrected. The drive will not take second start before 1 minute. 3 starts
permitted in 10 minutes. After 3 starts, message will be displayed “Do not
Reset, Contact AMTECH”
7 Under Voltage Fault This fault indicates that the unit has shut down due to the dc bus voltage
being low (below the under voltage level) after PLCT time (C509) for 3 msec
or PLCT activated 3 times in 1 minute.
8 Charging Fault This fault occurs when dc bus voltage doesn’t reach at preset level within 5
seconds after power ON.
9 Output Phase Loss This fault indicates that the one of the output phase has lost its current flow
(below 5%) and so the other two phases has over loaded (>70%) for five
cycles. This fault will not occur during speed search operation. It can be
disabled using C307. Note that this fault will not occur if the output
terminals are open circuit.
10 Reference Missing This fault occurs if the analog current input (4-20 mA) falls below 3 mA for 80
msec when it is selected as reference source.
11 External Fault This fault occurs if the external fault input selected at the terminal is missing.
This comes from the user.
12 Thermistor Over This fault occurs if heat sink temperature ≥90 °C or <0°C for 2 second. In
Temperature Fault cases of multiple Inverter Units, this fault is for the first Inverter Unit.
13 Auto Tuning Fault This fault indicates that the unit has failed in the auto tuning process.
14 Emergency Stop This fault indicates that the unit has shut down due to the emergency stop
13 command.
15 EEPROM Fault This fault indicates that the data received from the EEPROM is incorrect.
After reset, it will store default values in the EEPROM memory.
A 16 Ground (Earth) Fault This fault indicates that the unit has shut down due to ground fault. This fault

Amtech

A.8
Sr. Fault Name Fault Description
No.
comes, when the earth current is higher then the value set in B306 for 100
msec. Before reset, check that any output is not shorted with the ground. Set
to 0% to disable the function. The drive will not take second start before 1
minute. 3 starts permitted in 10 minutes. After 3 starts, message will be
displayed “Do not Reset, Contact AMTECH”
17 Communication Loss If the slave (main control unit) is not responding to the master (Digital
Operation Panel), this fault will occur. It is auto reset type. If the
communication resumes, this will be cleared. In this fault, the AC DRIVE
functioning will be affected only if C405=1.
18 Output Current This fault indicates that the unbalance in output current between any two-
Unbalance output phases is higher then the set value in B314 for 10 seconds. Set to 0%
to disable the function.
19 Driver Fault This fault indicates that problem in either driver card or connection between
control and driver card.
20 Speed Deviation Fault This fault occurs when the speed command and speed detection difference is
higher than the set level in B612 for B626 time. This fault is applicable in
closed loop V/f, closed loop vector control and sensor less vector control
mode is selected.
21 Over Speed Fault This fault occurs when the detection speed is equal to or higher than the set
level in B611 for 1 second. This fault is applicable in closed loop V/f, closed
loop vector control and sensor less vector control mode is selected.
22 IU-2 Temperature Fault** This fault occurs if heat sink temperature ≥90 °C or ≤0°C for 2 seconds of
23 IU-3 Temperature Fault** respective inverter unit.
24 IU-4 Temperature Fault**
25 IU-5 Temperature Fault**
26 DU-1 Temperature This fault occurs if heat sink temperature ≥90 °C or <0°C for 2 seconds of
Fault ** respective diode unit.
27 DU-2 Temperature
Fault**
28 IU-1 Current Sensor It indicates that one or more current sensor has failed of respective inverter
Fail** unit. These faults applicable only for PCA-2013A parallel interface board.
29 IU-2 Current Sensor
Fail**
30 IU-3 Current Sensor
Fail**
31 IU-4 Current Sensor
Fail**
32 IU-5 Current Sensor
Fail**
33 IU-1 I-Unbalance Fault** This fault indicates unbalance in output current of the Inverter Units. If due to
34 IU-2 I-Unbalance Fault** the unbalance, the output current of one or more Inverter Unit exceeds its
rated current for 60 seconds, this fault will come. The rated current of each
35 IU-3 I-Unbalance Fault** Inverter Unit is 600 A for 400 V Series and 387 A (415 A for 7.10C control
36 IU-4 I-Unbalance Fault** version and above) for 500/600 V Series.
37 IU-5 I-Unbalance Fault** 13
38 Thermostat Over This fault occurs if heat sink temperature ≥90 °C. In cases of multiple Inverter
Temperature Fault Units, this fault is for the first Inverter Unit. This fault will also come if one or
more temperature switch is open.
A

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

A.9
 Sr. Fault Name Fault Description
No.
39 Thermistor NC (Not This fault occurs if heat sink temperature <= -10°C for 2 seconds. In cases of
Connected) Fault multiple Inverter Units, this fault is for the first Inverter Unit. This fault will also
come if thermistor is not connected or loosely.
40 V Phase Current Sensor It indicates that V phase current sensor has failed.
Fail
41 W Phase Current Sensor It indicates that W phase current sensor has failed.
Fail
42 Thermistor Short Fault This fault occurs if thermistor sensor is short.
43 Thermostat NC (Not This fault will come if thermostat is not connected or loosely.
Connected) Fault
44 Ext Brake RUN Error This fault occurs if RUN did not turn OFF after engaging the external brake.
Fault
45 Ext Brake Ans Error This fault occurs if the brake command and answer signal from the brake do
Fault not match.
46 IU-1 U Phase Current It indicates that current sensor has failed of respective U/V/W phase of
Sensor Fail** respective inverter unit. These faults applicable only for PCA-2049A parallel
47 IU-1 V Phase Current interface board.
Sensor Fail**
48 IU-1 W Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
49 IU-2 U Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
50 IU-2 V Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
51 IU-2 W Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
52 IU-3 U Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
53 IU-3 V Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
54 IU-3 W Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
55 IU-4 U Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
56 IU-4 V Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
57 IU-4 W Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
58 IU-5 U Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
59 IU-5 V Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
60 IU-5 W Phase Current
13 Sensor Fail**
61 IU-6 U Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
62 IU-6 V Phase Current
A Sensor Fail**

Amtech

A.10
 Sr. Fault Name Fault Description
No.
63 IU-6 W Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
64 IU-6 I-Unbalance Fault** This fault indicates unbalance in output current of the Inverter Units. If due to
the unbalance, the output current of one or more Inverter Unit exceeds its
rated current for 60 seconds, this fault will come. The rated current of each
Inverter Unit is 600 A for 400 V Series and 387 A (415 A for 7.10C control
version and above) for 500/600 V Series. This fault applicable only for PCA-
2049A parallel interface board.
65 IU-6 Temperature Fault** This fault occurs if heat sink temperature ≥90 °C or ≤0°C for 2 seconds of
inverter unit 6. This fault applicable only for PCA-2049A parallel interface
board.
66 Motor Over Load Fault This fault Indicates that the motor current exceeded the thermal operation
time having inverse time characteristics. Parameter B119 (motor overload
selection) will affect this fault.
67 Panel Temperature Fault This fault Indicates that the panel inside temperature is > C324 (Panel
Temperature Limit). Fault will be reset if panel inside temperature is < C324
(Panel Temperature Limit) - 5 °C. This fault is applicable for IU/DU system.
** This Fault is only applicable when multiple inverter units (IU) are used.

13

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

A.11
 Appendix-C: Trouble Shooting Guidelines

In case of fault condition, first ensure that the mains voltage applied at L1, L2 and L3 are ok.
Then check the control supply voltage in PCA-2014A.

Sr. No. Measure @ Expected Voltage

1 1,J8 4,J8 +20V ~ 25.5VDC
2 2,J8 4,J8 +14.9 ~ 15.1VDC
3 3,J8 4,J8 +4.75 ~ 5.25VDC
4 5,J8 4,J8 -13.5 ~ 16.5VDC
5 3.3VD DGND +3 ~ 3.6VDC
6 1.9VD 4,J8 +1.86 ~ 1.94VDC

If the above voltages are correct, check the following jumper positions.

Jumper Position
1. The equipment is shipped with JP2 in 10V position. When connecting potentiometer at FSV or
using 0-10V signals, ensure that JP2 is put in the 10V position.

2. The equipment is shipped with sink logic (JP1 is kept on Sink position) for the programmable
sequence inputs. To change the sink logic to source, change the jumper JP1 position to Source.

3. The equipment is shipped with JP3 in NLD position. This means the terminating resistors are not in
picture. To insert the terminating resistors, keep the jumper to LD position.

If the above jumper positions are correct, check the following as per the fault displayed on the
Operation Panel (LCD Display)

No. Fault Name Causes & Countermeasures

1 Over Current Fault If fault comes during stop condition,
1. The power module(s) in the main circuit may be damaged.
Switch off the power supply and check the power module(s).
2. There may be loose connection or improper connection of current
sensor cable or shorting in the cable.
Switch off the power supply and remove the cable. Check again. If
no fault is observed, there can be a problem in cable or connection.
Check the cable on both the sides for proper crimping. Insert the
cable properly and check again. If still problem persist, replace the
cable.
3. Current sensor may have failed.
Switch off the power supply and remove current sensor. Check
again. If no fault is observed identify the damaged current sensor
and replace it.
4. The fault may be from Driver Board side.
Switch off the power supply and remove the FRC in case of wire
interface. Check the cable on both the sides for proper crimping.
Insert the cable properly and check again. If the fault persists,
proceed for the next step.
In case of fiber optic interface, remove all the fiber optic cables,
check them and insert them again properly. Check again. If the
13 fault persists, proceed for the next test.
5. IGBT Gate Driver board may have problem.
Replace the IGBT Gate Driver board and check again. Take anti-
static precautions while changing the board.
A If fault occurs during acceleration when the motor is connected,
Amtech

A.12
No. Fault Name Causes & Countermeasures
1. Make sure that the parameters are set properly. Abnormal setting
of V/F, Torque Boost, Acceleration time, Speed search function
related parameters and current limit may result in over current or
damage to the power devices.
2. Increase the acceleration time (A201 / A203).
3. Reduce torque boost settings (A501 / A502)

If fault occurs during normal run with load condition,

1. A sudden change in the load or short circuit may have occurred at
output. Reduce the load fluctuation and/ or any short circuit
condition at the output.
2. If the current fluctuation is observed, adjust the DTC gain B111
such that the fluctuation disappears.
3. One or more current sensor may be partially damaged.
Measure the voltage at pin-3, 7 and 11 of connector J12 with
respect to J8:4 in PCA-2014A. When the measured output current
is balance, the voltage level at these pins should be approx. equal.
If any output observed uncommon, replace the respective current
sensor and check again.
4. Check the value of snubber capacitors mounted on the IGBT and
replace if found abnormal.
5. IGBT driver may have problem.
Replace the driver board and check.

If fault occurs during deceleration,

1. Increase the deceleration time (A202 / A204).
2. Abnormal setting of DC braking parameters can result in over
current fault during deceleration. Reduce the dc braking start
frequency (A306) and dc braking time (A308) settings if used.
2 Drive Over Load Fault 1. The AC Drive may have overloaded.
Ensure that motor current data are properly set in B103.
Reduce the load or increase the motor and AC DRIVE capacity
2. If this occurs at low speed, reduce the torque boost settings (A501 /
A502) or DC braking settings (A307 / A308)
3 Adjustable Over Current 1. The motor current data are set incorrectly. Set correct motor
Fault current data in B103.
2. The adjustable over current settings are too low.
Increase the adjustable over current level (B302).
3. The output current is too high.
Reduce the motor load.
4. Disable the feature by setting 300% in B302.
4 Under Current Fault 1. Under Current Limit B304 is set too low.
2. Disable the feature by setting 0% in B304.
5 U Phase Current Sensor 1. Loose connection of hall current sensor cable connected at J12 of
Fail Fault PCA-2014A. Switch off the unit and remove the cable. Check for
proper crimping of cable on both sides. If found abnormal, replace
the cable and check again.
2. One or more current sensor has failed.
Remove connector J12 and reset the fault. If the fault can be reset,
find out which current sensor has failed.
3. If after removing connector J12, the problem persists, replace
PCA−2014A.
13
6 Over Voltage Fault 1. The power supply voltage may have risen above 785 VDC for 400
V series, 965 VDC for 500 V series and 1160 VDC for 600 V series.
Reduce the voltage to within the specified range.
2. The speed may be fluctuating.
A

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

A.13
 No. Fault Name Causes & Countermeasures
Adjust B111 to prevent the hunting of motor.
2
3. If the fault is coming during deceleration, the load GD may be too
2
large. Set the ramp down time according to the load GD .
4. Loose connection of dc bus voltage feedback at J9 of PCA-2014A.
Ensure proper connections.
5. Check the value of snubber capacitors mounted on the IGBT and
replace if found abnormal.
6. Check the output line or motor. Check that any output is not
shorted with the ground. Partially damaged output cables can also
lead to this condition.
7 Under Voltage Fault 1. DC Bus voltage may have fallen below the under voltage level. A
drop in voltage, phase dropout or power supply failure may have
occurred. Check the input power supply and correct it if necessary.
2. Check soft charge contactor or connection.
8 Charging Fault 1. The dc bus voltage didn’t reach to predefined voltage level within 5
seconds after power up.
Soft charge resistor may be open.
One or more phases may have failed.
Dc bus voltage feedback may be missing. Ensure proper
connection of dc bus voltage feedback at J9.
9 Output Phase Loss 1. There may be a single phasing of the motor.
Disconnect and check the motor.
2. One or more output cables are open or loose connected.
Check the output connections and correct it.
3. There may be problem in current sensors.
4. Disable the feature using C307.
10 Reference Missing 1. Analog current input reference (4-20 mA) to the unit is below 3 mA.
Check the voltage level at FSI terminal of PCA-2014A.
11 External Fault 1. The signal for the external fault is present at the PSI.
Check and correct it.
2. If the signal is not present, remove the selection of the external
fault with the help of Mode-C parameters.
3. There may be a problem in PCA-2014A.
Remove the control board PCA-2014A.
12 Thermistor Over 1. A trouble may have occurred in the cooling blower.
Temperature Fault Replace it if necessary.
2. The ambient temperature may have risen.
Lower the ambient temperature (less than 50 °C for 400 V series or
less than 40 °C for 500 V / 600 V series).
3. The carrier frequency may be set too high.
4. The temperature switch (thermostat) or thermistor is not connected
or loosely connected at J16 and J13 respectively. Disconnect
thermostat switch connection at J16 and ensure that the thermostat
shows short circuit. Disconnect the thermistor and ensure that the
thermistor shows resistance greater than 2.2 kΩ but less than 60
kΩ. Reconnect thermostat and thermistor properly.
13 Auto Tuning Fault 1. The auto tuning process has failed. The motor parameter setting
value may be incorrect.
Set correct motor parameter.
13 Ensure that motor is directly connected to the inverter (remove any
additional components if any like output choke etc. when
performing auto tuning).
14 Emergency Stop 1. The signal for the emergency stop input is present at the PSI.
A Check and correct it.
2. If the signal is not present, remove the selection for emergency
Amtech

A.14
No. Fault Name Causes & Countermeasures
stop with the help of Mode-C parameters.
3. There may be a problem in PCA-2014A.
Remove the control board PCA-2014A.
15 EEPROM Fault 1. Data received from the EEPROM is incorrect or out of range.
On fault reset, default values will be stored in the EEPROM.
Ensure proper earth connection to the unit and inside the unit.
2. If again fault occurs after power recycling, replace PCA-2014A.
16 Ground Fault 1. Ground fault may have occurred in the output line or motor.
Check that any output is not shorted with the ground. Partially
damaged output cables can also lead to this condition.
2. One or more current sensor may have problem.
Remove the current sensor feedback and check.
3. If still fault persists, replace PCA-2014A; otherwise replace the
problematic current sensor.
17 Communication Loss 1. Check the communication cable between master (LCD Display
unit) and slave (Main control unit).
2. Disable the fault using C405. This will allow the inverter to run in
case of communication loss between the PCA-2014A DSP control
board and PCA-2012 LCD display board.
3. There may be problem in display board PCA-2012.
Replace the display board PCA-2012 and check again.
4. There may be problem in control board PCA-2014A. If +5 V supply
or +3.3 V supply is not coming then also this fault will come.
Check the power supply unit and if found problem replace it or replace
the DSP control board PCA-2014A and check again.
18 Output Current 1. Check the setting of B314. Correct the setting if it is too low.
Unbalance 2. Go through the below steps and if it does not help, disable it by
setting 0% to B314.

If fault occurs during acceleration when the motor is connected,

1. Make sure that the parameters are set properly. Abnormal setting
of V/F, Torque Boost, Acceleration time and Speed search function
related parameters and current limit may result in output current
unbalance.
2. Increase the acceleration time (A201 / A203).
3. Reduce torque boost settings (A501 / A502).

If fault occurs during normal run with load condition,

1. A sudden change in the load may have occurred at output. Reduce
the load fluctuation at the output.
2. If the current fluctuation is observed, adjust the DTC gain B111
such that the fluctuation disappears.
3. One or more current sensor may be partially damaged.
Measure the voltage at pin-3, 7 and 11 of connector J12 with
respect to J8:4 in PCA-2014A. When the measured output current
is balance, the voltage level at these pins should be approx. equal.
If any output observed uncommon, replace the respective current
sensor and check again.
4. Check the motor connection with inverter and at motor terminal. If
any connection is open or loose, correct it.

If fault occurs during deceleration,

13
1. Increase the deceleration time (A202 / A204).
2. Abnormal setting of DC braking parameters can result in unbalance
current fault during deceleration. Reduce the dc braking start
frequency (A306) and dc braking time (A308) settings if used. A

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

A.15
 No. Fault Name Causes & Countermeasures
19 Driver Fault 1. The fault may be from Driver Board side.
Switch off the power supply and remove the FRC in case of wire
interface. Check the cable on both the sides for proper crimping.
Insert the cable properly and check again. If the fault persists,
proceed for the next step.
In case of fiber optic interface, remove all the fiber optic cables,
check them and insert them again properly. Check again. If the
fault persists, proceed for the next test.
2. IGBT Gate Driver board may have problem.
Replace the IGBT Gate Driver board and check again. Take anti-
static precautions while changing the board.
3. Check the SMPS supply voltage.
20 Speed Deviation Fault 1. Check the encoder wiring.
2. Check the proper earthing of encoder.
3. Problem in auto tuning parameter. Enter the correct motor
parameter and repeat the procedure for auto tuning.
21 Over Speed Fault 1. Check the encoder wiring.
2. Check the proper earthing of encoder.
3. Problem in auto tuning parameter. Enter the correct motor
parameter and repeat the procedure for auto tuning.
22 IU-2 Temperature Fault** 1. A trouble may have occurred in the cooling blower of respective
23 IU-3 Temperature Fault** Inverter or diode unit in case of parallel inverter.
Replace it if necessary.
24 IU-4 Temperature Fault** 2. The ambient temperature may have risen.
25 IU-5 Temperature Fault** Lower the ambient temperature (less than 50 °C for 400 V series or
less than 40 °C for 500 V / 600 V series).
26 DU-1 Temperature Fault** 3. The carrier frequency may be set too high.
27 DU-2 Temperature Fault** 4. The thermistor is not connected or loosely connected at J16 of
PCA-2014A and TB1 of PCA-2013A / TB-1 to TB7 of PCA-2049A
respectively. Disconnect the thermistor and ensure that the
thermistor shows resistance greater than 2.2 kΩ, but less than 60
kΩ. Reconnect thermistor properly.
28 IU-1 Current Sensor Fail** 1. Loose connection of hall current sensor cable connected at J11 to
29 IU-2 Current Sensor Fail** J15 of PCA-2013A.
Switch off the unit and remove the cable. Check for proper crimping
30 IU-3 Current Sensor Fail** of cable on both sides. If found abnormal, replace the cable and
31 IU-4 Current Sensor Fail** check again.
2. One or more current sensor has failed.
32 IU-5 Current Sensor Fail** Remove connector J11 to J15 and reset the fault. If the fault can be
reset, find out which current sensor has failed.
3. If after removing connector J11 to J15, the problem persists,
replace PCA- 2013A.
33 IU-1 I-Unbalance Fault** 1. Check whether the sensors are connected properly or not. If the
34 IU-2 I-Unbalance Fault** sensor of one or more Inverter Unit is not connected, this fault may
come.
35 IU-3 I-Unbalance Fault** 2. There may be problem with the driver board or fiber optic cable.
36 IU-4 I-Unbalance Fault** Check the driver board and fiber optic connections. If required
replace it.
37 IU-5 I-Unbalance Fault** 3. There may be loose connection of the fiber optic cable or problem
with the Fiber Optic Interface Board PCA-96A. Checks the
13 connection with of the fiber optic cables are if required change the
PCA-96A.
4. Check the current sensor connections at Driver Interface Board
PCA-2013A/ PCA-2049A or at adapter board PCA-185. If required,
change the board.
A
Amtech

A.16
No. Fault Name Causes & Countermeasures
38 Thermostat Over 1. A trouble may have occurred in the cooling fan/ blower.
Temperature Fault Replace it if necessary.
2. The ambient temperature may have risen.
Lower the ambient temperature (less than 50 °C for 400V series or
less than 40 °C for 500V / 600V series).
3. The carrier frequency may be set too high.
4. The temperature switch (thermostat) is not connected or loosely
connected at J16.
Disconnect thermostat switch connection at J16 and ensure that
the thermostat shows short circuit. Reconnect thermostat properly.
39 Thermistor NC (Not 1. The thermistor is not connected or loosely connected at J13.
Connected) Fault Disconnect the thermistor and ensure that the thermistor shows
resistance greater than 2.2 kΩ but less than 60 kΩ. Reconnect
thermistor properly.
40 V Phase Current Sensor 1. Same as per U Phase Current Sensor Fail Fault (No. 5).
Fail
41 W Phase Current Sensor
Fail
42 Thermistor Short Fault 1. Check the thermistor sensor.
43 Thermostat NC (Not 1. The temperature switch (thermostat) is not connected or loosely
Connected) Fault connected at J16. Disconnect thermostat switch connection at J16
and ensure that the thermostat shows short circuit. Reconnect
thermostat properly.
44 Ext Brake RUN Error 1. RUN did not turn OFF after engaging the external brake.
Fault Check that the settings are correct, or that the RUN command is
OFF within C321.
45 Ext Brake Ans Error Fault 1. The brake command and answer signal from the brake do not
match. Check the answer signal from the brake.
46 IU-1 U Phase Current 1. Loose connection of hall current sensor cable connected at TB1 to
Sensor Fail** TB6 of PCA-2049A.
47 IU-1 V Phase Current Switch off the unit and remove the cable. Check for proper crimping
Sensor Fail** of cable on both sides. If found abnormal, replace the cable and
check again.
48 IU-1 W Phase Current 2. One or more current sensor has failed.
Sensor Fail** Remove connector TB1 to TB6 and reset the fault. If the fault can
49 IU-2 U Phase Current be reset, find out which current sensor has failed.
Sensor Fail** 3. If after removing connector TB1 to TB6, the problem persists,
replace PCA- 2049A.
50 IU-2 V Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
51 IU-2 W Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
52 IU-3 U Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
53 IU-3 V Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
54 IU-3 W Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
13
55 IU-4 U Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
56 IU-4 V Phase Current
Sensor Fail** A

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

A.17
 No. Fault Name Causes & Countermeasures
57 IU-4 W Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
58 IU-5 U Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
59 IU-5 V Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
60 IU-5 W Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
61 IU-6 U Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
62 IU-6 V Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
63 IU-6 W Phase Current
Sensor Fail**
64 IU-6 I-Unbalance Fault** 1. Check whether the sensors are connected properly or not.
If the sensor of one or more Inverter Unit is not connected, this fault
may come.
2. There may be problem with the driver board or fiber optic cable.
Check the driver board and wire connections. If required replace it.
3. There may be loose connection of the cable or problem with the
Adaptor Board PCA-185.
Check the connection with Adaptor Board and if required change
the PCA-185.
4. Check the current sensor connections at Driver Interface Board
PCA-2049A. If required, change the board.
65 IU-6 Temperature Fault** 1. A trouble may have occurred in the cooling blower of respective
Inverter unit in case of parallel inverter. Replace it if necessary.
2. The ambient temperature may have risen.
Lower the ambient temperature (less than 50 °C for 400V series or
less than 40 °C for 500V / 600V series).
3. The carrier frequency may be set too high.
4. The thermistor is not connected or loosely connected at TB6 of
PCA-2049A respectively. Disconnect the thermistor and ensure
that the thermistor shows resistance greater than 2.2kΩ but less
than 60kΩ. Reconnect thermistor properly.
66 Motor Over Load Fault 1. The motor current has exceeded the motor overload counter.
Ensure that motor current data are properly set in B103 and B119.
Reduce the load or increase the motor and AC Drive capacity.
If this occurs at low speed, reduce the torque boost settings (A501 /
A502) or DC braking settings (A307 / A308).
67 Panel Temperature Fault 1. Check the Panel fan.
2. Check the Panel temperature limit in parameter C324.

** This Fault is only applicable when multiple inverter units (IU) are used.
Remote mounting of Digital Operation Panel (keypad)
The Digital Operation Panel of Axpert-Eazy Series inverter modules can be extended to remote or
13 panel. To extend the digital operation panel, order the display cable as per the required distance.
Follow below steps to mount the Digital Operation Panel.

1. Open the front green cover mounted with four screws.

A
Amtech

A.18
 2. Digital Operation Panel is mounted on the card plate with the help of four M4 screws and
display clamp. First remove the display cable from the Digital Operation Panel. Now, remove
the Digital Operation Panel with display clamp from the card plate by opening four M4 screws.
3. Digital Operation Panel is mounted on the display clamp using four M4 nuts. Remove this
clamp.
4. Put cutout (dimensions are given in the below fig) in the front door of the panel or wherever
the digital operation panel is to be mounted.
5. Follow below sequence shown in the fig. to mount the Digital Operation Panel.
6. The keypad of the Digital Operation Panel is fitted on green plate. This plate has four M3 bolt,
10 mm (0.4”) long on the backside.
7. Insert these studs into the holes provided on the panel and fit it with the washer and nut.

13

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

A.19
 Appendix-D: Revision History

Compatible
Sr. Control Effective
Changes display
No Version date
version
1 7.04 - Incorporation of 500 V and 600 V series in new 7.04 19/02/2011
software.
- Parameters (A110 to A112) are added for
speed reference selection using ref select 0
and ref select 1 through PSI
- Added two sets in B315 for copy-paste
function and now there are total five sets of
copy paste function
- I-detection hysteresis level added in C314.
- Torque current, excitation current and set
frequency options added in C201 to C204 for
analog outputs.
- Two options added for dc bus voltage control
in B307.
- Default value of time constant changed from
50mS to 100mS for analog input in C219 and
C220.
- Problem of 4-20mA ref loss during power on
condition is resolved.
- Selection is provided for stall current limit
either from local or VIN in A309

2 7.05 - Added functionality related to parallel inverters 7.05 15/03/2011

for higher capacity models.
- Resolution changed from 1 to 0.1 for stall
current limit (B301) and stall current limit
auxiliary (D401).
- The default value of slip frequency is changed
from 0 to 2.0 Hz for V/F closed loop mode.
- Torque mode selection option provided in PSI.
- “RUN” Status provided in status code in
Modbus parameter.

3 7.06 - Redefined no. of IU & DU for model range 7.06 27/01/2012

from 800 kW to 1400 kW and added one more
model 1550 kW for 400 V series AC drive.
- Added two function 33: PID Feedback Upper
Limit 34: PID feedback Lower Limit in all PSO.
- Added encoder count (M217) parameter in the
A601 ~ A608.
- Defined inverter type KW (M305) parameter as
per series name like AMT-XXX-4, AMT-XXX-5
and AMT-XXX-6.
- Added one parameter (M710) to display driver
fault status for Inverter unit (IU) units.

4 7.08 - Changed default value of Local Set Frequency 7.08 01/11/2012

A101 and D201 are 10Hz.
- Changed min value of parameters A107 is –
13 200%, C205~C207 are 0.1, C208 is 100, C209
is 0.1, C210 is 100, C211 is 0.1, C213 is 0.1,
C215 is 0.1 and C217 is 0.1.
- Added new parameters A113, B117, B613,
A B614, B615, B710, C510 and C511.
- Changed default value of parameters B605 is
Amtech

A.20
 Compatible
Sr. Control Effective
Changes display
No Version date
version
20, B606 is 0.8sec, B607 is 100% and C505 is
70%.
- Changed Max value of parameters
A601~A608 are 20, B605 is 100, C201~C204
are 15, C401 is 6 and C506 is 30sec.
- When STOP key is pressed for 2.5 seconds or
longer during operation, the drive will coast to
stop regardless of Local or Terminal start
control.
5 7.09 - Added new parameters M218, M219, B118, 7.09 01/03/2014
C315, C316, C223 and A310.
- Changed default value of B109, B612, B702,
C205~C218 and C221~C222. Also default
value updated of A501 as per model and
motor parameters
- Changed minimum value of A101, A102,
A104, A306, A405~A407, B401~B407,
B501~B503, C616, D201~D202 and D303.
- Changed maximum value of C214 and C218.
- Added function 35: FAN Control and 36:
Ready1 in all PSO. Added 37: Ready1 F/B,
38: Forward Run, 39: Reverse Run, 40:
Forward Jog and 41: Reverse Jog in all PSI.
- Frequency change rate changed from Normal
screen.
- Hot start and Cold start overload curve added.
- Differentiated temperature fault
- PLC options added in parameters A110, A111
and A112.
- Add AMP and kW unit in parameter C614.
- “Parameters lock” screen displayed when
parameters are locked. “Control Version Not
Compatible” screen displayed when version is
not compatible during paste operation.
- Added Time-out in MODBUS protocol.
- Resolution changed in PLC analog output
instruction.
- Added rotational auto-tuning in B201.
6 7.10 - Added new parameters M220, M221, M621 ~ 7.10 07/06/2017
M624, M711 ~ M715, B119, B317 ~ B324,
B616 ~ B627, B711, B712, B801 ~ B816,
C317 ~ C324.
- Changed minimum value of B104, B604 and
D103.
- Changed maximum value of B108.
- Changed default value of B604, B606, B612.
- Added 26 and 42 options in PSI.
- Added 37 ~ 40 options in PSO, more units in
C614.
- Added extended rotational auto-tuning option
(B201:4).
- Differentiated individual phase current sensor 13
fail fault.
- Added faults like Thermistor short, Thermostat
not connected (NC), Brake related fault and

-
Panel temperature fault.
Timed Over Current fault changed to Drive
A

Axpert-Eazy AC Variable Frequency Drive

A.21
 Compatible
Sr. Control Effective
Changes display
No Version date
version
Over Load fault.
- Added Motor Over Load fault.
- Added Current sensor fail fault for individual
phase for individual IU, IU-6 Unbalance and
IU-6 temperature fault for parallel interface
board (PCA-2049A).
- Frequency reference scaling changed for
analog input. It depends on minimum and
maximum parameter.
- Added display key (NORM/ESC and GROUP
+ DOWN) function.
- Added PLC instruction in PB01 to PC10.
- Changed ARL address.
- Changed M308 LCD name.
- Added Default Differ function in Mode-M,
Group-8.

13

A
Amtech

A.22
Notes:
Notes:
AMTECH